Standard Specification of Roads and Bridges-dor (2058, July 2001)
Standard Specification of Roads and Bridges-dor (2058, July 2001)
Standard Specification of Roads and Bridges-dor (2058, July 2001)
DEPARTMENT OF ROADS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ROAD AND BRIDGE WORKS
Page No.
101 OFFICES FOR ENGINEER 1-1
102 ACCOMODATION OF TRAFFIC 1-1
103 PUBLICLY AND PRIVATELY OWNED SERVICES 1-4
104 SURVEY AND SETTING OUT 1-5
105 ACCESS TO ABUTING PROPERTIES 1-6
106 DIVERSION BRIDGES 1-6
107 MAINTENANCE OF ROAD 1-7
108 NOTICE BOARD 1-8
109 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION WORKS 1-8
110 PHOTOGRAPHS 1-12
111 SUPPLY OF VIDEO CASSETTES 1-13
112 NOTES ABOUT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1-13
113 NATIONAL SPECIFICATIONS 1-14
114 EQUIVALENCY OF STANDARDS 1-15
115 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT, ABBREVIATIONS AND 1-15
TERMINALOGY
116 PROGRAMME 1-17
SECTION 100 – GENERAL
The Contractor shall provide and maintain offices for the use of the Engineer and
his staff if provided in the contract.
(1) Scope
The Contractor shall take precaution regarding safety at road works. The
Contractor shall strictly adhere to the stipulations of the latest publication of
the document “SAFETY AT ROAD WORKS: A Code of Practice for
Signing at Road works” published by the Traffic Engineering and Safety
Unit of the Design Branch of the Department of Roads.
The Contractor shall at all times carry out works on the road in a manner
creating least interference to the flow of traffic. For all works involving
improvements of the existing road, the Contractor shall provide and
maintain a passage for traffic either along a part of the existing carriageway
under improvement, or along a temporary diversion constructed close to the
road. The Contractor shall take prior approval of the Engineer regarding
traffic arrangements during construction.
Access to properties which fall within or adjoining the area over which
work is being carried out shall be provided in the manner as existed
before the start of the work.
Diversions shall be shaped and graded making full use of all material
that can be sufficient material cannot be obtained in this manner,
material shall be imported from other sources. Where necessary,
cuttings shall be made to obtain a satisfactory vertical alignment. All
necessary clearing including the removal of all trees and stumps shall
be performed. Where the sub-grade is not sufficiently compacted in its
natural condition, it shall be compacted as specified in Section 900
prior to the commencement of the earthworks.
All fill material shall be compacted to a density of at least 90% of
maximum dry density (Heavy Compaction).
When traffic is routed permanently onto the new road following the
completion of construction, the diversions which are no longer
required shall be removed and the ground reinstated to its original
condition.
Where by reason of difficult terrain or for any other reason, the construction
of diversions is not possible, the road shall be constructed at the time. The
lengths of the half width for construction shall be kept to a minimum, with a
provision for traffic traveling in opposite directions to pass at frequent
intervals.
The works in one half width of the road shall be so arranged that the traffic
will have free one-way movement in another half during construction period.
That half of the road which is being used for traffic, shall be maintained free
of corrugations and potholes.
Wherever possible the Contractor shall ensure that the whole road width is
open at night. Should the road not be in a safe trafficable condition for two-
way traffic over the whole width, at the end of each day’s work the
Contractor shall adequate flagmen, signs, barriers, and the necessary staff at
his own cost to ensure a reasonable free flow of traffic alternately in each
direction.
Materials and equipment stored on, or adjacent to the existing roadway shall
be so placed and the work at all times shall be so conducted, as to cause no
obstruction of the traveling public and traffic.
(5) Traffic Safety and Control
The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain such barricades, including
signs, markings, flags, lights and flagmen as may be required for the
information and protection of traffic approaching to or passing through the
section of the road under improvement and/or diversions. Barricades, traffic
signs and warning boards shall be provided as per the Traffic Signs
Manual (Latest Publication) published by the Traffic Engineering and
Safety Unit of the Design Branch of the Department of Roads.
In some locations steel drums may also be placed. These drums shall be
whit-washed, blasted with sand and provided with retro reflective tape strips,
red on the left hand side facing on coming traffic and white on the right
hand side as appropriate. The minimum size of these tapes shall be 0.01
sq.m. The drums shall be maintained in a clean and effective condition and
no stones or any other warning device shall be placed on top of the drums
(1) If any privately owned service for water, electricity, drainage, etc., passing
through the site is affected by the works the Contractor shall provide a
satisfactory alternative service in full working order to the satisfaction of the
owner of the services and of the Engineer before terminating the existing
service.
(2) Drawing and scheduling the affected services like water pipes, sewers,
cables, etc. owned by various authorities including Public Undertakings
Local Authorities included in the contract documents shall be verified by the
Contractor for the accuracy of the information prior to the commencement
of any work.
(3) Notwithstanding the fact that the information on affected services may not
be exhaustive, the final position of these services within the works shall be
supposed to have been indicated based on the information furnished by
different bodies and to the extent the bodies are familiar with the final
position. The Contractor must also allow for any effect of these services
and alternatives upon the works and for arranging regular meetings with the
various bodies at the commencement of the contract and throughout the
period of the works in order to maintain the required co-ordination. During
the period of the works, the Contractor shall agree if the public utility bodies
vary their decisions in the execution of their proposals in terms of
programme and construction, provided that, in the opinion of the Engineer,
the Contractor has received reasonable notice thereof before the relevant
alternations are put in hand.
(4) No clearance or alternations to the utility shall be carried out unless ordered
by the Engineer.
(5) Any services affected by the works shall be restored immediately by the
Contractor who must also take all measures reasonably required by the
various bodies to protect their services and property during the progress of
the works.
(6) The Contractor may be required to carry out the removal or shifting of
certain services/utilities on specific order from the Engineer for which
payment shall be made to him. Such works shall be taken up by the
Contractor only after obtaining clearance from the Engineer and ensuring
adequate safety measures.
(7) No separate measurement and payment shall be made for the work of
temporarily supporting and protecting the publicly and privately owned
services and/or for construction and maintenance of new services in lieu of
them.
(1) During the period of Commencement of works the Contractor shall resurvey
the Base Lines, Traverse Point, Bench Marks and confirm the co-ordinates
and levels of the stations. He shall immediately notify the Engineer of any
discrepancies and shall agree with the Engineer any amended values to be
used during the contract, including replacements for any stations missing
from the original stations.
(2) The Contractor shall check, replace and supplement as necessary the station
points and agree any revised or additional station details with the Engineer.
(3) All stations and reference points shall be clearly marked and protected to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
(4) Where a Station Point is likely to be disturbed during construction
operations, the Contractor shall establish suitable reference stations at
locations where they will not be disturbed during construction. No old
station shall be covered, disturbed or destroyed until accurate reference
stations have been established and details of such stations have been
approved by the Engineer.
(5) The Contractor shall establish working Bench Marks tied with reference
stations soon after taking possession of the site. The coordinates and the
elevations of the reference stations shall be obtained from the Engineer. The
working Bench Marks shall be at the rate of four per kilometer and also near
all major/medium structure sites. Regular checking of these Bench Marks
shall be made and adjustments, if any, got agreed with Engineer and
recorded.
(6) The Contractor shall be responsible for the accurate establishment of the
center lines based on the Drawing and data supplied. The center lines shall
be accurately referenced in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The
reference points shall be established at every 30 m interval in plain/rolling
terrain and 10 m interval in hill terrain, with marker pegs and chainage
boards set in the right of way. A schedule of reference dimensions shall be
prepared and supplied by the Contractor to the Engineer.
(7) The existing profile and cross-sections shall be taken jointly by the Engineer
and the Contractor. These shall form the basis for the measurements and
payments. If in the opinion of the Engineer, design modifications of the
center lines and/or grade are advisable, the Engineer shall issue detailed
instructions to the Contractor and the Contractor shall perform modifications
in the field, as required, and modify the levels on the cross-sections
accordingly.
(8) Accurate control of lines and levels shall be provided by the Contractor at
all stages of the construction. In respect of roads itself, control shall be at
least 10 m interval or such close interval as may be directed by the Engineer.
The lines and levels of formation, side slope, drainage works, etc. shall be
carefully set out and frequently checked. Care shall be taken to ensure that
correct gradients and cross-sections are obtained everywhere. Wherever
necessary, but particularly on completion of the subgrade, subbase and the
base, the Contractor shall re-establish center line pegs at sufficiently close
intervals to determine the edges of base and surfacing accurately.
(9) The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with all necessary assistance for
checking the setting out, agreement of levels and any other survey or
measurement which the Engineer needs to carry out in connection with the
contract during the entire period of contract. Such assistance shall include:
For the duration of the works the Contractor shall at all times provide convenient
access to paths, steps, bridges or drives for all entrances to property abutting the
site and maintain them clean, tidy, and free from mud or objectionable matter.
(3) On completion of the works, the Contractor shall obtain the approval of the
Engineer before removing the temporary bridges. The materials arising
from the removal shall become the property of the Contractor or of the
Employer as designated in the contract. In the case of the materials
becoming the property of the Employer, they shall be removed to the
Employer’s premises and neatly stacked at no cost to the Employer.
(1) The Contractor shall be responsible for undertaking all routine maintenance
of the existing road and all bridges on the road from the day the road is
officially handed-over to the Contractor until the issue of Defects Liability
Certificate by the Engineer. The Contractor shall also carry out all the
routine maintenance of the completed works from the time of their
substantial completion until the Defects Liability Certificate is issued.
The Contractor shall also maintain roads that he uses for construction or
access and the use of such roads shall be identified in advance to the
Engineer for inspection prior to use.
The routine maintenance of the road shall include besides other, trimming
vegetation, cleaning all culverts, ditches, borrow pits, road side drainage,
drainage channels and any other obstructions including minor landslide (up
to 20 m3 at one spot, with unlimited number of spots), cleaning road signs
and checking and undertaking the repair of guardrails and other road safety
structures, cleaning including removal of obstructions on bridge decks and
bridge deck drainage elements, checking including and cleaning removal of
obstructions on bridge decks and bridge deck drainage elements, checking
including removal of obstructions on bridge decks and bridge deck drainage
elements, checking and cleaning of expansion joints and bearings, cleaning
bearing shelves and weep holes, removing accumulated debris and
vegetation around and berween piers and abutments, repairing parapets,
clearance on the road to allow free flow of traffic and reinstatement of any
damaged or deteriorated carriageway, and protection of adjoining works. In
case of road Section where the surface is in badly damaged condition, the
maintenance of existing road surface shall be maintained by potholes
patching using gravel, reprofiling and regarding as instructed by Engineer.
The surface shall be maintained to ensure longitudinal and transverse profile.
All the damages to the road carriageway and shoulder shall be repaired with
the material of equal or higher standard than the original surfacing.
The Contractor shall erect notice boards (1.8m_1.2m) at each end of the site
giving details of the contract in the format and wording as directed by the
Engineer. These boards shall be erected within 14 days after the Contractor has
been given the Possession of Site.
The Contractor shall not erect any advertisement sign board on or along the work
without the written approval of the Employer.
All sign boards shall be removed by the Contractor by the end of the Defects
Liability Period.
The environment has been defined to mean surrounding area including human and
natural resources to be affected by execution and after completion of works.
The Contractor shall take all precautions for safeguarding the environment during
the course of the construction of the works. He shall abide by all prevailent laws,
rules and regulations governing pollution and environmental protection mitigation
measure specified in the Latest Publication of “Environmental Management
Guidelines” published by the Department of Roads.
The Engineer shall have the power to disallow the method of construction
and/or the use of any borrow/quarry area, if in his opinion, the stability and
safety of the works or any adjacent structure is endangered, or there is undue
interference with the natural or artificial drainage, or the method or use of
the area will promote undue erosion.
The Contractor shall obtain the permission of the Engineer before opening
up any borrows pits or quarries. Such borrow pits and quarries may be
prohibited or restricted in dimensions and depth by the Engineer where:
(i) they might affect the stability or safety of the works or adjacent
properly;
The Contractor shall not purchase or receive any borrow materials from
individuals unless the source of such materials has been approved by the
Engineer.
(iv) measures for controlling runoff and sediment from the site during
operations;
Operations of borrow pit or borrow area shall not be permitted until the
method of working for that particular pit or area has been approved by the
Engineer in writing. Restoration shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall plan his works in such a way that there is no spillage of
POL products to the surface or sub-surface water.
Provision of toilets for labour and employees shall be made to avoid public
nuisance as well as pollution of water courses and air. The Contractor shall
construct suitable septic tanks and/or soak pits along with room of pit-type
latrines. Sufficient water must be provided and maintained in the toilets.
Proper methods of sanitation and hygiene should be employed during the
whole project duration.
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer regarding sources, installation and
operation of supply of potable water within a week after the supply is
commenced.
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer regarding the medical facility
within a week after its establishment and operation.
Crushing plants shall be located away from the population centers, water
intakes and should not disturb the sensitive echo system. Suitable dust
control device shall be filled to be the crusher to control emission of dust
from the plant.
(8) Hot Mix Plants and Batching Plants
Hot-mix plants an batching plants shall be located away from the population
centers. The Contractor shall take every precaution to reduce levels of noise,
vibration, dust and emission form his plants.
The Contractor shall not store hazardous materials near water surfaces. The
Contractor shall provide protective clothing or appliances when it is
necessary to use some hazardous substances.
The Contractor shall arrange and execute works as well as related activities
in such a way that environmental conditions are reinstated. He may be
required to carry out filing, removal and disposal works along with
plantation of grass and trees as directed by the Engineer at his own costs at
identified locations to reinstate environment.
110. PHOTOGRAPHS
(1) The Contractor shall supply negatives and unmounted positive colour prints
of photographs, of such portions of the works in progress and completed, as
may be directed by the Engineer. The negative of each photograph shall be
the property of the Employer and shall be delivered to the Engineer with
prints. No prints from these negatives shall be supplied to anyone without
the written permission of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall supply four prints of each photographs which shall be
taken at locations and times determined by the Engineer.
Photographs taken for the record purposes as ordered by the Engineer shall
be supplied with four prints, having on the reverse of one print the signature
of the Contractor and the Engineer for the purpose of attestation. If required,
the Contractor may at his own expense have an additional print similarly
attested for his retention.
(2) Payment
Payment shall be made at the contract unit rate which shall be the full and
the final payment to contractor as per Clause112.
(1) The work consists of taking video film of important activities of the work as
directed by the Engineer during the currency of the contract and editing
them to a video film of playing time between the 60 minutes and 180
minutes as directed by the Engineer. It shall contain narration of activities
in English and/or Nepali by a competent narrator. The edition of the video
film and the script shall be approved by the Engineer. The video cassettes
shall be of acceptable quality and the film shall be capable of producing
colour pictures.
(2) Measurement
The measurement for this item shall be by number of sets of edited master
cassettes supplied each with four copies thereof.
(3) Payment
The contract unit rate shall include all expenses for making video films with
the help of a professionally competent photographer, editing, narration and
supplying the final edited master cassette alongwith four copies thereof.
(1) Measurement
(2) Measurement
Unless specified in the Contract, the unit rates and/or prices for items as set
out in the Bill of Quantities are the full and the final compensation to the
Contractor for:
Where the Bill of Quantities does not include the items mentioned in
Section 100, no separate payment shall be made for such works. The costs
in connection with the execution of the works specified herein shall be
considered to be included in the related items of other works specified in
the Bill of Quantities or shall be considered to be incidental to the works
specified. Items specified in this Section and included in the Bill of
Quantities shall be paid at the contract unit rates as agreed and shown in
the Bill of Quantities.
The Contractor may propose that the materials and workmanship be defined in
accordance with the requirements of other equivalent National Specifications and
he may execute the works in accordance with such National Specifications as may
be approved by the Engineer. A copy of the National Specification, together with
its translation into the English language if the National Specification is in another
language, shall be submitted to the Engineer along with the request for its
adoption.
Alongwith the commencement of the contract, the Contractor shall provide in his
site office at least one complete set of all National Specifications referred to in
these Specifications, if they are for the Sections applicable to the works. This set
shall be made available for use by the Engineer.
114. EQUIVALENCY OF STANDARDS
U micron = m*10-6
Mm millimeter
M metre
Km kilometer
Sq.mm.or mm_ square kilometer
Sq.m.or m_ square meter
Sq.km.or km_ square kilometer
Ha hectare
Cu.m.or m3 cubic metre
Lit or l litre
Rad radian
C degrees Celsius
kg kilogram
g gram = kg*10-3
mg milligram = kg*10-6
mg/l milligram per litre
t tonne = kg*103
kg/m3 kilogram per cubic metre
t/m3 tonne pe cubic metre
N Newton
N/m_ Newton per square metre
Lin.m Linear metre
Max Maximum
Min Minimum
Symbols of other units, if not covered above, shall be as per SI system set out
in ISO 31/1.
(2) Abbreviations
116. PROGRAMME
The Contractor shall provide all information needed for fulfillment of the
programme and required in accordance with the Conditions of Contract including
the sequence in which he intends to work including implementation of quality
assurance plan. If the Contractor requests a change in the sequence and such
change is approve by the Engineer, the Contractor shall have no claim as per the
Conditions of Contract for delay arising from such revisions to the programme.
The programme for the construction and completion of the works shall be
established using CPM/PERT techniques or equivalent. The programme shall be
detailed enough to give, in addition to construction activities, detailed network
activities for the submission and approval of materials, procurement of critical
materials and equipment, fabrication of special products/equipments if any their
installation and testing, and for all activities of the Engineer that are likely to
affect the progress of work. The Contractor shall update all activities in
accordance with the Conditions of Contract on the basis of the decision taken at
the periodic site review meetings or as directed by the Engineer.
The programme shall also include the Contractor’s general requirements for any
road closures pursuant to Clause 102 to be agreed in principle with the Engineer.
Such agreement shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to obtain
specific approval for each closure or series of closures.
Any proposal for night working shall also be stated in the programme.
SECTION 200 – SITE CLEARANCE
Page No.
201 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 2-1
202 DISMANTLING CULVERTS, BRIDGES OTHER STRUCTURES
AND PAVEMENTS 2-4
SECTION 200 – SITE CLEARANCE
(1) Scope
The Section covers the clearing and grubbing necessary for the construction
of the works covered by the contract. Conservation of the top soil and flora
is also covered under this Section.
(a) Clearing
Clearing shall consist of the cutting, removing and disposal of all tree,
bushes, shrubs, grass, weeds, other vegetation, anthrills, rubbish,
fences, top organic soil not exceeding 150 mm in thickness and all
other objectionable material, resulting from the clearing and grubbing.
It shall also include the removal and disposal of structures that obtrude,
encroach upon or otherwise obstruct the work.
(b) Grubbing
In the roadway all trees upto 300 mm girth, stumps and roots shall be
removed to a depth of not less than 900 mm below the finished road
level and a minimum of 500 mm below the original ground level
whichever is lower.
Except in borrow areas the cavities resulting from the grubbing shall
be backfilled with approved material and compacted to a density not
less than the density of the surrounding ground.
Where suitable topsoil exists within the limits of the area to be cleared
and grubbed, the Contractor shall, if ordered by the Engineer, remove
the topsoil together with any grass and other suitable vegetation. If not
used immediately, the topsoil shall be transported and deposited in
stockpiles for later use.
(d) Conservation of Flora
Stumps, embedded logs, roots and all other vegetation growth and
accumulated rubbish of whatsoever nature and all other objectionable
material shall be completely removed to a depth as specified in Sub-
clause 201 (2) (a) and (b).
Normally the portions of the road reserve that fall within the limits of
the road prism, as well as certain borrow areas shall be cleared and/or
grubbed. Where the road reserve is to remain unfenced, the full width
of the road reserve shall be cleared and/or grubbed except for such
trees designated by the Engineer to be left standing and uninjured.
The Contractor shall mark the boundaries of the area for clearing and
grubbing and seek the approval of the Engineer before commencement
of the work. The Engineer shall designate in detail the exact areas to
be cleared, and grubbed and the time at which it shall be done.
Such individual trees as the Engineer may designate and mark in white
paint shall be left standing and uninjured. In order to minimize
damage to trees that are to be left standing, trees shall be felled
towards the center of the areas being cleared, if so required by the
Engineer.
All timber except such timber as can be used and all brush, stumps,
roots, rotten wood and other refuse from the clearing and grubbing
operations shall be completely removed from within the Right of Way.
Where anthills are encountered within the limits of the road prism,
they shall be excavated to a depth of not less than 750 mm below the
finished road level and the material carted to spoil. Cavities resulting
from the clearance of anthill material shall be backfilled with approved
material and compacted to a density not less than that of the
surrounding ground.
When portions of the road reserve, borrow or other areas have been
cleared in accordance with the Specifications, but in the course of time,
vegetation grows again during construction, the Engineer may, if he
considers it necessary, order that the area be recleared.
Before the bottom layer of the embankment is made, the Contractor
shall grub up and remove any vegetation that may in the meantime
have grown on the surfaces previously cleared and grubbed.
(4) Measurement
Cutting trees including removal of stumps and their roots of girth above 300
mm and backfilling to required compaction shall be measured in number
according to the sizes given below:
Cutting of trees upto 300 mm girth including removal of stumps and roots
and backfilling of holes with compaction shall not measured separately.
(5) Payment
Clearing and grubbing and cutting trees shall be paid at their respective
contract unit rates which shall be the full and the final compensation to the
Contractor as per Clause 112. The contract unit rate for cutting of trees of
girth above 300 mm shall also include handling, salvaging, piling and
disposing off the cleared materials with all leads and lifts.
(1) Scope
This work shall consist of removing as hereinafter set forth existing culverts,
bridges, pavements, buildings and other structure like guard-rails, kerbs,
manholes, catch basins, inlets, walls, drains etc., which are in place but
interfere with the new construction or are not suitable to remain in place,
and salvaging and disposing off the resulting materials and back filling the
resulting trenches and pits.
(2) General
(b) Dismantling and removal operations shall be carried out in such a way
that the adjacent pavement, structures are left intact and in place. All
operations necessary for the removal of any existing structure which
might endanger new construction shall be completed prior to start of
new work.
(c) Existing culverts, bridges, buildings and other structures which are
within the road and which are designated for removal, shall be
removed upto the limits and extent specified on the Drawing or as
indicated by the Engineer.
(e) When pipe culverts, wooden culverts, gabion walls or other structures
with a salvaged value are removed, care shall be exercised in their safe
removal. The material involved shall be kept intact without damage.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the satisfactory removal of
such structures in an usable condition.
(6) Measurement
(7) Payment
The various dismantling works shall be paid at their respective contract unit
rates which shall be full and the final compensation to the Contractor as per
Clause 112 and for the cost of all operations involved for completion of this
item.
SECTION 300 – BLANK
Page No.
SECTION 400 – FENCING
Page No.
401 SCOPE 4-1
402 MATERIALS 4-1
403 INSTALLATION OF POST AND STANDARDS 4-2
504 INSTALLATION OF WIRE 4-3
405 INSTALLATIONOF GATE 4-3
406 MEASUREMENT 4-4
407 PAYMENT 4-4
SECTION 400 – FENCING
401. SCOPE
This Section covers the erection of new fences along the boundaries of the road
reserve and/or camp site as indicated on the Drawing or directed by the Engineer.
It shall also include the erection and later removal of temporary fences other than
temporary fences for bypasses. Except for when the Engineer allows otherwise,
new fences as well as temporary fences shall be erected before construction on a
particular portion of the road where work is commenced with.
402. MATERIALS
Posts, stays, standards and droppers shall be of the type and size indicated
on the Drawing. Concrete posts shall comply with the requirements of IS
4996 and the mild steel posts shall comply with the requirements of IS 226.
Bolts shall be galvanized steel bolts of the required length and diameter.
The diameter shall not be less than 12 mm. All the necessary bolts, together
with nuts and washers, shall be supplied with each post.
(3) Wire
Barbed wire shall comply with the requirements of NS: 168/2045 and
shall be of mild steel grade, double strand, unidirectional twist wire,
each strand 2.50 mm diameter for use at any height above ground.
The wire shall be either lightly galvanized or fully galvanized, as
specified in the Bill of Quantities.
Smooth wire shall comply with the requirements of N.S. 163/2045 and
shall be of the type specified below:
Wire netting shall be heavily galvanized mild steel wire with a minimum
diameter of 1.8 mm and hexagonal mesh of 60 * 80 mm or as shown on the
Drawing.
(5) Gates
Nowhere the actual diameter of the wire shall be less than the specified
diameter by more than the following tolerances:
Straining posts shall be erected at all ends, corners and bends in the line of fences
and at all junctions with other fences. Straining posts not be spaced further apart
than shown on the Drawing. The height of posts above ground shall be such that
the correct clearance between the lowest wire and the ground can be obtained.
Posts shall be accurately set in holes and where shown on the Drawing be
provided with concrete bases to the dimensions shown on the Drawing.
Holes shall be dug to the full specified depth of the posts. Where due to the
presence of rock the holes cannot be excavated by means of hand or pneumatic
tools and the Contractor has to resort to the use of explosives, he shall be paid
separately for the drilling and blasting operations required.
Corner, gate, end and straining posts shall be braced by means of stay or anchors,
as shown on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer. Pipe stays shall be
bolted to the posts.
Standards shall be firmly planted into the ground at the spacing shown on the
Drawing or as directed by the Engineer. The spacing of standards between any
two straining posts shall be uniform and not greater than that shown on the
Drawing. In rock or hard material standards shall be either driven or set in holes
drilled into the rock. The size of drilled holes shall be such that a tight fit is
obtained. Care shall be exercised when driving standards in order to prevent
buckling or damaging them.
All posts and standards shall be accurately aligned and set to plumb. After posts
and standards have been firmly set in accordance with the fore-going
requirements, the fence wire shall be attached thereto at the spacing shown on the
Drawing.
All fencing wire shall be wired to the sides of standards or posts in order to
prevent the wires from being displaced and becoming loose. The wire shall be
carefully stretched and hung without sag in true alignment. It shall not be
stretched so tightly that it breaks or the end, corner, straining or gate posts are
pulled up.
Each strand of fencing wire shall be securely fastened in the correct position to
each standard with soft galvanized binding wire. The binding wire for each
horizontal fence wire shall pass through a hole or notch in the standard to prevent
slipping of the fence wire in a vertical direction, while the ends of the wire shall
be wrapped at least four times around the fencing wire to prevent it from moving
in a vertical direction.
At end, corner, straining and gate posts the fencing wire shall be securely
wrapped twice around the posts and secured against slipping by tying the end
tightly around the wire by means of at least six snug, tight twists.
Splices in the fencing wire shall be permitted if made in the following manner
using a splice tool. The end of each wire at the splice shall be carried at least 75
mm past the splice tool and wrapped snugly around the other wire for not less
than six complete turns, the two separate wire ends being turned in opposite
directions. After the splice tool is removed the space left by it in the splice wire
shall be closed by pulling the wire ends together. The umused ends of wire shall
be cut close so as to leave a neat splice.
The gaps between gate posts and the adjacent straining posts shall be fenced off
with short fencing wires or as shown on the Drawing.
Droppers shall be tied to each fence wire with soft binding wire in the required
position as specified for standards, to prevent slipping in a vertical direction. The
spacing of droppers between any two straining posts shall be uniform. Anchoring
to structures shall be done as shown on the Drawing.
The completed fences shall be plumb, true to line with all posts, standards and
stays firmly set. The height of the lower fencing wire above the ground at posts
and standards shall not vary by more than 25 mm from their prescribed relative
vertical positions.
(a) Gates shall be installed at he positions indicated in the Drawing. The gates
shall be hung on gate fittings in accordance with the requirements shown on
the Drawing. Gates shall be so erected that they swing in a horizontal plane
at right angles to the gate posts, clear of the ground in all positions. At
pedestrian and security fences the double swing gates shall not leave a gap
of more than 5 mm between them when closed and single swing gates shall
not leave a gap of more than 5 mm from the gate post when closed.
(b) The Contractor shall, on completion of each Section of fencing, remove all
cut-offs and other loose wire or netting so as not to create a hazard to
grazing animals or a nuisance to the owners of the ground.
406. MEASUREMENT
407. PAYMENT
The fencing, measured as stated above, shall be paid at the contract unit rate
which shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor as per Clause
112.
SECTION 500 – QUALITY CONTROL
Page No.
501 SCOPE 5-1
502 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR THE QUALITY OF THE
WORKS 5-1
503 QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM 5-1
104 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN 5-2
505 TESTING PROCEDURES AND SETS OF TESTS 5-3
506 LABORATORY TRIALS TO CONFIRM COMPLIANCE WITH
SPECIFICATIONS 5-3
507 SITE TRIALS OR TRIAL SECTIONS 5-4
508 CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION 5-6
509 ACCEPTANCE TESTS FOR COMPLETED WORKS OR PARTS
OF THE WORKS 5-6
510 RECAPITULATIVE SCHEDULE OF TESTS 5-7
511 LABORATORY 5-13
SECTION 500 – QUALITY CONTROL
501. SCOPE
This Section covers the Quality Control System and procedures, Quality
Assurance Plan, programme of tests, trials, general procedures for acceptance as
well as laboratory arrangements and related facilities which are required for the
selection and control of the quality of materials and workmanship.
The Contractor shall provide, use and maintain on the Site, throughout the period
of execution of the contract, a laboratory with adequate laboratory equipment
operated by competent staff for carrying out tests required for the selection and
control of the quality of materials and for the control of workmanship in
accordance with these Specifications. The list of laboratory equipment to be
procured and laboratory facilities to be provided shall be got approved from the
Engineer. The Contractor shall assume that tests shall be required on all materials
to be used in the works and on all finished works and on all finished works or part
of works.
The Quality Control System comprises the methods, procedures and organization
for the Quality Control of the works. The Contractor shall implement the Quality
Control System in the following sequence:
(1) Sequence
The Contractor shall carry out all necessary tests and shall report to the
Engineer the results of such tests before submitting materials and/or finished
works or part of works to the Engineer for approval in accordance with this
Specification. In certain circumstances, tests may be carried out at the place
of manufacture as per the Conditions of Contracts.
For satisfying himself about the quality of the works, quality control tests
shall be conducted by the Engineer himself or by any other agencies deemed
fit by the Engineer. Additional tests may also be conducted where in the
opinion of the Engineer such tests are needed.
(2) The supply, testing and monitoring shall be in compliance with a Quality
Assurance Plan, Clause 504 and the provisions in the contract.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval, the Quality
Assurance Plan (QAP) which shall be based on the detailed Programme of the
Works as per Clause 116 of these Specifications.
(a) The recapitulative test schedule and testing programme detailing the
list of tests for compliance, laboratory trials, site trials and trials
Sections, construction control tests and their frequencies, tests for
acceptance of the completed works with their dates.
(c) Estimate of the number of tests to be carried out, list and number of
appropriate equipment to conduct them, list of tests to be conducted
outside the site laboratory, if any, identification of the outside
laboratory where proposed to carry out the test.
(2) The list of sources of materials and/or of manufactured articles, their main
characteristics, their identification mode as provided by the supplier when
required; the programme of supply and procurement of material and/or
manufactured articles in accordance with the Programme pursuant to Clause
116.
(3) The list of tests and quality control procedures to be implemented by the
Sub-contractors, if any, pointing out the “critical” acceptance testing
procedures relating to the Sub-contracted works, which correspond to the
tasks on the Critical Path included in the Sub-contracted works.
The Contractor shall implement the Quality Control in compliance with the
approved QAP.
The Engineer’s approval of the QAP shall not relieve the Contractor from
his responsibility of the quality of the Works as per the Conditions of
Contract and these Specifications nor shall the Engineer’s approval of the
QAP exempt the Contractor of any procedure to inform the engineer in
writing or request for the Engineer’s approval or reapproval as specified in
the Conditions of Contract and/or in these Specifications.
The Contractor shall monitor and update the QAP on the basis of the
decisions taken at the periodic review meetings or as directed by the
Engineer and in accordance with the programme of the works as per Clause
116 and the Conditions of Contract.
For ensuring the quality of the work, the materials and the workmanship shall be
subjected to testing in accordance with procedures, sets of tests and frequencies
are not restrictive. The Engineer shall direct for the tests to be carried out as
frequently as deemed necessary that the materials and workmanship comply with
their Specifications.
Sets of tests to be carried out on the materials and the workmanship as specified
in these Specifications are recapitulated in Clause 510. Where no specific testing
procedure is mentioned in the Specifications, the tests shall be carried out as per
the prevalent accepted engineering practice or directions of the Engineer.
Laboratory mixes and site trials for bituminous mixes shall be carried out in
accordance with the requirements of the Sections 600.
The mixed materials, the composition of which meets the specified
requirements and is accepted by the Engineer, shall then be used in the site
trials carried out in accordance with Clause 507 to ensure that all specified
requirements of the completed pavement courses can be achieved.
The Contractor shall submit the proposals for the site trails to the Engineer
at least two weeks before he intends to use the mixed materials in the site
trials in accordance with Clause 507.
(2) Concrete
Site trails for laying and compaction shall be carried out by the Contractor
on all earthworks and pavement materials proposed for the works, using the
same constructional plant and methods proposed by the Contractor for use in
the works. The trials shall demonstrate the suitability of the method and
equipment for laying and compacting the material to the specified density
and confirm that other specific requirements of the completed earthwork or
pavement work can be achieved.
Each trial area shall be at least 100 metres long and to the full construction
width and shall be laid to the specified depth for the material. It may form a
part of the works provided it complies with the required Specifications. Any
areas, which do not comply with the Specifications shall be removed and
new trial shall be made.
The Contractor shall allow in his programme for conducting such site trials
and for carrying out the appropriate tests on them in accordance with the
Quality Assurance Plan. The trials on each pavement layer shall be
undertaken at least 21 days ahead of the commencement of the related work.
The Contractor shall compact each section of the trial over the range of
compactive effort the Contractor is proposing. The data in respect of the
following shall be recorded for each level of compactive effort at each site
trial:
(a) The composition and grading of the material before the site trial.
(b) The composition and grading of the material including the lime or
bitumen content.
(c) The moisture content at the time of compaction and the optimum
moisture content for the specified compaction.
(d) The type, size, tyre pressures, frequency of vibration and the number
of passes made by the compaction equipment.
At least, eight sets of tests shall be made by the Contractor on each 100
metres length of trial section for each level of compactive effort. If all eight
sets of results over the range of compactive effort proposed by the
Contractor meet the specified requirements for the material, the site trial
shall be deemed successful. The above data recorded in the trial shall
become the agreed basis on which the particular material shall be provided
and processed to achieve the specified requirements. If required, the QAP
shall be updated or modified on the basis of these data.
If, during the execution of the works, the construction control tests indicate
that the requirements for a material are not being consistently achieved, then
work on that layer shall be stopped until the cause is investigated by the
Contractor. Such investigation may include further laboratory and site trials
on the materials to determine a revised set of data as stated above which
when agreed, shall be the basis on which all subsequent material shall be
provided and processed to achieve the specified requirements.
(2) Concrete
Site trials for concrete mixes as specified in Clause 2004 shall be carried out
by the Contractor to demonstrate the suitability of his mixing equipment.
During the site trials, compliance with the Specifications for weighing
equipment, storage of ingredients, means of transport for concrete, placing,
compaction and curing shall be checked by the Engineer.
During the site trial a full scale sequence including placing and compaction
of concrete shall be carried out on a part of the works which will represent
particular difficulties due to the presence of reinforcement, obstructions or
others.
The Contractor shall allow in his programme for conducting the site trials
and for carrying out the appropriate tests, including the time required to
obtain compressive strength test results at 28 days. The Contractor shall
inform in writing the Engineer at least two weeks before the date he
proposes to use the concrete mixes in the site trials with all relevant data
including the trial programme, the results of the laboratory trial tests for the
proposed concrete mixes and compliance tests results of all constituents i.e.
cement, aggregates, water and admixtures, if any.
Full scale site trials corresponding to one day production shall be carried out
by the Contractor on all type of materials to be processed using the crushing
plant, related devices and methods to demonstrate the suitability of the
equipment to provide materials of the characteristics and performances
specified in these Specifications.
At least three sets of tests shall be conducted by the Contractor at each stage
of the production. If all the three sets of results over the full sequence of
production proposed by the Contractor meet the specified requirements for
the materials, the site trial shall be deemed successful.
Approval of the Engineer to a set of data recorded in a site trial shall not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities to comply with the
requirements of these Specifications
508. CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
The Contractor shall request, in writing for the Engineer’s approval for each
layer of each section of earthwork, pavement construction and backfill to
drainage and other structures. Such requests shall be made only when the
Contractor is fully satisfied that the section of the works concerned is in the
condition required by the relevant Specifications. Such request shall be
accompanied by the tests results required by the Sub-clause 503 (1) (a), (b),
(c) and the relevant Sections of these Specifications.
The Engineer shall thereupon, without undue delay, inspect the Section for
any visible defects including, heaving material (visible during compaction
or on proofrolling) segregation, and for the uniformity of the mixing and
compaction. If the visual aspects are satisfactory the Engineer shall test the
Section of the works submitted and inform the Contractor in writing of the
results of the tests specifying acceptance or rejection of the Section or the
layer concerned.
Should any layer be left unprotected for more than 24 hours subsequent to
approval, the Contractor shall request for reapproval of the layer and the
layer shall again be subject to proofrolling, construction control testing, and
tolerance checks in accordance with these Specifications.
Acceptance tests for other works and equipment are detailed in the relevant
Sections of these Specifications.
The tests to be carried out and their frequency for the quality control of the works
are detailed in the relevant Sections of these Specifications.
The following Table 5.1 recapitulates the testing schedule for the main types of
works.
PART OR Section/
COMPONENT OF Clause TESTS FREQUENCY
THE WORKS No.
PIPE DRAINS, PIPE 700
CULVERTS AND
CONCRETE CHANNELS
IN-SITU MATERIAL Material Identification, MC One test for each new material
MDD, OMC, CBR and one test per 3000 m2 of each
layer or part of it.
STABILISER Grading, ES (for sand) One test for each new source and
one test per 500 m3 of additive
material or part of it.
MIXED MATERIAL MDD, OMC, CBR, MC One test for each new material
and one test or part of it.
LIME STABILISATION
1006
IN-SITU MATERIAL Material Identification, MC, One test for each new
OMC, CBR material and one test per
3000 m2 of each layer or
part of it.
MIXED MATERIAL MDD, OMC, CBR, MC One test for each new
material and one test per 400
m2 of each layer or part of it.
MECHANICALLY STABLE
MATERIALS FOR SUBBASE 1201
COMPACTION Field Density and moisture Once per 500 m2 of each layer
content with a minimum of 2 tests per
Section.
GRAVEL WEARING
COURSE
MATERIALS 1205 Material Identification, Once per 300 m3 or part of it
Gradation, Plasticity Index, and for each new source
CBR, LAA, AIV
BITUMINOUS SURFACE
AND BASE COURSE 1300
PRIME COAT – TACK
COAT 1302
Quality of Binder Certificates from suppliers.
MATERIALS One set of tests for each 50,000
litres of supply or part of it
Aggregates :
Acceptance tests: Sub- clause 2003 (5)
CONTROL TESTS: Each delivery and every 100 t
Grading or part of it for fine aggregate
Silt &clay content and 250 t or part of it for coarse
Organic Impurities aggregate
Chloride content, sulphate
As frequently as required.
content, Alkali reactivity
Sub-clause 2003 (7) and (8)
Water, Admixtures
CONCRETE
LAB. TRIALS Sub-clause 2401 (4)
SITE TRIALS Sub-clause 2401 (4)
Control tests Earth works: Every 6 m3 of
Compressive strength each class.
When compliance is
established: every 20 m3 or
part of it.
CRIB WALLS 2402 Gradation of backfill Minimum one test for every
material 250 m3 or part of it and for
each source of material
(1) The Laboratory shall be located on the site as described in the contract or
shown on the Drawing. It may be established specifically for the contract
with the approval of the Engineer.
(2) Setup
All laboratories to be provided under the contract shall be set up and shall be
in fully operating condition not later than sixty days after the Engineer’s
order to commence the work.
If the Contractor fails to provide the laboratories within the specified period,
the Engineer shall make alternative arrangements as he considers necessary.
These arrangements may include the use of rented accommodation,
purchased caravans, portacabins and/or the contracting of laboratory
services etc. The Contractor shall bear all the costs of such temporary
arrangements made by the Engineer, including that of additional transport.
(4) Ownership
Unless otherwise stated in the contract the ownership of all laboratories and
equipment shall revert to the Contractor.
(5) Attendance
The Contractor shall keep the Laboratories in a well maintained, clean and
habitable condition.
(6) Measurement
(a) The laboratory which has been sent up and equipped as per
requirement of these Specifications shall be measured for payment in
number.
(7) Payment
(a) Laboratory
The laboratory staff shall be paid at the contract unit rate for each
personnel required and assigned to the laboratory, in accordance with
their position and responsibilities. The duration of the personnel shall
be as required by the quality control and testing activities according to
the general programme of testing. The remuneration rate shall cover
salaries, including overtime remuneration if any, allowances, bonuses,
social charges and overheads, travel, accommodation and
miscellaneous and incidental expenses etc. and all costs incurred by
the Contractor for the staff who will render their services in the
laboratory on site for the duration as required
SECTION 600 – MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS
Page No.
601 SCOPE 6-1
602 QUALITY OF MATERIALS 6-1
603 SOURCES OF MATERIALS 6-1
604 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE OF MATERIALS 6-2
605 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURED ARTICLES 6-2
606 DEFECTIVE MATERIALS 6-3
607 TRADE NAMES AND ALTERNATIVES 6-3
608 FOREIGN MATERIALS 6-3
609 GENERAL: CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIALS 6-4
610 DEFINITION OF GENERAL TYPES OF MATERIALS 6-7
611 SIEVES 6-8
612 SOILS AND GRAVELS 6-8
613 STONE, AGGREGATE, SAND AND FILLERS 6-10
614 CEMENT 6-11
615 LIME 6-12
616 LIME TREATED MATERIALS 6-12
617 CONCRETE 6-13
618 BITUMINIOUS BINDERS 6-14
619 BITUMINIOUS MIXETURES 6-17
620 REINFORCING STEEL 6-17
621 TESTING OF WELDS 6-18
622 PAINTS FOR STRUCTURAL STEELWORK 6-19
623 BRICKS 6-19
624 MORTAR 6-20
625 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPES 6-20
626 HIGH DENSITY POLYTHENE PIPES 6-20
627 GEOTEXTILES 6-20
628 TIMBER FOR STRUCTURAL WORKS 6-20
629 PAINT FOR ROAD MARKING 6-21
630 MANHOLE COVERS AND FRAMES 6-21
631 PRECAST CONCRETE CHANNELS 6-21
632 CAST IRON DRAINAGE GRATINGS 6-21
633 GABION 6-21
634 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6-21
SECTION 600 – MATERIALS AND TESTING OF MATERIALS
601. SCOPE
This section covers the general requirements relating to materials, the specific
requirements for basis materials, the tests and methods of testing which are
required for the section and quality control of materials.
The materials supplied and used in the works shall comply with the requirements
of these Specifications. They shall be new, except as provided elsewhere in the
contract or permitted by the Engineer in writing. The materials shall be
manufactured, handled and used skillfully to ensure completed works to comply
with the contract.
The use of any on kind or class of material from more than one source is
prohibited, except by written permission of the Engineer. Such permission, if
granted, shall set forth the conditions under which the change may be made. The
sources or kinds of material shall not be changed without written permission of
the Engineer. If the product of any source proves unacceptable, the Contractor
shall make necessary arrangements for the supply of acceptable material. Any
claims for compensation associated with such arrangements or changes shall not
be considered, unless the source of the unacceptable material is designated in the
contract as a source of material.
In the case of borrow pits, gravel, sand, binder, soil deposits and rock quarries, the
“source of material designated in the contract” shall be construed to mean:
(1) any restricted area (within the pit or quarry) which is designated as the
source of material; or
(2) the entire area of the pit or quarry, if no such restricted area is designated.
Selection and exploitation of material sources as well as use of the materials shall
follow the DOR Environmental Guidelines (latest publication) and comply with
order pertinent environmental specifications including those detailed in Section
100 & 800.
Final inspection and acceptance of materials shall be made only at the site of the
work. The Engineer reserves the right to sample, inspect, and test the materials
throughout the duration of the works and to reject any materials which are found
to be unsatisfactory.
The representative of the Engineer shall have free entry at all times to those parts
of any plant which concern production of the Materials ordered.
The Contractor shall, before placing any order for materials and
manufactured articles for incorporation in the Works, submit to the Engineer
the names of the firms from whom he propose to obtain such materials and
manufactured articles, giving for each firm a description of the materials and
manufactured articles to be supplied, their origin, the manufacturer’s
specification, quality, weight, strength and other relevant details. The
Contractor shall submit the samples of such materials and manufactured
articles when requested by the Engineer and when appropriate,
manufacturer’s certificates of recent test carried out on similar materials and
manufactured articles shall also be submitted.
(2) Storage
When instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit to him all Test
Certificates from the suppliers/manufacturers of the materials and/or
manufactured articles to be used for the contract. Such certificates shall
certify that the materials and/or manufactured articles concerned have been
tested in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications. All Test
results shall be enclosed along with such certificates. The Contractor shall
provide adequate means of identifying the materials and/or manufactured
articles delivered on the site with the corresponding certificates.
606. DEFECTIVE MATERIALS
All materials not conforming to the requirements of the contract shall be rejected
whether in place or not. They shall be removed immediately from the site unless
otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Even after rectification of the defects no
rejected material shall be used in the work unless approved by the Engineer in
writing. Upon failure of the Contractor to comply promptly with any order of the
Engineer given under this Clause, the Engineer shall have authority to cause the
removal and replacement of rejected material and to deduct the cost thereof from
any monies due to the Contractor.
(1) The proof as to the quality and suitability of alternatives shall be submitted
by the Contractor. He shall also furnish all information necessary as
required by the Engineer. The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to the
quality and suitability of alternative articles or materials and his decision
shall be the final and binding upon the Contractor
If the welding of steel for structural steel members or the casting and pre-stressing
of pre-cast pre-stressed concrete members is to be performed outside of Nepal, the
following requirements shall apply:
(1) Such fabrication shall be performed only within the plants and by fabricators
who have previously established to the satisfaction of the Engineer, that they
have the experience, knowledge, trained manpower, quality control,
equipment and other facilities required to produce the quality and quantity
of the work required. At the option of the Engineer, prequalification of
plant and fabricator shall be established either by the submission of detailed
written proof thereof or through in-plant inspection by the Engineer or his
representative, or both.
(2) The Contractor shall make written application to the Engineer for approval
for such foreign fabrication at the earliest possible time and in no case later
than 60 calendar days in advance of the planned start of fabrication. The
application shall list the specific units or portion of a work which shall be
fabricated outside of Nepal.
(3) The Contractor shall advise the Engineer, in writing, at least 20 calendar
days in advance of the actual start of any such foreign fabrication.
(4) All documents pertaining to the contract, including but not limited to,
correspondence, tender documents, working drawings and data shall be
written in the English/Nepali language and all numerical data shall use the
metric system of units of measurement.
Table 6.1 shows the classification of rocks and soil and includes definitions,
identifications criteria for stones and soils.
Table 6.2 shows conditions for rock and soil utilization as subgrade, capping
layers and pavements
The following definitions shall apply to materials in this Section and other
relevant Sections.
(1) “Topsoil” shall mean the top layer of soil that can support vegetation. It
shall include all turf acceptable for trufing.
(2) “Suitable Material” shall comprise all that is acceptable in accordance with
the contract for use in the works and which is capable of being compacted in
the manner specified in Clause 909 and 910 to form a stable fill having side
slopes as indicated in the Drawing. The material used in fill (except rock
fill) shall not contain rock fragments with dimensions of more than 75 mm.
(3) “Unsuitable Material” shall mean other than suitable material and shall
include:
(5) “Well Graded Granular Material” Consisting of gravel and/or sand shall
conform to Clause 609.
(6) “Rock Fall”, coarse alluvial material shall be loose soils such as moraines,
debris, or alluvial material containing large blocks or large boulders,
individual blocks or boulders of hard materials greater than 0.3m3 each in
volume, shall be classified as hard material.
(7) “Hard Material” shall mean any material which conform to the requirements
of Sub-clause 903 (4).
611. SIEVE
IS sieve shall be used for all tests. Based on IS-460 the standard sieves series
shall be as follows:
125; 90; 75; 63; 50; 45; 40; 37.5; 31.5; 25; 22.4; 20; 19; 16; 12.5; 11.2; 10; 9.5; 8;
6.3; 5.6; 4.75; 4.00; 2.8; 2.36; 2; 1.7; 1.4; 1.18; 1; 0.85; 0.71; 0.6; 0.5; 0.425;
0.400; 0.300; 0.250; 0.212; 0.180; 0.150; 0.125; 0.090; 0.075 mm
(a) The mass (in g) of a sample required for sieve analysis is about 400D, D
being the maximum particle size (mm)
(b) Sample containing particles larger than 19mm size shall be prepared for
compaction and CBR tests as described hereunder, provided the
proportion in weight of such particles is less than 30%:
(c) The dry density of material placed in the works shall be determined by
the Sand Replacement Method unless the Engineer directs to use a
nuclear method or other method. In the case of nuclear method, tests
shall be done at least at the same frequency required when using the
Sand Replacement Method, but at each nuclear densometer test location
the average of three readings taken at positions rotated by 90o shall be
used. A check/comparison test using the Sand Replacement Method
shall be carried out at 10 test interval.
Sampling shall be carried out as per ASTM-D75 and the samples shall be
prepared in accordance with IS 2486 or according to sampling procedures
specified for the Standard Methods of testing given in Table 6.5.
Determination of:
i) Particle Size Distribution IS 2386 Part 1
(Gradation) Part 2
ii) Clay, Silt, Dust in Aggregates IS 2386 Part 1
iii) Flakiness Index IS 2386 Part 3
iv) Specific Gravity IS 2386 Part 3
v) Moisture Content IS 2386 Part 3
vi) Bulk Density, Voids & Bulking IS 2386 Part 117
vii) Soluble Chloride Content BS 812
viii) Mica Content Manual mineralogical Counting
ix) Water Absorption IS 2386 Part 3
x) Crushing Ratio Manual counting & weighing
xi) Los Angeles Abrasion IS 2386 Part 4
xii) AIV-ACV IS 2386 Part 4
xiii) Polished Stone Value IS 2386 Part 4
xiv) Degradability Test NFP 94 - 067
xv) Sodium Sulphate Soundness IS 2386 Part 5
xvi) Alkali Aggregate Reactivity Test IS 2386 Part 7
xvii) Bitumen Adhesiveness (Vialit NFP-98-274-1
Test)
xviii) Deleterious Substances IS 2386 Part 2
xix) Sand Equivalent IS 2720 Part 37
xx) Crushing Strength of Stone IS 2386 Part 4
614. CEMENT
Ordinary and High Strength Portland Cement (OPC and HSPC), Portland Slag
Cement (PSC), Portland Pozzolana Cement (PPC) shall be sampled according to
IS 3535 and tested according to IS 4031.
Chemical and physical requirements for Ordinary Portland Cement, High Strength
Portland Cement, Portland Slag Cement and Portland Prozzolana Cement shall be
in accordance with IS 269, IS 8112, IS 12269, IS 455, IS 1489 respectively.
(a) 3 days 16 27
(b) 7 days 22 37 IS 4031 Part 6
(c) 28 days 33 53
615. LIME
Limes shall be sampled and tested in accordance with BS 890 and shall comply
with all requirements specified therein.
(1) Sampling
617. CONCRETE
Sampling and testing on concrete shall be carried out in accordance with the
standard methods given in the Table 6.9
Non destructive tests shall be carried out in accordance with the standard method
and recommendations given in Table 6.10 as when required.
The total chloride content, expressed as chloride ion, arising from all ingredients
in a mix including cement, water and admixtures shall not exceed the following
limits, expressed as a percentage of the weight of cement in the mix:-
The total sulphate content expressed as SO3 of all the ingredients in a mix
including cement water and admixtures shall not exceed 0.4 percent by weight of
the aggregate or 4.0 percent of the weight of the cement in the mix, whichever is
the lesser.
(3) Requirements
(a) General
The number of tests and criteria for conformity shall be as per IS 73.
(c) Cut Back Bitumen
(d) Bitumen
Tests on bituminous mixture shall be carried out with the standard methods
given in Table 6.15.
All reinforcement for use in the Works shall be tested for compliance as specified
in Clause 2041 in a Laboratory acceptable to the Engineer and two copies of each
test certificate shall be supplied to the Engineer. The sampling and frequency of
testing shall be as set out in the NS 84-2042 and NS 191-2045. In addition to the
testing requirements described above, the Contractor shall carry out additional
testing as instructed by the Engineer.
621. TESTING OF WELDS
(1) The tests detailed in Clause 2206 shall be carried out by the methods
described in BS 709. The following requirements shall also be met with.
(a) General
In any respect the test results of welded joints shall not be inferior to the
British Standard test requirements for the parent material.
Should any one of the weld joint pieces selected for transverse tensile
and transverse and longitudinal bend test fail to comply with the
requirements applicable to the parent metal of the joint, 2 additional test
pieces shall be taken from the joint material represented by the test.
Both the test pieces shall comply with the requirements in order to
qualify for the acceptance.
Should the average impact value obtained form any set of 3 charpy V-
notch tests on specimens fail to comply with the requirements, 3
additional test pieces from the same sample shall be tested. The average
of the 6 test result shall comply with the requirements in order to qualify
for acceptance.
Should any one of the weld joint test pieces selected for transverse
tensile and transverse bend tests fail to comply with the test
requirements applicable to parent metal of the joint represented by the
test, additional specimens shall be taken from the same production test
plates and the test shall be repeated. Should any of the additional tests
fail to comply with the requirements, the joint shall be rejected.
Should the average impact value obtained from any set of 3 Charpy V-
notch specimens selected fail to comply with the test requirements, 3
additional test pieces from the same production test plates shall be
tested. Should the average of the 6 results fail to comply with the test
requirements the joint shall be rejected.
In the event of failure to meet the test requirements the welded joint
represented by the tests shall be completely cut out. The joint shall
then be re-welded and the test repeated.
The Contractor shall submit the proposal to the Engineer about the paint system to
be used in the Works
The system shall comply with Sub-clause 2209 (9) and shall be defined at least by
the following informations, supported by the paint manufacturer’s data sheets:
624. MORTAR
High density polythene pipes shall comply with the requirements of NS 40-2040.
627. GEOTEXTILES
(a) sustain a load of not less than 10 kN/m at break and have a minimum failure
strain of 10 percent when determined in accordance with BS: 6906 or shall
have a grab tensile strength more than 0.4 kN/m and grab elongation
corresponding to this limit in accordance with ASTM D 4632.
(b) have apparent opening size as shown on the Drawing. If no size is shown on
the Drawing, then the apparent size shall be 0.1 mm.
(c) allow water to flow through it at right angles to its principal plane, in either
direction at a rate of not less than 50 litres/sq.m/sec.under a constant head of
100 mm, determined in accordance with BS: 6909 (Part 3) or ASTM D4491,
unless otherwise shown on the Drawing. The flow rate determined in the test
shall be corrected to that applicable to a temperature of 15oC using data on
variation in viscosity of water with temperature.
(e) have a minimum tear resistance of 350 N when determined in accordance with
ASTM D 4533. Geotextile used for drilled sub-surface drains shall be as
specified in Clause 2405.
628. TIMBER FOR STRUCTURAL WORKS
Paint for road marking shall comply with NS 408-2054. Paint used for other
purposes shall be as specified in the respective sections of these Specifications.
Manhole covers and frames shall be of cast iron and shall comply with IS: 1726-
1991. For manholes constructed in carriage way and shoulder, heavy duty
circular covers and frames shall be used. In footpaths, medium duty circular
covers shall be used. In other locations light duty covers and frames shall be used.
Precast concrest channels, kerbs, edging, quadrants and gutters shall comply with
the requirements of IS: 5758 – 1984.
Cast gratings for drainage purpose shall comply with the requirements of IS: 5961
– 1970.
633. GABION
All wire used in the fabrication of gabions and wiring operations during
construction shall comply with the requirements of NS: 169 – 2045. The wires
shall be galvanized with heavy coating of zinc. The coating of zinc shall comply
with NS: 163 – 2945 (Heavy Coated Wire) as given in Clause 2041.
Page No.
701 PIPE DRAINS AND PIPE CULVERTS 7-1
702 CONCRETE CHANNELLING 7-5
703 COMPLETION OF DRAINAGE WORKS 7-7
SECTION 700-PIPE DRAINS, PIPE CULVERTS AND CONCRETE CHANNELS
(1) Scope
This Clause covers the works for the construction of pipe drains and culverts
with or without prefabricated reinforced cement concrete pipes and/or high
density polythene pipes (HDP Pipes).
(2) Materials
The pipe shall be placed where the ground for the foundation is reasonable
firm. Where the bottom of the trench as excavated does not provide a
suitably firm foundation for the culvert, due to soft, mucky or other
unsuitable material being encountered, the unsuitable material shall be
excavated to such depth, width and length as directed by the Engineer. The
excavation shall then be backfilled with gravel or other approved granular
material which shall be properly shaped and thoroughly compacted up to the
specified level.
Trenches shall be kept free form water until the pipes are installed and the
joints have hardened. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, construct
any sumps or temporary drains that the Engineer may consider necessary.
The Contractor shall make good at his own expense, any damage caused by
prolonged and excessive pumping, and shall take all precautions necessary
for the safety of adjoining structures by shoring or otherwise, during the
time the trenches are excavated or open.
The pipes shall be laid true to line and level, commencing from the outfall.
No pipes shall be laid until it has been approved by the Engineer. Pipes
shall be laid such that each one is in contact with the bed throughout the
length of barrel. The pipes shall be laid closely together against each other
so as to obtain tight joints.
Where two or more pipes are be laid adjacent to each other, they shall be
separated by a distance equal to half the diameter of the pipe subject to a
minimum of 450 mm.
The concrete pipes shall be jointed either by collar joint or flush joint. In
case of collar joint, the collar shall be of reinforced cement concrete 150 to
200 mm wide according to the diameter of the pipe and having the same
structural strength as the pipes to be jointed. Caulking space shall be
between 13 to 19 mm according to the diameter of the pipe as specified by
NS 80/2042 or IS: 458:1988. caulking material shall be slightly wet mix of
cement and sand in the ratio of 1: 2 rammed with caulking irons. Before
caulking, the collar shall be placed such that its centre coincides with the
joint and an even annular space is left between the collar and the pipe. In
case of flush joint, the ends of the pipes shall be spaced to from a self
centering joint with a joining space of 13 mm side. The jointing space shall
be filled with cement sand mortar in the ratio of 1:2 Care shall be taken to
fill all voids and to see that any excess of cement mortar is neatly cleaned
off while each joint is being made and any earth, cement or other material
thoroughly cleaned out of the pipes. All joints shall be made with care so
that the interior surface is smooth and consistent with the interior surface of
the pipes. After finishing, the joint shall be kept covered and damped for at
least four days. A properly fitted plug shall be well secured at the end of
each pipes already laid and shall be removed only when next pipe is being
laid or on completion of the culvert or drain. The trench shall be kept free
from water until the joint are thoroughly set.
Cement mortar for jointing pipes shall consist of one part by weight of
Portland cement to two parts by weight of sand. Sand shall comply with
Sub-clause 2502 (2). The materials shall be accurately gauged and mixed in
an approved manner. Cement mortar shall be made in suitable small
quantities only and when required, and any mortar which has begun to set or
which has been mixed for a period of more than the initial setting time shall
be rejected.
On completion, all pipe lines, drains etc., shall be flushed from end to end
with water and left clean and free from obstructions.
The pipes shall be laid on a layer of fine granular material, 100 mm thick,
after the bottom of excavation has been shaped to conform to the lower
part of the pipe as shown on the Drawing. The bedding material shall be
well graded granular material passing 5.6 mm sieve and suitable
compacted.
Backfill for pipes and minor drainage structure shall be obtained form the
material excavated in forming the excavation. In the event of there being
insufficient excavated material or the culvert is laid close to or above
existing ground level then selected backfill shall be obtained from borrow
pits. All backfill whether from excavated material or borrow pits shall be
suitable material as defined in Clause 902 and shall have a CBR of at least
5% measured after 4 days soak on laboratory mix compacted to 93% MDD
(Heavy Compaction), plasticity Index of less than 35%, maximum particle
size of 40 mm and shall be compacted to a dry density of 93% MDD (Heavy
Compaction)
For pipe culvert which have been placed and where no concrete haunch or
surround is called for, selected fill of suitable material available form the
excavation shall be place in layers not exceeding 150 mm of loose thickness.
The material shall be uniformly mixed with water or dried out such that the
moisture content at the time of compaction is between 95% and 100% of the
Optimum Moisture Content. Then it shall be compacted thoroughly.
Similar selected material shall then be laid in layers, not exceeding 150 mm
of loose thickness, mixed, dried or watered as necessary and carefully
compacted, and brought up uniformly on both sides of the pipe up to a
height of not less than 300 mm over the crown. The remainder of the trench
shall then be backfilled with suitable materials, placed in layers not
exceeding 150 mm of loose thickness, mixed, watered or dried as necessary
and carefully compacted. All backfilling material except the top 300 mm
below formation level shall be compacted to a minimum dry density of 93%
of MDD (Heavy Compaction). The top 300 mm below formation level shall
be placed in layers not exceeding 150 mm of loose thickness, mixed,
watered or dried as necessary and carefully compacted to at least 95% of
MDD (Heavy Compaction).
For pipe culverts which have been constructed close to, above or where the
culverts protrudes above the existing ground the backfilling under the flanks
and alongside and over the culverts shall be placed and compacted in layers
not exceeding 150 mm to a density of at least the density required for the
material in adjoining layers of fill. All existing ground under this backfill
shall be compacted to 93% MDD (Heavy Compaction) to a depth of 150
mm.
Catch pits, headwalls, wing walls, aprons and other ancillary works shall be
constructed in accordance with the details shown on the Drawing. Masonry
for these works shall conform to Section 2500 or 2600 as applicable.
Concrete shall conform to Section 2000 and aprons shall conform to Section
2400.
No traffic shall be allowed to cross the pipeline unless the height of the
filling is not than 600 mm above the top of the pipe line or is as shown on
the Drawing.
The Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s test certificate for each lot of
pipes supplied. The test result shall meet the requirements of the
Specifications.
The pipe drains/culverts shall be constructed to the true lines and levels
indicated on the Drawing or instructed by the Engineer.
(15) Measurement
Pipes shall be measured along their centre between the inlet and outlet ends
in linear meters of individual pipe element of each sizes, completed and
accepted in place. Collar shall not be measured for payment. Excavation,
bedding, concrete for encasing and backfilling works shall be measured
separately in cubic. Ancillary works such as head walls, wing walls, etc.,
shall be measured as provided for in the respective Sections of these
Specifications.
(16) Payment
Pipes, measured as provided above, shall be paid for at the contract unit
rates per linear meter of each particular size which shall be the full and the
final compensation to the Contractor as per Clause 112.
Cost for cement jointing shall deemed to be included in the contract unit rate
of pipe.
(1) Scope
This Clause covers the works for the construction of concrete channeling for
drainage.
(2) Material
Concrete channels may be pre-cast units or may cast in-situ. All concrete
works and reinforcement shall be carried out in accordance with the
requirements of Section 2000.
(3) Construction
Precast concrete channeling shall be laid with close joins with 1:2
cement sand mortar at the ends. The joints shall not exceed 10 mm in
thickness and shall be neatly pointed with a pointing trowel. Guide
lines and straight edges shall be used to ensure that the exposed faces
and edgings are set to true lines and levels.
Forms shall be accurately set to line, levels and elevation and shall be
firmly held in position during the placing of the concrete. Stops at the
ends of Sections shall be placed accurately so as to ensure that the
joints are truly perpendicular to the surface of the concrete and right
angles to the edge of the road. After concrete has been placed in the
forms, it shall be tamped and spaded until the exposed surfaces are
entirely covered with mortar. Exposed faces shall then be finished to
smooth and even surfaces.
After the concrete in alternate Sections has been set, the intermediate
Sections shall be cast and finished in accordance with all the
requirements specified above. The exposed end surfaces of the
alternate Sections cast first shall be painted with a coat of approved
bituminous emulsion containing 60% of net bitumen by mass, and the
emulsion shall be allowed to set and dry before the intermediate
Sections are cast.
Guide lines and straight edges shall be used to ensure that the exposed
faces are formed to the true line, level and elevation.
(4) Tests and Standard of Acceptance
All concrete works shall be tested in accordance with Section 2000 and the
test results shall meet the specified criteria.
The concrete channeling works shall be constructed to the true lines and
levels shown on the Drawing or instructed by the Engineer.
(5) Measurement
(6) Payment
Concrete channeling shall be paid as per the contract unit rate which shall be
the full and the final compensation to the Contractor as per Clause 112.
Excavation and bedding shall be paid as provided under respective Sections
of these Specifications.
All culverts and/or other drainage works shall be completed well in advance of
the construction of the base course, hard shoulders and/or surfacing of the
carriageway.
SECTION 800 – QUARRIES, BORROW PITS, STOCKPILE AND SPOIL AREAS
Page No.
801 GENERAL 8-1
802 DEFINITIONS 8-1
803 LOCATING MATERIAL SOURCES 8-2
804 SAFETY AND PUBLIC HEALTH REQUIREMENTS 8-4
805 ACCESS ROADS AND TRAFFIC CONTROL 8-5
806 SITE CLEARANCE AND REMOVAL OF TOPSOIL AND
OVERBURDEN 8-5
807 SELECTION, MIXING AND STOCKPILING OF MATERIALS 8-5
808 PRE-SELECTION OF MATERIALS 8-6
809 PROCESSING 8-7
810 MATERIAL UTILISATION 8-9
811 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 8-9
SECTION 800 – QUARRIES, BORROW PITS, STOCKPILE AND SPOIL AREAS
801. GENERAL
802. DEFINITIONS
A rock quarry is an open surface working in massive rock form which stone
is removed by drilling and blasting for use in the works.
(2) Quarry
A quarry is an open surface working form which stone or aggregate for sub
base, base and surfacing are extracted for use in the works.
An alluvial deposit is a site where gravel and aggregate of alluvial origin are
extracted for use in the works.
A borrow pit is a site from which loose material, other than stone, is
removed for use in the works.
A spoil area is a site upon which surplus or unsuitable materials arising out
of works are dumped within or beyond the road reserve as indicated on the
Drawing or directed by the Engineer.
(1) The Contractor shall be responsible for locating all material sources and for
the acquisition or renting of all land required for rock quarries, quarries,
alluvial deposit, borrow pits, spoil and stockpile areas and for access thereto
in accordance with the Conditions of Contract.
The location and size of rock quarries, quarries, alluvial deposit borrow pits,
spoil and stockpile areas proposed by the Contractor shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
The Engineer shall withhold his approval, if in his opinion the rock quarry,
quarry, alluvial deposit, borrow pit, spoil and stockpile area, or access into
them.
(2) The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s approval full information
regarding the proposed location of the material source not later than 30 days
after issue the order to commence the works of all rock quarries, quarries,
alluvial deposits, borrow pits, spoil and stockpile areas that the Contractor
will require for the whole the works.
The Contractor’s written notice shall include the following for each rock
quarry, quarry, alluvial deposit, borrow pit, spoil and stockpile areas:
i) plot boundaries;
ii) owners names and addresses, and if appropriate identification
numbers;
iii) the District, Location, Registration Section and Number for each
plot;
iv) local details such as building, fences, types and areas of cultivation
and services, all agreed with the Land Owners; and
v) areas to be used for working areas, stockpile areas, safety blasting
zones etc;
(3) Where the Contractor uses a rock quarry, quarry, alluvial deposit, or a
borrow pit identified or instructed by the Engineer he shall obtain the
Engineer’s approval of the areas required for the rock quarry, quarry,
alluvial deposit, or borrow pit and of the siting of the access roads into the
rock quarry, quarry, alluvial deposit, or borrow pit. The Engineer may
required the Contractor to modify his requirements for any of the reasons
outlined in Sub-clause 803 (1) (a), (b), (c), (d) or (f).
Where rock quarries, quarries, alluvial deposits, or borrow pits, available for
inspection at the time of the Tender, are instructed by the Engineer the
Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the quality and quantity of materials
available before providing the information required in this Clause. Should
such investigations reveal tat there is insufficient suitable material for the
use for which such material sources were intended, the Contractor shall
immediately inform the Engineer in writing and the Engineer shall either
direct that such sources are extended or that new sources shall be used.
(4) When a rock quarry, quarry, alluvial deposit, borrow pit spoil or stockpile
area has insufficient suitable material or area for the use for which it was
intended the Contractor shall propose in writing that either any existing rock
quarry, quarry, alluvial deposit, borrow pit, spoil or stockpile area be
extended or that a new rock quarry, quarry, alluvial deposit, borrow pit spoil
or stockpile area shall be used. The approval and acquisition of such new or
extended rock quarries, quarries, alluvial deposits, borrow pits, spoil or
stockpile areas shall in accordance with all the above provisions of this
Clause for the acquisition of the original rock quarries, quarries, alluvial
deposits, borrow pits, spoil or stockpile areas.
The Contractor shall comply with the prevalent laws and Regulations including
those of the Local Authority regarding public health and safety in respect of the
operation of rock quarries, quarries, alluvial deposit, borrow pits, spoil or
stockpile areas, and in the absence of, or in addition to such Regulations, shall
comply with the following conditions :-
(1) All areas of work, if they are not naturally under water, shall be drained and
kept drained where a quarry or borrow pit has been excavated such that it
will not drain naturally, it shall be kept pumped dry while being used.
(2) The Contractor shall confine his operations solely to the areas provided and
shall demarcate the boundary of the area and erect temporary or permanent
fencing as instructed by the Engineer.
(3) Where the height of any face exceeds 1 metre, the Contractor shall provide,
erect and maintain at his own expense stock proof fencing and gates to
prevent unauthorized access to the top of the working face.
(4) On completion of the work all faces shall be neatly trimmed to a slope
flatter than 1:4. Where this is impracticable or where the working face is to
be left exposed, the edge shall be permanently fenced, as instructed by the
Engineer and measurement and payment for such fencing shall be in
accordance with Section 400.
(5) On completion of work temporary fences and all temporary structures shall
be demolished and removed. All latrine pits shall be filled in and drained.
The site shall be topsoiled and left neat and tidy.
The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of Clause 103 and with the
Conditions of Contract with regard to the construction and maintenance of access
roads to rock quarries, quarries, alluvial deposits, borrow pits spoil and stockpile
areas and with regard to traffic operations thereon.
806. SITE CLEARANCE AND REMOVAL OF TOPSOIL AND OVERBURDEN
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove topsoil
and/or overburden from rock quarries, quarries, alluvial deposits, borrow pits and
spoil and stockpile areas. The Engineer shall direct whether topsoil shall be
stripped and stockpiled separately or shall be excavated and spoiled together with
the overburden. If suitable, the Engineer may direct for the use of overburden in
the works.
On completion of the work in any rock quarry, quarry, alluvial deposit, borrow pit,
spoil or stockpile area the overburden and/or topsoil which has not been used in
the works shall be pushed back, spread and landscaped over the area of the rock
quarry, quarry, alluvial deposit, borrow pit, spoil or stockpile area. Where topsoil
has been stockpiled separately, it shall be pushed back and spared over the rock
quarry, quarry, alluvial deposit, borrow pit, spoil or stockpile area after
landscaping unless the Engineer has instructed that it shall be used for topsoiling
in accordance with Section 600.
Before a quarry, alluvial deposit or borrow pit is opened, the Engineer shall
instruct the Contractor as to the type of material to be excavated and the areas and
depth to be worked. The Engineer may require specific operations of equipment
according to the characteristics of the raw material and the characteristics of the
final product to be obtained in accordance with Clause 808 and 809 or other
relevant Section of those Specifications.
The Contractor shall ensure that oversize material, clay humus or unsuitable
material encountered in the working operations is separated from the materials
proposed for use in the works and such inferior material shall be removed tot spoil.
A separate stockpile shall be used for each type and grading of material.
When removing material from stockpiles, none of the underlying material shall be
mixed with it, and generally at least the bottom 100 mm layer shall be left behind.
Should any stockpile prove surplus to requirements, the Contractor shall spread
the material over the area of the quarry or borrow pit unless directed otherwise by
the Engineer.
The size selection shall be carried out by unloading the material through
appropriate grids to select the size fraction which contains the required
fraction of the required type of stone specified in the Specifications, based
on the identification of the petrographic composition of the various size
classes of the raw material through laboratory trials in accordance with
Clause 506.
The size selection shall be carried out provided the conditions given in
Table 8.1 are fulfilled where:
A 40 7,500 35 4,000
B 70 85,000 60 20,000
(2) Quality Control of the Size Selection
When the requirements of the final products are not met, the Engineer may
require the Contractor to control the quality of the size selection.
809. PROCESSING
The Contractor shall use adequate processing equipment and methods to achieve
the characteristics and performance of the aggregates to be produced.
The processing methods may include successive steps such as primary crushing,
screening for elimination of fine and soft material, secondary crushing and
recycling, washing.
The Contractor shall carry out site trials in accordance with Clause 507 using the
Constructional Plant and methods proposed for selecting and processing the
materials to demonstrate their suitability to achieve the material requirements
specified in the Specifications.
(1) Crushing
The crushing process shall include all crushing stages, such as primary
crushing, secondary crushing or grinding (after primary screening) tertiary
grinding (after secondary screening), as necessary to meet the requirement
of the final product specified in the Specifications.
Quartzite & Sand Gyratory Crusher (for Cone Grinder or Cone Grinder
Production more than 1000T/h only) Gyratory Grinder (Gyradisc)
(2) Screening
The Contractor shall eliminate polluted or soft materials after the primary
crushing by screening the crushed materials through a 50 mm mesh screen.
The Engineer may instruct the Contractor to modify the above mentioned
size for the elimination of soft materials according to the results of the
laboratory trials.
In case of materials sensitive to crushing, the Engineer may instruct the
Contractor to carry out a secondary screening after the secondary crushing.
(4) Washing
Sand with too high mica content shall be washed using appropriate
equipment such as screw classifiers, paddle wheel etc.
(5) Testing
Each type of final products shall be tested in accordance with the tests and
frequencies of testing as specified in the relevant Sections of these
Specifications.
(6) Records
All materials from rock quarries, quarries, alluvial deposits, borrow pits as
instructed by the Engineer shall only be used for permanent works shown on the
Drawing or instructed by the Engineer and any other use shall be subject to the
Engineer’s approval.
Where the Engineer has instructed that overburden or topsoil will be used in the
works, measurement and payment shall be in accordance with the relevant
Sections of these Specifications.
SECTION 900 – EARTHWORKS
Page No.
901 SCOPE 9-1
902 DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 9-1
903 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS 9-3
904 EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING 9-4
905 EXCAVATION IN CUTTING 9-6
906 EXCAVATION BELOW EMBANKMENTS AND BELOW
FORMATION LEVEL 9-7
907 EXCAVATION FOR FOUNDATION 9-8
908 REFILING OF FOUNDATION PITS AND TRENCHES,
REMOVAL OF SUPPORTS AND FILLING TO STRUCTURES 9-10
909 FORMING OF EMBANKMENT AND OTHERS AREAS OF FILL 9-11
910 COMPACTION OF EMBANKMENT AND OTHER AREAS OF
FILL/BACKFILL 9-13
911 COMPACTION TRIALS 9-14
912 BENCHING 9-14
913 EARTHWORKS TO BE KEPT FREE OF WATER 9-15
914 WATERCOURSES 9-15
915 FILLING EXISTING WATERCOURSES 9-15
916 PROCESS CONTROL 9-15
917 MEASUREMENT 9-16
918 PAYMENT 9-17
SECTION 900 – EARTHWORKS
901. SCOPE
This section covers the works related to the roadway excavation, roadway filling,
excavation for foundation, backfilling, excavation for drains, channels,
intercepting drains etc.
(1) Earthwork includes two types of operations i.e. (i) earth excavation and
disposal of the excavated materials (ii) earth excavation and use of
excavated materials. The use of excavated material may be in the form of
filling embankment, backfilling, filling other areas as required.
(2) The following definitions of earthworks materials shall apply to this and
other Clauses of these specifications, if otherwise not specified.
(i) “Topsoil” shall mean the top layer of soil that can support vegetation.
It shall include all turf acceptable for turfing.
(iii) “Unsuitable Material” shall mean other than suitable material and
shall include:
(iv) “Rock Fill” shall consist of hard material of suitable size for
deposition and compaction as given in Clause 909 and also may
comprise rock as defined in Clause 903 and broken stones.
(4) Material in surplus to the total requirements of works, and all unsuitable
material shall, unless the Engineer permits otherwise, be run to spoil dumps.
(7) At all times the Contractor shall ensure that earthworks are not damaged by
weather or traffic. In event of such damage, the Engineer may withdraw
approval from the affected works until the Contractor has carried out repairs
to restore the works to their original condition.
The cost of all such repairs and any additional testing shall be borne by the
Contractor.
(8) Prior to commencement of any earthwork, the work shall be set out where
required as specified in Clause 104 following the clearing and grubbing as
per Section 200 and survey of the existing ground shall be conducted jointly
by the Contractor and the Engineer. The survey records shall serve as initial
measurements for the determination of the final quantities of earthwork
performed under the contract.
(9) Works on embankments and/or cutting in areas required for the construction
of bridges and other structures shall not be carried out until the Engineer
agrees that construction of such structures is sufficiently advanced that there
is no interference or damage to them.
(10) The Contractor shall get approval of the Engineer in respect of method of
earthwork, type of equipment to be used, disposal and other details before
commencement of the earthwork.
The excavated materials shall be classified under the following categories. The
decision of the Engineer in respect of the classification of excavated materials
shall be the final and binding upon the Contractor.
(a) Vegetable or organic soil, turf, sand, loam clay, mud, peat, black
cotton soil, stiff heavy clay, shale, moorum and any mixture of these
soil.
(c) Generally any material which yields to the ordinary application of pick
and shovel or other digging implements.
(2) Hard Soil
(a) Gravel, shingle and river or stream bed boulders having maximum
dimensions up to 300 mm in one direction.
(b) Soling of roads, paths, etc. and hard core, macadam surfaces of any
description (water bound, grouted, bituminous surface etc.)
(c) Lime concrete, stone masonry in lime mortar and brick work in lime
cement mortar below ground level.
(a) Lime stone, sand stone, late rite, soft conglomerate or other soft or
disintegrated rock which can be quarried or split with crowbars or
wedges.
(a) Any rock or Portland cement concrete for the excavation of which the
use of pneumatic/mechanical equipment or blasting is required.
It shall mean rock comprising any of the above mentioned hard rock where
blasting is prohibited.
(1) General
The procurement, transportation, storage, use, account and disposal of
balance and defective explosive materials shall be strictly as per prevalent
laws and ordinances applicable to the work site. Should there be any
discrepancy found between procedures described hereunder and the
prevalent laws and ordinance, the later shall supersede.
The Contractor shall adopt such method that is consistent with the safety
and job requirements. Prior to starting any phase of the operation, the
Contractor shall provide information describing pertinent blasting
procedures, dimensions and notes.
All the material, tools and equipment used for blasting operations shall be
off approved type. The Engineer may specify the type of explosives to be
allowed in special cases. The fuse to be used in wet locations shall be
water-resistant and shall remain unaffected when immersed in water for 30
minutes. The rate of burning of the fuse shall be uniform and definitely
known to permit such a length being cut as shall permit sufficient time tot eh
firer to reach to a safe place before explosion takes place. Detonators shall
be capable for giving effective blasting of the explosives. The blasting
powder, explosives, detonators, fuses, etc., shall be fresh and not damaged
due to dampness, moisture or any other cause. They shall be inspected
before use. The damaged articles, if any, shall be discarded totally and
removed from the site immediately.
(3) Personnel
The blasting shall be carried out during fixed hours of the day preferably
during the mid-day luncheon hour or at the close of the work as ordered in
writing by the Engineer. The hours shall be made known to the people in
the vicinity. All the charges shall be prepared by the blaster only.
The Engineer must be notified at least 24 hours in advance on any blasting
operation. When blasting is to be carried out, the Contractor shall determine
the danger zone likely to be created, and shall ensure that all personnel,
vehicles and livestock are clear of the zone before and during the blast. In
settled areas, the Contractor shall take steps to avoid damage to property
from flying rock by using blasting mats or other suitable blanketing
materials.
Danger red flags shall be displayed prominently in all directions during the
blasting operations. The flags shall be planted 200 m from the blasting site
in all directions. People, except those who actually light the fuse, shall be
prohibited from entering this area, and all persons including workmen shall
be excluded form the flagged area at least 10 minutes before the firing, a
warning siren being sounded for the purpose.
The charge holes shall be drilled to required depths and at suitable places.
Blasting shall be as light as possible consistent with thorough breakage of
the material necessary for economic loading and hauling. Any method of
blasting which leads to overshooting shall be discontinued. Not more than
10 charges shall be prepared and fired at a time. The man in charge shall
blow a siren in a recognized manner for cautioning the people. The charges
shall be lighted by the blasters only. The blaster shall count the number of
explosions. He shall satisfy himself that all the charges have been exploded
before allowing the workmen to go back to the work site.
After blasting operations, the Contractor shall compact the loose residual
material removed below sub-grade and replace the material removed below
sub-grade with suitable material.
(5) Misfire
(a) Sufficient time shall be allowed to account for the delayed blast. The
blaster shall inspect all the charges and determine the missed charge.
(b) If it is blasting powder charge, it shall be completely flooded with
water. A new hole shall be drilled at about 450 mm from the old hole
and fired. This should blast the old charge. Should it not blast the old
charge, the procedure shall be repeated till the old charge is blasted.
(c) In case of charges of gelignite, the blaster shall gently remove the
tamping and the primer with the detonator. A fresh detonator and
primer shall then be used to blast the charge. Alternatively, the hole
may be cleared of 30 mm of tamping and the direction then ascertained
by placing a stick in the hole. Another hole may then be drilled 150
mm away and parallel to it. This hole shall then be charged and fired
when the misfired hole should explode at the same time. The blaster
shall at once report to the Contractor’s office and the Engineer all
cases of misfire, the cause of the same and what steps were taken in
connection therewith.
(6) Account
A careful and day to day account of the explosive shall be maintained by the
Contractor in an approved register and manner which shall be open to
inspection by the Engineer at all times. Records must be kept by the
Contractor of all drilling and blasting operations showing holes diameters
and depths, drilling pattern, explosive charge and type per hole, detonator
delay times and total charge per blast. These records must be submitted to
the Engineer on completion of charging.
(2) While executing excavations, the Contractor shall take adequate precautions
against soil erosion and water pollution.
(3) All suitable excavated materials shall be used in construction of the roadway
to the extent as required.
(4) Hauling of material from cutting or borrow pits to embankments other areas
of fill shall proceed only when plant or labour is operating at the place of
deposition to ensure that adequate spreading and compaction of material can
take place.
(5) Over-excavation shall not be permitted. Any excess depth excavated below
the formation levels as specified shall be made good by the Contractor at his
own expense by backfilling with suitable material of similar characteristics
to those of moved materials with compaction as specified in Clauses 909
and 910.
(6) The slopes of cutting shall be cleared of all rock fragments which move
when prised by a crowbar, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Where the Engineer considers that the slope, immediately after dressing,
shall not be permanently stable, he shall direct the Contractor as to the
stabilization measures required. The Contractor shall carry out these
measures soon after Engineer’s instruction.
When completed, the excavation slopes shall be true to the lines and levels
as shown on the Drawing or directed by the Engineer. When completed, no
point on slopes shall vary from the designated slopes by more than 150 mm
measured at right angles to the slope, except where excavation is in rock, no
point shall vary more than 300 mm from the designated slope.
(7) If slips, slides, over breaks or subsidence occur in cutting, they shall be
removed. Adequate precautions shall be taken to ensure that during
construction, the slopes are not rendered unstable or give rise to recurrent
slides after construction.
(1) Where any unsuitable material below the natural ground level under
proposed embankments or below formation level in cutting is required to be
excavated, it shall be removed to such depth and over such areas as shown
on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer. The excavated materials
shall be disposed off as indicated on the Drawing or directed by the
Engineer. The resultant excavation shall be backfilled with suitable material
and shall be leveled and compacted to the density as specified for forming of
the embankments.
(3) If after the removal of material as specified in Sub-clause 906 (1), the
Contractor allows the materials so exposed to reach a condition where
compaction of back filling is impracticable, he shall make good at his own
expense either by additional excavation and filling in the manner specified
in this Clause, or by waiting until the condition of the exposed material is fit
to receive the approved backfill.
(1) Slope
(2) Excavation
Excavation shall be taken to the length and width of the lowest step of the
footing and the sides shall be left to plumb where the nature of soil allows it.
Where the nature of soil or the depth of the trench does not permit vertical
sides, the Contractor at his own expense shall put up necessary shoring,
strutting and planking or cut slopes to a safer to a safer angle or both with
due regard to the safety of personnel and works and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
Cofferdam sheet-pilling shall be carried down well below the bottom of the
pile caps or footings, but without interference with any bearing piles.
Cofferdams shall be rigidly constructed and efficiently braced to withstand
external pressures when water is pumped out. Sheeting shall be reasonably
watertight and all appreciable leaks encountered during the operations shall
be stopped so that construction of pile caps can be carried out in the dry.
The Contractor shall rectify any cofferdam which, for any reason, has
moved, tilted, or changed its shape and/or size.
Pumping form the interior of any foundation enclosure shall be done in such
a manner as to preclude the possibility of the movement of water through
any fresh concrete. No pumping shall be permitted during the placing of
concrete or for a period of at least 24 hours thereafter, unless it is done from
a suitable sump and is separated from the concrete work by a watertight wall
or other similar means.
After the excavation is completed, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer
to that effect and no footing, bedding materials or structures shall be placed
until the Engineer has approved the depth and the suitability of foundation
material.
If there are any slips or blows in the excavation, these shall be removed by
the Contractor at his own cost.
The Contractor shall take adequate protective measures to see that the
excavation operations do not affect or damage adjoining structures.
All cofferdams with all temporary sheeting and bracing shall be removed by
the Contractor after the completion of the substructure unit. The removal
shall be carried out in such a manner as not to disturb or damage the finished
concrete. However, sheet pilling below the top of the pile caps may be left
in place at the Contractor’s option and expenses.
Refilling of foundation pits and trenches shall consist of previous backfill and/or
common backfill as shown on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer.
(1) Materials
(1) The work shall consist of the construction of embankment, filling on other
areas and backfill not specified elsewhere by providing material as specified
or approved by the Engineer, placing, compacting and shaping to lines,
levels, grades and cross sections as shown on the Drawing or as directed by
the Engineer. The maximum size of the coarse material in the mixture shall
not exceed 75 mm for general earth fill.
(2) The limits of embankment shall be built sufficiently wider than the design
dimension to facilitate in achieving required compaction near by outer faces
of the embankment. The surplus material shall be trimmed to conform the
specified side slopes and width of the embankment.
(3) Where necessary, the original ground shall be scarified, mixed with water,
leveled and then compacted so as to achieve the density mentioned in
Clause 910. Where the height of embankment, as measured from formation
level to the original ground level, is less than 200 mm, the embankment
foundation shall be compacted in accordance with the requirements of
Clause 910 such that the required compaction is achieved within the upper
300 mm below formation level. Where necessary, embankment foundations
shall be excavated/furrowed and brought under OMC and re-compacted in
layers of 150 mm each in order to achieve the required level of compaction.
(4) Embankments shall be built up evenly over the entire width and shall be
maintained at all times with a sufficient camber to enable surface water to
drain rapidly from them. Damage to compacted layers by constructional or
other traffic shall be made good by the Contractor.
(5) The natural moisture content and the optimum moisture content of the
material to be placed in the embankment shall be checked before start of the
placing material. If found to be out of the specified limits, the same shall be
made good. Where water is required to be added in such constructions,
water shall be sprinkled uniformly and thoroughly mixed in soil by blading
or harrowing until a uniform moisture content as specified is obtained.
Moisture content, checked in accordance with IS 2720 (Part 2), at the time
of compaction shall be between 90% and 105% of the Optimum Moisture
Content as determined in accordance with IS 2720 (Part 8).
(i) Make good by removing the material off the embankment and placing
suitable material; or
(6) Where fill is required to be constructed across water logged or soft clayey
ground that displays excessive movement under normal constructional
equipment, it may be necessary to construct a capping layer in accordance
with Clause 1004.
(7) Rock use in rock fill embankments shall be deposited in horizontal layers
not exceeding 450 mm each extending up to the full width of the
embankment.
(8) Isolated boulders each within the range of0.05 cubic meters in size may be
incorporated in embankments, not of rock fill, at the discretion of the
Engineer provided that the specified compaction requirements are met and it
shall not be placed less than 1 m below formation level of carriageways or
shoulders.
(9) While filling embankment up to or over culverts or pipe drains, and where
required in the contract, up to bridges, the Contractor shall bring the
embankments up equally on both sides. In rock fill embankments the rock
shall be carefully packed for such distance form the structure as is described
in the contract.
(1) The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer approval of all fill layers before
covering with subsequent layers.
(2) All fill shall be compacted to the depth and degree of compaction as
specified in Table 9.2 or as shown on the Drawing. This requirement
applies whether the specified zone is in fill or in existing ground, except for
any part which may fall within rock or rockfill. Formation level if this
context shall mean top of subgrade.
(3) Each layer of rock used to fill in embankments shall be spread and leveled
in accordance with Sub-clause 909 (7) and systematically compacted.
(4) Layers of material other than rockfill shall not exceed 150 mm compacted
depth unless and until the Contractor can demonstrate to the satisfaction of
the Engineer that he can successfully Compact layers of a greater thickness.
(5) Each layer shall be constructed in lengths suitable to the compaction and
working methods used. Materials of each layer shall be thoroughly mixed
with water as necessary to facilitate its compaction to the specified density.
(6) In cut areas, the subgrade shall be processed as necessary and compacted to
the depth and compaction requirements as given in Table 9.2. In the event
that the Contractor is unable to achieve the minimum compaction
requirements below formation level he shall excavate and recompact in
layer as necessary.
(1) Before commencing filling embankment and from time to time as may be
considered necessary by the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out
compaction trials in the presence of the Engineer on each of the main types
of soil and rockfill to be used and compacted in the Works. He shall carry
out all necessary laboratory and field testing as required by the Engineer and
shall submit to the Engineer the results of all tests. The trial procedure shall
include the compaction of trial areas selected by the Engineer. The surface
of each area shall first be well compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Each type of material being used shall be compacted in equal layers at
uniform but differing moisture contents to a predetermined number of
passes using the Contractor’s proposed compaction equipment.
(2) Following completion of the compaction trials, the Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer, for his approval, his proposals for the compaction of each
type of material to be encountered in the Works and its degree of
compaction specified. The Contractor’s proposals shall include reference to
the types of equipment, the operating weights and type pressure, the
methods of adjusting the moisture content, the number of passes and the
loose depth of each layer.
(3) If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the results of the compaction trials
indicate that the Contractor’s proposed plant and methods shall achieve the
densities as specified, the Engineer shall approve the same. Otherwise the
Contractor shall submit, in writing, proposals for modifying the plant and/or
methods and shall, if the Engineer so requires, compact further trial areas in
accordance with these modified proposals until the Engineer approves of
Contractor’s proposals.
912. BENCHING
(1) Where embankment are to be constructed on hill slopes or slopes with more
than or equal to 1 vertical to 4 horizontal slopes, benches with vertical and
horizontal faces shall be cut into the existing slope (including rock) and the
embankment shall be built up in successive layers. Where the cross slope is
less than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal slope (other than rock) shall be loosened
by scarifying to a depth of not less than 100 mm measured perpendicular to
the slope, to ensure a good bond between the embankment and the
embankment foundation. Material which has been loosened shall be
covered with he first layer and compacted to the specified density
simultaneously with the first layer of embankment material placed.
Where the width of the widened portions is insufficient to permit the use of
heavy rollers, compaction to the specified density shall be carried out with
the help of small vibratory roller/plate compactor/rammer or other approved
methods.
By providing temporary water course, ditches, drains, pumping or other means the
Contractor shall arrange for the rapid dispersal of water from the areas of
earthworks. Where practicable the water shall be discharged into permanent
outfall for the drainage system. Adequate means for trapping silt shall be
provided on temporary systems while discharging into permanent drainage
systems.
914. WATERCOURSES
(1) Through out the works the Contractor shall perform tests to determine the
suitability and compaction characteristics of soils to be used in roadway.
The compaction test shall be conducted in accordance with IS 2720 Part 8 in
every 1500 cubic metre of fill material and every change in material type.
The moisture content test shall be conducted in accordance with IS 2720
Part 2 in every 250 cubic metre of material.
(2) In addition to the foregoing tests, the Contractor shall carry out fiekd density
tests on the compacted fill materials in accordance with IS 2720 part 28/29.
At least one set of density determination consisting of three tests per 500
square metres (or any lesser area) shall be carried out in each layer,
including original ground surface on which embankment is to be constructed.
If the result of any test shows that the minimum specified density has not
been achieved, further compaction shall be executed to the area concerned
and the layer re-tested. Unless the test results are satisfactory, the addition
of another layer shall not be allowed.
(3) The Contractor shall carry out tests for determination of moisture content at
frequent intervals on all materials during the course of compaction as per
Sub-clause 909 (5) to ensure that the requirements of Clause 910 are met
with.
917. MEASUREMNT
(2) Except for foundation, all roadway excavation including side drains, filling
and backfilling compacted in place shall be measured in cubic metres by the
average end area method as computed from the original and final cross-
sections of the completed work. The distance between two end areas shall
be the distance measured along central line of the road. Where due to
changed conditions, or the nature of a particular operation, or for any other
reason, it is impossible or impractical to measure the quantities by means of
average end areas, the Engineer shall compute the quantities by a volumetric
method, if in his opinion, it is the best suited method to obtain an accurate
determination.
(4) If the excavated materials are disposed beyond 10 m length and more than
1.5 m height form the place of excavation and if filling materials are brought
from beyond 10 m and/or 1.5 m below the place of filling, additional leads
and lift shall be measured separately for payment. However initial lead of
10 m and lift of 1.5 m shall not be measured separately. They are deemed
included in the measurement of the item itself. However, the measurement
of foundation excavation shall be inclusive of all leads and lifts (i.e. no
separate leads and lifts shall be measured in foundation excavation).
The measurement of leads and lifts shall be based on mass diagram of the
haulage wherever applicable. All leads and lifts shall be measured as per
the contract. If the material obtained from road way excavation is used fully
or partially in roadway filling, the quantities for roadway excavation and
roadway filling shall be computed as below.
The quantities of roadway excavation and roadway filling of the distances
under reference shall be calculated separately adopting the method described
as above in this Section. The computed quantity of roadway filling shall be
measured in roadway filling while difference between quantities of roadway
excavation and filling shall be measured in roadway excavation. The same
excavated material shall not be measured both in roadway excavation and
roadway filling.
918. PAYMENT
The contract unit rates shall be the full and the final compensation to the
Contractor as per Clause 112 and for the cost of:
.
SECTION 1000 – SUBGRADES
Page No.
1001 SCOPE 10-1
1002 DEFINITIONS 10-1
1003 PREPARATION AND SURFACE TREATMENT OF FORMATION 10-2
1004 CAPPING LAYERS 10-4
1005 MECHANICAL STABILISATION 10-5
1006 LIME STABILISATION 10-9
1007 MEASUREMENT 10-15
1008 PAYMENT 10-15
SECTION 1000 – SUBGRADES
1001. SCOPE
This section deals with the treatment of the upper layers of earthworks including
preparation and surface treatment of the formation, the addition of layers of
selected material, the improvement of in-situ materials by addition and mixing of
selected materials or by addition and mixing of lime.
1002. DEFINITIONS
The level of the top surface of the subgrade upon which pavement structures
is built up.
(2) Subgrade
(4) Stabiliser
The selected natural or crushed material, lime, cement and other similar
materials to be mixed into the in-situ material of the subgrade is defined as
the “stabilizer”.
The addition and mixing of natural or crushed material to improve the in-
situ material of the subgrade.
The addition and mixing of lime of improve in-situ material of the subgrade
such as in-situ material with a CBR is less than 5% or saturated soils.
Preparation and surface treatment of formation shall be carried out only after
completion off all drainage works unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer and
prior to laying the subbase or the base where no subbase is required. The
sequence of operations shall be as follows:
Materials for use in the subgrade shall not contain particles larger then 60
mm. In addition the material shall have a CBR of not less than 5%
measured after a 4-day soak on a laboratory mix compacted to 95% MDD
(heavy compaction), a swell of less than 1% a plasticity index of less than
40% and an organic matter content less than 3%. In-situ material in the
subgrade in cutting that does not meet these requirements shall either be
spoiled or, if suitable, placed in the embankment. The spoiled material shall
be replaced with material meeting the requirements for loose material in the
subgrade.
(a) The material shall be broken down to the above specified grading and
any oversize material which cannot be broken down to the require size
shall be removed and disposed off. The material shall be scarified and
the moisture content shall be adjusted by either uniformly mixing in
water or drying out the material such that the moisture content during
compaction is between 95% and 100% of the Optimum Moisture
Content. The moisture content shall be kept within these limits until
compaction is complete except where otherwise instructed by the
Engineer.
(b) Each layer shall be compacted to a dry density equal to at least 95%
MDD (heavy compaction).
(c) In accordance with Section 500, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer his proposals for the compaction of the material to be used in
the subgrade. The proposal shall be based on the type of plant, the
range of passes and the loose depth of the layer.
The MDD (heavy compaction) and OMC shall be determined for each
new material encountered and in every 3000m2 or part of each layer of
compacted subgrade. The field dry density shall be determined at least
once per 250m2 or part of it of each layer of compacted subgrade. The
test of field density shall be conducted in staggered manner i.e. at left,
at crown and at right in the carriageway.
The Contractor shall request in writing for the Engineer’s approval for
each layer in accordance with Sub-clause 509 (1) and such request
shall be accompanied by the tests results of the above described testing
and all additional relevant information required. If the results are as
specified, he will approve for addition of another layer or will ask for
further tests or rework to meet the requirements.
The subgrade in rock cutting shall be regulated after trimming the rock
excavation by a regulating course of minimum 150 mm compacted depth of
natural complying with the requirements of natural material for subbase as
specified in Sub-clause 1201 (3).
The regulating course shall be laid, compacted and tested in accordance with
Clause 1201 and the surface regularity shall meet the requirements of Clause
1101.
After reinforcement of any soft areas, all surface below carriageways, lay-
bys, cycle tracks, footways and hard shoulders shall be well cleaned and
freed from mud an slurry
(5) Proofrolling
The surface regularity and tolerance of the subgrade shall meet the
requirements of Clause 1101.
When each layer is completed the Contractor shall comply with the
requirements of Clause510 for requesting the Engineer’s approval and
protecting
Where shown on the Drawing or where in-situ material in the subgrade in cutting
does not meet the requirements, in-situ materials shall be replaced with selected
material from cuttings or borrow pits.
Where materials of differing quality are available for placing in the embankments,
the Engineer may also instruct that certain materials should be excluded form the
subgrade and that certain materials should be set part, or obtained from borrow
pits for use in the upper layers.
When materials for subgrade are extracted from borrows to form the capping
layers they shall be natural material complying with the following requirements:-
Materials used for use in capping layers shall be selected among soils
classified as GW,GP,GC, SW in the General Classification of Soils,
described in Clause 609.
Material for use in the capping layers shall not contain particles larger than
60 mm and their percentage passing by weight the 0.075 mm sieve shall be
less than 15%. The material shall have a CBR of not less than 15%
measured after a 4-day soak on a laboratory mix compacted to 95 % MDD
(heavy compaction), a swell of less than 1%, a plasticity index of less than
12%.
When each layer is completed the Contractor shall comply with Clause 510
for requesting the Engineer’s approval and protecting the layer.
(1) General
During the site trials, the control testing requirements shall be in accordance
with Clause 507 and in addition, each set of test shall include the following:
(4) Mixing
The equipment for scarifying the in-situ material and mixing it with
the stabilizer, such as scarifiers and grades, shall be capable of
scarifying the materials and mixing it with the stabilizer to the full
depth of the loose layer necessary to give the specified thickness of
compacted material mixed and compacted in accordance with this
Clause.
The equipment shall be only acceptable, if during the site trials carried
out in accordance with Section 500, it produces the material to the
specified requirements.
(b) Preparation of the Layer
After the layer to be treated has been prepared, the stabilizer shall be
uniformly spread over the width to be worked at the specified rate.
Any part of the mixture which becomes too wet for compaction shall
be allowed to dry out until its moisture content is satisfactory for
compaction.
(5) Compaction
(c) Finishing
The surface finish after compaction of any treated layer shall be free
from ridges, compaction planes, laminations, loose and segregated
material and other surface irregularities and shall be to the line and the
level within the tolerances as specified in Clause 1101. If the surface
fails to meet the requirements of this Specification, the Contractor
shall take the action set out in the appropriate part of Section 1100 or
such other action as the Engineer may instruct or agree.
Grading,
Moisture Content,
Atterberg limits,
The MDD (heavy compaction) and MOC,
The CBR at 95% MDD (heavy compaction) after 4 days soak.
(b) Stabiliser
Grading,
SE
(7) Tolerances
(1) General
(a) Lime
Quick like shall be used on in-situ materials which have a CBR less
than 2% and which moisture content is close to saturation.
Hydrated lime shall be used on in-situ materials which have CBR
between 2% and 5%.
All lime shall be kept under cover and protected from moisture.
Consignments shall be use in the same sequence as they received at the
site. Damaged stocks or stored on the site for more than 3 months
shall not be used. The Contractor shall replace them at his own cost.
Operators and labour shall be provided with protective shoes, clothing,
masks, gloves and goggles when they work with lime.
The lime treated materials after mixing and compacting shall conform
to the following requirements:
For the laboratory trials, the requirements of lime treated materials shall be
as specified in Sub-clause 1006 (2) (c) except for that the CBR at 95%
MDD (heavy compaction) measured on a laboratory mix after 3 days curing
at ambient temperature and 4 days soak which shall not be less than 30%.
During the site trials, the control testing requirements shall be in accordance
with Clause 507 and in addition, each set of test shall include the following:
(4) Mixing
The equipment for pulverising the in-situ material and mixing in the
stabiliser shall be purpose-built equipment capable of pulverising the
materials and mixing in the stabilser to the full depth of the loose layer
necessary to give the specified thickness of compacted material mixed
and compacted in accordance with this Clause.
The equipment shall be only acceptable, if during the site trials carried
out in accordance with Section 500, it can produce the material of the
specified requirements.
The mixers shall be equipped with a device for controlling the depth of
processing and mixing blades shall be maintained or reset periodically
so that the correct depth of mixing is obtained at all times.
The moisture content of the layer before addition of the stabiliser shall
be adjusted to within the range of 80% to 90% of the OMC.
After the layer to be treated has been prepared to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, the stabiliser shall be uniformly spread at specified rate over
the width to be worked at a time. If a spreader is used to spread the
stabiliser ahead of the mixer, it shall be fitted with a device to ensure a
uniform and controllable rate of spread both transversely and
longitudinally.
Any part of the mixture becomes too wet after the stabiliser has been
added and/or before the mixture is compacted shall be allowed to dry
out until its moisture content is satisfactory. This part shall be
retreated with fresh stabiliser and finished off in accordance with this
Clause.
The minimum density for lime treated materials shall be 97% MDD
(Heavy compaction). The moisture content at the time of compaction
shall be between 95% and 100% of Optimum Moisture Content.
(c) Finishing
The surface finish after compaction of any treated layer shall be free
from ridges, compaction planes, laminations, loose and segregated
material and other surface irregularities and shall be to the line and the
level within the tolerances as specified in Clause 1101. If the surface
fails to meet the requirements of this Specification, the Contractor
shall take appropriate action to set out to comply with the requirements
of the Section 1100 or agree with other action as the Engineer may
instruct.
When forming transverse joints, at least 1.0 m length of the previously laid
work shall be incorporated into the new treated layer and the Engineer may
instruct that the percentage of stabiliser be increased at these places.
(a) Completely covering the layer with clear or light coloured approved
polythene sheeting of minimum thickness 0.1 mm. The sheeting shall
be laid to cover the whole of the surface of the layer. At joints the
sheeting shall be lapped by at least 500 mm and any damaged sheeting
shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
The curing system shall be kept in place and intact for a minimum of 7
days after completion of compaction. Shall areas may be temporarily
removed for the purposes of carrying out control testing but only for
the minimum amount of time required for the testing.
(b) Lime
(10) Tolerances
The amount of stabiliser, measured at any point after mixing may vary
within ±of the amount ordered.
1007. MEASUREMENT
(3) Capping layer shall be measured in cubic metre by end area method as
described in Sub-clause 1007 (1).
(4) Mechanically stabilised subgrade shall be measured in cubic metre as
described in Sub-clause 1007 (1) and shall be exclusive of the measurement
on the stabilizer.
(a) Before mixing the stabiliser (i.e. gravel, crushed stone/gravel sand)
quantity to be used shall be measured in stacks or in the body of
transporting trucks/trippers, if it can be measured.
(b) In a length of 100 m five standard holes at the equal distances shall be dig
up and materials shall be collected separately from the each hole. The
average percentage of stabiliser obtained from each hole shall be worked
out. Based on average percentage of stabiliser and volume treated total
quantity of stabiliser used shall be computed.
Least of the quantities computed in (a) and (b) above shall be accepted for
payment.
(5) The volume of lime stabilised material shall be measured in cubic metre as per
end area method inclusive of lime used. The lime used shall be measured in
tonne.
1008. PAYMENT
Page No.
1101 HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENTS, SURFACE LEVELS AND 11-1
SURFACE REGULARITY OF PAVEMENT COURSES
1102 ADVERSE WEATHER WORKING 11-4
1103 USE OF SURFACES BY CONSTRUCTIONAL TRAFFIC 11-5
1104 CARE OF WORKS 11-5
1105 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 11-6
SECTION 1100-ROADWORKS OVERALL REQUIREMENTS
(2) Tolerances
If tolerances given in Table 11.1 for level and straight edge are not in
agreement, in that case the tolerances given for straight edge shall
prevail.
The tolerances for level and surface regularity as given in Table 11.1
shall be applicable only for New construction, Re-construction and
Rehabilitation works. These shall be not applicable in case of
resealing by surface dressing/sand seal/ slurry seal in existing paved
surfaces.
(e) Shoulders
The difference between road level measured at the centre line of the
road and that of the bottom of the side drain measured perpendicular to
the centre line of the road shall not deviate form the specified in the
drawing by ± 25 mm.
Where any tolerances in Sub-clause 1101 (2) are exceed, the Contractor
shall assess the full extent of the area which is out of tolerances and shall
make good the surface of the pavement course, earthworks or formation in
the manner described below.
(a) Earthworks
Where the depth of a side drain is less than that specified, the side
drain shall be excavated to the specified depth and grade. Where the
depth of a side drain is more than the specified depth, the side drain
shall be backfilled with suitable material compacted to a dry density of
at least 95% of MDD (Heavy compaction) up to the specified depth or
the extra excavated depth shall be made good by the same material of
lining of the drain as directed by the Engineer.
(b) Subgrades
Where the levels and or widths are out of tolerances, the full depth of
the layer shall be reworked to the Specification. The area to be treated
shall be as determined by the Engineer necessary for compliance with
the Specification.
Where the results of the construction control tests are less than
specified the full depth of the layer in the area representing the test
shall be reworked to the Specification. However, if needed, more tests
shall be conducted to ascertain the extent of the area required to be
reworked.
For bituminous bases the material of the full depth of the layer shall be
replaced with fresh approved material laid and compacted to
specification. Any area so treated shall be at least 5 m long and the
full width of the paving laid in one operation.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his general rates and
prices for the cost of complying with the requirements of Clause 1101.
Not withstanding the provisions of Sub-clauses 1101 (2) and 1101 (3)
measurement and payment for earthworks and pavement works shall be
made on the basis of the net-cross Section ordered by the Engineer or as
shown on the Drawing. No additional payment shall be made for any
variation. If the executed work is within the limit of tolerance, but is less
than the specified on drawing or ordered by the Engineer, the payment shall
be made for actual quantity executed, if the executed work is more, the
payment shall be made for as shown on the drawing or ordered by the
Engineer.
(2) Laying of material containing bitumen, or mixture thereof, shall cease under
the following adverse conditions:
(3) while the air temperature is rising, work may be performed at the
temperatures of;
(4) When the air temperature is falling, works must be stopped as soon as
temperature reaches 6 degree Celsius regardless of wind velocity. It shall
not be resumed until the temperature is definitely rising.
(5) When strong wind is blowing and this is likely to interfere with the proper
execution of the work, no surfacing, especially spraying of binder shall be
done.
(6) Concrete shall not be placed during falling temperatures when the ambient
falls below 7 degree Celsius or during rising temperatures when the ambient
temperature is below 3 degree Celsius. The temperature of the placed
concrete shall not be allowed to fall below 5 degree Celsius until the
concrete has thoroughly hardened. When necessary, concrete ingredients
shall be heated before mixing but cement shall not be heated.
When the ambient air temperature exceeds 40 degree Celsius during the
concreting operation, the Contractor shall take measures to control the
temperature of the ingredients. Such measures shall include spraying the
aggregates stockpile with water to promote cooling down by evaporation
and, where feasible, shading of stockpiles and the area where concreting is
carried out, reducing time between mixing and placing, and restricting
concreting as far as possible to early morning and late evenings. Curing
shall commence after placing of the concrete in order to prevent excessive
loss of moisture.
(1) The loads and intensity of construction traffic used on pavements under
construction shall be regulated so that no damage is caused to sub-grade and
pavement layers already constructed.
(2) The wheels and track of plant moving over various pavement courses shall
be kept free of deleterious materials.
(3) Bituminous base course shall be kept clean and uncontaminated as long as it
remains uncovered by a wearing course and surface treatment. Should the
base course or tack/prime coat becomes contaminated, the Contractor shall
make good by cleaning it to the satisfaction of the Engineer, including
removal of the contaminated layer and replacing it as per the requirements
of these Specifications which shall be done by the Contractor at his own risk
and cost.
The general obligations for “Care of the Works” shall inter-alia include the
following:
(1) Material shall not be spread on a layer that is wet and may damage it during
compaction of subsequent layer or when opened to traffic.
When material is spread out on the road, it shall, be given a good cross-fall
and a light compaction on the surface with a steel-tyre roller, in order to
facilitate run-off during rainy weather.
(2) All completed works in a layer shall be protected and maintained until the
subsequent layer is placed. Maintenance shall include immediate repairs to
any damage or defects, which may occur and shall be repeated as often as is
necessary to keep the layer continuously intact and in a good condition.
(3) Before priming any completed layer or placing a subsequent layer thereon,
any damage to the existing layer shall be repaired so that after repair or
reconstruction if necessary, it shall conform in all respects to the
requirements specified for that layer. All repair work other than repairs of
minor surface damages shall be inspected and tested before covering up.
No measurement and payment shall be made for the works required under this
Clause. All costs in connection with the requirements specified herein shall be
deemed included in the rates and prices of the related items of works in the Bill of
Quantities.
SECTION 1200 – SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL
WEARING COURSE
Page No.
1201 MECHANICALLY STABLE SUBBASE 12-1
1202 GRADED CRUSHED STONE BASE AND SUBBASE 12-5
1203 WATER BOUND MACADAM BASE AND SUBBASE 12-10
1204 SHOULDERS 12-15
1205 GRAVEL WEARING COURSE 12-17
1206 TELFORD BASE (BLOCK PITCHING) 12-22
1207 DRY BOUND MACADAM BASE AND SUBBASE 12-22
SECTION 1200 – SUBBASE, BASE, HARD SHOULDER AND GRAVEL
WEARING COURSE
(1) Scope
The Contractor shall comply with all requirements of Section 800 in respect
of borrow pits.
The subbase material after placing and compaction shall conform to the
following requirements:
(a) Gravel
The grading of the material after placing and compaction shall be a smooth
curve within and approximately parallel to the envelope given in Table 12.1.
The CBR of the material, after 4 days soaking, shall not be less than
30% at 95% MDD (Heavy Compaction).
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the results of the compaction trials
indicate that the Contractor’s proposed plant and methods shall achieve the
densities specified, the Engineer shall approve the same. Otherwise the
Contractor shall submit in writing proposals for modifying the plant and/or
methods and shall compact further trials in accordance with these modified
proposals until the Engineer approves the Contractor’s proposals.
The compacted thickness of any layer laid, processed and compacted at one
time shall not exceed 150 mm and when a greater compacted thickness is
required, the material shall be laid and processed in two or more layers. The
minimum layer thickness shall be 100 mm.
The material shall be down to the grading specified in Sub-clause 1201 (3).
Any oversize material which connot be broken down to the required size
shall be removed and disposed off.
The material shall be scarified and the moisture content adjusted by either
uniformly mixing with water or drying out the material such that the
moisture content during compaction is between 95% and 100% of the
Optimum Moisture Content (IS 2720 Part 8). It shall be graded and
trimmed to final line and level. Light compaction may be applied before the
final trim is carried out, but once 25% of the compactive effort has been
applied no further trimming or correction of surface irregularities shall be
allowed.
All rolling shall be longitudinal and shall commence at the outer edges of
the pavement and progress towards the centre, except that on super elevated
curves, rolling shall progress from the lower to the higher edge. Where
laying is carried out in lanes care must be taken to prevent water entrapment.
The final trim shall be in cut and the Contractor shall ensure that material
from the trim is neither deposited in low areas nor spread across the section
but graded clear of the works. Following the final trim the material shall be
compacted to a dry density of at least 95% of MDD (IS 2720 Part 8).
During the grading, trimming and compaction of the material the Contractor
shall ensure that the surface and/or the material does not dry out. If so, the
Contractor need to apply fog sprays of water or other approved means
sufficient to maintain the surface and/or material within the specified limits
of moisture content.
(6) Proofrolling
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall proofroll the
completed layer with a steel three wheeled roller applying a load of not less
than 5 tonnes per metre width of roll and the layer shall be free from visible
movement under the proofroller. Approval of the layer shall only be given
after the satisfactory completion of the proofrolling and any remedial
measures shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
The layer shall be set out and constructed to the appropriate tolerance
specified in Section 1100.
(8) Drainage of Subgrade and Subbase
The subgrade and subbase shall be kept continuously drained and any
damage caused by water accumulating on or running off the surface shall be
made good at the Contractor’s expense.
(9) Testing
Construction Tolerance:
Surface Levels 10 m -
Thickness 25 m -
width 200 m -
(10) Measurement
(11) Payment
“Graded crushed stone” shall mean crushed stone with a smooth grading
curve within a specified envelope.
The class of the stone of the graded crushed stone to be provided shall be
specified in the Special Specification or in the Bill of Quantities.
(a) It shall consist of crushed stone, free from clay, organic or other
deleterious matter.
(b) It shall comply with the physical requirements defined in Table 12.3.
Table 12.3: Physical Requirements of Graded Crushed Stone
(a) The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with the
provision and mixing in of the material, including land acquisition.
(c) Only material passing the 6.3 mm sieve may be added, the percentage
to be added shall be agreed with the Engineer and in any case shall not
exceed 15% by weight of the mixture.
Graded crushed stone shall be transported and dumped in such a way that
no segregation occurs.
The Contractor shall carry out compaction trials in accordance with Sub-
clause 1201 (4).
The graded crushed stone shall be laid by plant capable of distributing the
graded crushed stone in a layer of uniform thickness and without
segregation.
The compacted thickness of any layer laid, processed and compacted at one
time shall not exceed 150 mm, and where a greater thickness is required, the
graded crushed stone shall be laid in two or more equal layers.
The compacted thickness of any base layer shall not be less than 3 times the
maximum size of the graded crushed stone and the compacted thickness of
any subbase layer shall not be less than 2 times the maximum size of the
graded crushed stone.
As soon as possible after laying, compaction shall be carried out. The
moisture content shall be adjusted as necessary and, during compaction, care
shall be taken to maintain the moisture content evenly at the specified value.
Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, the moisture content at the
time of compaction shall be between 95 and 100% of the Optimum Moisture
Content determined as per IS 2720 Part 8. The appropriate Sections of Sub-
clause 1201 (5) shall also be applicable for this Clause 1202.
All rolling shall be longitudinal and shall commence at the outer edges of
the pavement and progress towards the centre, except that on superelevated
curves, rolling shall progress from the lower to the higher edge. Where
laying is carried out in lanes care must be taken to prevent water entrapment.
(8) Proofrolling
Graded crushed stone subbase and base shall be set out and constructed to
the tolerances given in Section 1100.
(10) Testing
Construction Tolerance:
Surface Levels 10 m -
Thickness 25 m -
Width 200 m -
smoothness 40 m2 -
(11) Measurement
Graded crushed stone base and subbase shall be measured in cubic metre by
taking cross Sections at intervals of 10 metres or as directed by the Engineer
in the original position before the work starts and after its completion and
computing the volumes in cubic metres by average end area method.
(12) Payment
(1) Scope
The crushed or broken stone shall be hard, durable and free from
excess flat, elongated, soft and disintegrated, dirt and other deleterious
material.
Grading 1 Grading 2
75.0 100 -
63.0 90-100 100
50.0 35-70 90-100
40.0 0-15 35-70
25.0 - 0-15
20.0 0-5 -
12.5 - 0-5
(b) Screening
The Contractor shall carry out trials in accordance with Sub-clause 1201 (4).
The coarse aggregates shall be spread uniformly and evenly upon the
prepared subgrade/subbase/base to proper profile by using templates
placed across the road about 6 m apart, in such quantities that the
thickness of each compacted layer is not more than twice the
maximum size of the aggregate. Whenever possible, approved
mechanical devices shall be used spread the aggregates uniformly so
as to minimise the need for manual rectification afterwards.
Aggregates placed at locations which are inaccessible to the spreading
equipment, may be spread in one or more layers by any approved
means so as to achieve the specified results.
The spreading shall be done from stockpiles along the side of the
roadway or directly from vehicles. In no case the aggregates shall be
dumped in heaps directly on the surface prepared to receive the
aggregate nor hauling over uncompacted or partially compacted base
shall b e permitted. No segregation of coarse or fine aggregates shall
be allowed and the coarse aggregate as spread shall be of uniform
gradation with no pockets of fine material.
(d) Rolling
After the coarse aggregate has been rolled as above screenings shall be
applied gradually over the surface to completely fill the interstices.
These shall not be damp or wet at the time of application. Dry rolling
shall be done while the screenings are being spread so that vibrations
of the roller cause them to settle into the voids of the coarse aggregate.
The screenings shall not be dumped in piles but be spread uniformly in
successive thin layers either by the spreading motions of hand shovels
or by mechanical spreaders, or directly from tipper with suitable grit
spreading arrangement. Tipper operating for spreading the screening
shall be so driven as not to disturb the coarse aggregate.
The screenings shall be applied at a slow and uniform rate (in three or
more applications) so as to ensure filling of all voids. This shall be
accompanied by dry rolling and brooming with mechanical brooms,
hand-brooms or both. In no case shall the screenings be applied so fast
and thick as to form cakes of ridges on the surface in such a manner as
would prevent filling of voids or prevent the direct bearing of the roller
on the coarse aggregate. These operations shall continue until no more
screening can be forced into the voids of the coarse aggregate.
After the screening have been applied, the surface shall be copiously
sprinkled with water, swept and rolled. Hand brooms shall be used to
sweep the wet screenings into voids and to distribute them evenly.
The sprinkling, sweeping and rolling operation shall be continued,
with additional screenings applied as necessary until the coarse
aggregate has been thoroughly keyed, well-bonded and firmly set in its
full depth an a grout has been formed of screenings. Care shall be
taken to see that the base or subgrade does not get damaged due to the
addition of excessive quantities of water during construction.
(6) Proofrolling
Water bound macadam base and subbase shall be set out and constructed
within the tolerances given in Section 1100.
(8) Testing
Construction Tolerance:
Surface Levels 10 m -
Thickness 25 m -
Width 200 m -
smoothness 40 m2 -
(9) Measurement
(10) Payment
(1) Definition
The term “shoulder” means the part of the road falling between the edge of
the pavement and the side ditch or embankment slopes above the formation
level.
Shoulders shall be set out and constructed to the tolerances given in Section
1100.
Where shoulders are constructed with the same material as the adjacent
pavement layers no separate items shall be included in the Bill of Quantities
for shoulder construction and the measurement and payment shall be in
accordance with the relevant Clause of Section 1200.
(1) General
(a) Definitions
The term “gravel” used throughout in this Clause means any material
used as a wearing course, and shall include crushed rock, natural or
crushed gravel, decomposed rock and clayey sands.
Material for gravel wearing course may be obtained from any of the
sources described hereunder:
The Contractor shall comply with all the requirements of Section 800
in respect of borrow pits, alluvial deposits, etc. and spoil areas.
Material for gravel wearing course shall be classified as RF2, SC, GC for
natural materials as per the definition given in Clause 609 or crushed
stones.
The material may require the use of either a grid or sheepsfoot roller with
more than 8 ton mass per metre width of roll to break it down and/or
screening to achieve the specified grading.
The grading of the gravel after placing and compaction shall be a smooth
curve within and approximately parallel to the grading envelope given in the
Table 12.10.
37.5 - 100
25.0 100 85-100
20.0 95-100 85-100
14.0 80-100 65-100
10.0 65-100 55-100
4.75 45-85 35-92
2.0 30-68 23-77
1.0 25-56 18-62
0.425 18-44 14-50
0.075 12-32 10-40
The material shall have a minimum CBR of 30% after 4 days soaking at
95% MDD (heavy compaction) and plasticity index between 15 and 35..
The formation shall be cleaned of all foreign matter and loose materials.
Any potholes, ruts, corrugations, depressions and other defects which have
appeared due to improper drainage, traffic or any other cause shall be
corrected. If considered necessary by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
scarify, water, grade and recompact the subgrade to line and level all at his
own expense. The Engineer may require the formation to be proofrolled by
a loaded truck, scraper or other approved means prior to dumping of the
wearing course material. The cost of all such proofrolling shall be at the
Contractor’s expense.
The gravel wearing course shall be set out to the tolerances given in Section
1100.
The gravel wearing course material shall be deposited in such quantity and
spread in a uniform layer across the full width required, so that the final
compacted thickness is nowhere less than shown in the Drawing or
instructed by the Engineer. Every reasonable effort shall be made to prevent
segregation during the loading, hauling, dumping, spreading, mixing,
trimming and compacting operations.
The compacted thickness of any layer laid, processed and compacted at one
time shall not exceed 150 mm and where a greater compacted thickness is
required, the material shall be laid and processed in two or more equal
layers.
The material shall be broken down in the pavement to the grading specified
in Sub-clause 1205 (3). Any oversize material which connot be broken
down to the required size shall be removed and disposed off by the
Contractor.
The material shall be scarified and the moisture content adjusted by either
uniformly mixing with water or drying out the material such that the
moisture content during compaction is between 95% and 102% of the
Optimum Moisture Content determined as per IS 2720 Part 8. It shall be
graded and trimmed to final line and level. Light compaction may be
applied before the final trim is carried out but once 25% of the compactive
effort has been applied no further trimming or correction of surface
irregularities shall be allowed.
The final trim shall be in cut and the Contractor shall ensure that material
form the trim is neither deposited in low areas nor spread across the section
but graded clear of the works.
Following the final trim the material shall be compacted to a dry density of
at least 95% MDD (Heavy compaction). During the grading, trimming and
compaction of the material the Contractor shall ensure that the surface
and/or the material does not dry out by applying fog sprays of water or other
approved means sufficient to maintain the surface and/or material within the
specified limits of moisture content.
(8) Proofrolling
(9) Tolerances
(10) Testing
Construction Tolerance:
Surface Levels 10 m -
Thickness 25 m -
Width 200 m -
smoothness 40 m2 -
(11) Maintenance
(12) Measurement
(13) Payment
Gravel wearing course shall be paid at their respective contract unit rate. In
addition to stated in clause 112, the contract unit rate shall be also the full
and the final compensation for cost of making arrangement for traffic
control and other costs required to complete the work complying with the
requirement of Section 500, 800 and Clause 1201.
(1) Block pitching shall consist of clean hard durable single size stones of size
equivalent to the thickness of the base course, but not less than 150 mm nor
more than 300 mm in their longest dimension.
(2) A layer of sand or quarry dust shall first be laid over the base to a thickness
of 75 mm. The block pitching shall then be laid with the longest dimension
of each stone in the vertical direction and breaking joint with adjoining
stones. The highest points of protruding stones shall then be broken off with
a knapping hammer and the interstices filled with spalls. The whole shall
then be rolled with a smooth wheeled roller of not less than 8 tonnes
capacity. Spalls shall be continuously added to the interstices during rolling
until the whole remains immovable under the roller and has a uniform
surface without high or low spots.
(3) Measurement
(4) Payment
The Telford base construction shall be paid at their respective contract unit
rates. In addition to stated in Clause 112, the contract unit rate shall be also
the full and the final compensation for cost of making arrangement for
traffic control and other costs required to complete the work complying with
the requirement of Section 500, 800 and Clause 1201.
(1) Scope
Coarse aggregate shall conform to the requirements of Clause 1203 (3) (a).
(b) Screenings
The Contractor shall carry out trials in accordance with Sub-Clause 1201 (4).
The coarse aggregate shall be spread uniformly and evenly upon the
prepared subgrade/subbase/base to proper profile by using templates
placed across the road about 6 m apart, in such quantities that the
thickness of each compacted layer is not more than twice the maximum
size of the aggregate. Wherever possible, approved mechanical devices
shall be used to spread the aggregates uniformly so as to minimize the
need for manual rectification afterwards. Aggregates placed at locations
which are inaccessible to the spreading equipment, may be spread in one
or more layers by any approved means so as to achieve the specified
results.
The spreading shall be done from stockpiles along the side of the roadway
or directly form vehicles. In no cases the aggregates shall be dumped in
heaps directly on the surface prepared to receive the aggregates nor
hauling over uncompacted or partially compacted base shall be permitted.
No segregation of coarse or fine aggregate shall be allowed and the coarse
aggregate as spread shall be of uniform gradation with no pockets of fine
material.
After the coarse aggregate has been rolled as above screenings shall be
applied gradually over the surface to completely fill the interstices. These
shall not be damp or wet at the time of application. Dry rolling with
vibratory roller shall be done while the screenings are being spread so that
vibrations of the roller cause them to settle into the voids of the coarse
aggregate. The screenings shall not be dumped in piles but be spread
uniformly in successive thin layers either by the spreading motions of
hand shovels or by mechanical spreaders, or directly from tipper with
suitable grit spreading arrangement. Tipper operating for spreading the
screenings shall be so driven as not to disturb the coarse aggregate.
The screenings shall be applied at a slow and uniform rate (in three or
more applications) so as to ensure filling of all voids. This shall be
accompanied by dry rolling and brooming with mechanical brooms, hand-
brooms or both. In no case shall the screenings be applied so fast and
thick as to form cakes of ridges on the surface in such a manner as would
prevent filling of voids or prevent the direct bearing of the roller on the
coarse aggregate. These operation shall continue until no more screenings
can be forced into voids of the coarse aggregate.
(6) Proofrolling
Dry bound macadam base and subbase shall be set out and constructed within
the tolerances given in Section 1100.
(8) Testing
Routine inspection and testing shall be carried out by the Engineer to test
the quality of materials and workmanship for compliance with the
requirements of this section.
(9) Measurement
Page No.
1301 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PRIME COAT, TACK COAT,
SURFACE DRESSING, PENETRATION MACADAM, SAND
SEAL AND SLURRY SEAL 13-1
1302 PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT 13-5
1303 SURFACE DRESSING 13-10
1304 PENETRATION MACADAM, SEMI-GROUT 13-19
1305 SAND SEAL 13-25
1306 SLURRY SEAL 13-28
1307 GENERAL, REQUIREMENTS FOR ASPHALT CONCRETE,
SAND ASPHALT, EMULSION AGGREGATE MIX AND COLD
ASPHALT 13-31
1308 ASPHALT CONCRETE 13-39
1309 SAND ASPHALT 13-43
1310 EMULSION AGGREGATE MIX 13-47
1311 COLD ASPHALT 13-53
SECTION 1300 – BITUMINOUS SURFACE AND BASE COURSE
(1) Scope
All bituminous binders shall comply with the relevant requirements set out
in Section 600.
When bitumen emulsion are stored on site in large container, then the
conditions of storing shall comply with the manufacture’s instructions
and/or as per BS 434 (1) – 1984 (1997).
Where bitumen emulsions are stored on site in drums, the drums shall be
regularly “rolled” to ensure mixing of the contents. Prior to using, all
bituminous emulsion drums shall be “rolled” just before opening and use.
Emulsions shall be protected against frost and temperatures below 3o C.
The bitumen storage area and heating station shall be cleared of vegetation,
kept neat and tidy. The drums shall be stacked on their sides in small
quantities with gaps between each stack to reduce fire risk.
Bitumen distributors and boilers shall be kept clean at all times. When
changing the grade of bitumen and at the end of each day’s work, all boilers
and distributors shall be thoroughly cleaned out with a solvent. The
flushings from boilers and distributors shall not be poured any where
indiscriminately, but shall be led by drainage channels to disposal pits. Care
shall be taken that flushings do not find their way into storm water ditches
or streams. All boilers, pre-heating pits, tools and plant shall be kept
scrupulously clean.
When filling the bitumen distributor from the boilers or bulk containers, the
bitumen shall be passed through a filter of fine wire mesh having opening of
not more than 0.6 mm.
On completion of the works, the disposal pit and drainage channels shall be
filled in and topsoiled. The site shall be left clean and tidy.
* These spraying temperatures are for guidance only, since the optimum
spraying temperature depends on the temperature/viscosity
relationship of the bitumen.
For slot-jets the viscosity for spraying shall be 70 to 100 centistokes and for
atomizing jets 35 to 60 centistokes.
The minimum surface temperatures for spraying of the different types and
grades of binder shall be :
Where required the adhesion agent shall be of an approved type and shall be
used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and as instructed by
the Engineer.
The Contractor shall take every precaution to avoid fire or health hazards.
He shall always ensure that:
(a) bitumen is heated only to the temperature required for the particular
application;
(c) suitable protective clothings, foot wears and gloves are used when
handling bitumen; and
The Contractor shall carry out trial sections at location instructed by the
Engineer to demonstrate to the Engineer that this his surfacing operation is
capable of executing the works in accordance with the Specification.
In the course of such trials the Engineer may call upon the Contractor to
modify his method of working, to employ other items of equipment and to
amend the rates of spread at which various materials are applied.
None of the foregoing provisions prevent the Engineer from requiring the
Contractor to vary his materials, equipment or methods of working at any
time during the execution of Works, if he considers this to be essential for
execution of the works in accordance with this Specification.
This Clause covers the application of a bitumen prime and tack coat to be
applied on a prepared pavement layer.
A prime coat means a thin layer of low viscosity bituminous binder applied
to an absorbent non-bituminous surface. If the prime coat is to be trafficked,
it shall be covered with binding material.
(2) Materials
The prime coat shall consists of cut back bitumen MC30/MC70 complying
with Section 600 from a source approved by the Engineer. The grade and
the rate of application of cutback to be used shall be instructed by the
Engineer on site after field trials.
However, the nominal rate of application of the prime coat shall be around 1
lit per sq.m. If the prime coat is to be applied in more than one lane,
allowance shall be made for overlapping of lanes by 150 mm. Tentative
temperature of application shall be around 50o-70o C .
For tack coat, the binder shall be a penetration grade bitumen applied hot
immediately prior to laying the bituminous mixture or alternatively a rapid
curing cutback RC-800 or medium curing cutback MC30, MC70 or MC-800
applied at sufficient time before laying the bituminous mixture to allow the
evaporation of the cutter (solvent); or a quick-breaking emulsion K1-60
applied sufficiently before laying the bituminous mixture to allow the
emulsion to break and the water to evaporate and run off. The binder shall
comply with Section 600.
All loose material shall be swept clear of the layer to expose the full width
of the layer upon which prime/tack coat shall be applied. The surface to be
sprayed shall be checked for line, camber and level, and the surface
corrected, made good as necessary and approved by the Engineer before any
bituminous spray is applied. The Engineer’s approval, or otherwise, of the
surface shall be given immediately prior to the Contractor’s intention to start
spraying.
Soon after the surface to be sprayed has been prepared as specified in Sub-
clause 1302 (3) and approved by the Engineer, the edges of the area shall be
marked out with a line of string or wire pegged down at intervals not
exceeding 15 m on straights or 7.5 m on curves. The prime or tack coat
shall be sprayed on to it at the specified rate. Spraying shall be carried out
not later than 12 hours after the surface has been prepared.
The quantity of binder used shall give complete coverage of the surface with
a slight trace of run-off in places. Shall the specified rate of spray appear to
be incorrect, the Contractor shall immediately stop spraying, inform the
Engineer and amend the spray rate as instructed by the Engineer.
The temperature for storage and spraying shall be as given in the Table 13.3.
The nozzle shall be arranged to give a uniform spray and shall be tested
prior to spraying by discharging on to suitable material (such as building
paper, metal sheets, etc.,) or into special troughs made for this purpose.
Testing shall not take place on the road, and any bitumen spilt on the ground
shall be cleaned off.
The metal sheets used for stopping and starting work shall be cleaned after
each run and the troughs used for testing shall be cleaned at the end of each
day’s work.
During spraying all kerbs, road furniture, culvert headwalls, tree boles and
the like which are liable to be disfigured by splashing of bitumen shall be
protected, and any such feature which is accidentally marred by bitumen
shall be cleaned off with a suitable solvent or made good.
(6) Tolerances
The actual rate of application of bituminous binder across the width of each
spray run shall not vary by more than ± 5% pf the rate ordered and the
actual of application of binder for each single run of the spray shall not vary
from this specified rate by more than 0.03 litre per square metre.
(7) Testing
Tray tests shall be taken at least twice a day during priming operation to
check calculations based on dipping of spray trucks.
The minimum testing frequency for the purpose of process control shall be
as given in the Table 13.4.
(8) Measurement
(b) Actual rate of application measured through tray tests times specified
area sprayed, computed in litres corrected to 15.6o C.
(c) Actual consumption in the specified area sprayed measured in litres
corrected to 16.6o C by dip stick reading of the distributor.
The lowest value of the above three methods shall be adopted for payment.
However, if the rate of actual spray of binder is much less or more than the
designed/instructed rate of spray so appropriate rectification which the
contractor shall execute at his own cost.
(9) Payment
Emulsion/bitumen and cutter shall be paid at the respective contract unit rate
which shall be the full and the final compensation for compliance of all
requirements specified in Clause 1301 and 1302 in addition to those
specified in Clause 112.
This clause covers the application of one or more coats of surface dressing,
each coat consisting of a layer of bituminous binder sprayed on a based
prepared previously, followed by a cover of stone chipping properly rolled
to form a wearing course to the requirements of these Specifications.
A multiple surface dressing means two or more surface dressing placed one
on the other.
(2) Materials
(a) Binder
Chipping *HP A B C1 C2
LAA max. 20 25 30 35 35
AIV max. 20 20 20 20 20
SSS max. 12 12 12 12 12
CR max. 100 100 100 80 -
FI max. 20 20 20 25 -
Degradability <5 <5 <5 <5 <5
The minimum size of the stone to be crushed to produce the chipping shall
be at least 4 times the maximum size of the chippings.
(ii) Grading
The rate of spray of binder and the size and rate of spread of chippings shall
be as specified in the Special Specification, BOQ or as instructed by the
Engineer.
Tray tests shall be carried out at least twice per run during surface dressing
operations to check spray and spread rates calculated from spray truck
chippings and chip-spreader coverage, and more frequently when a number
of short lengths are being surface dressed. Spray truck dippings and chip-
spreader coverage shall be checked for each length sprayed.
The construction plant provide and the methods of operating it, shall be such
as to produce chippings which shall meet the specified requirements of Sub-
clause 1303 (2) (b). This may require washing the chippings to meet the
cleanliness requirements.
The Contractor shall comply with Section 800 when chipping are stockpiled.
If required, the stockpiles area shall be surfaced with 100 mm thickness of
gravel or other material, acceptable to the Engineer. Any contaminated
chippings shall not be used in the Works. After use the stockpile area shall
be cleared, topsoiled and left neat and tidy.
The circulation system shall permit pumping around the tank and
around the spray bar without actually spraying. Spray bars shall be
available for spraying in widths varying from 0.5 m to 4 m and shall
be adjustable transversely so that the operator can follow the required
edge independently. The spray nozzles shall be arranged to give a
uniform spray and the shut-off shall be quick-acting with an antidrip
device. The pressure in the spray bar shall be sufficient to give a good
distribution and spraying of the binder.
(b) Chip-spreaders
Immediately before spraying, all loose material and foreign matter shall be
removed by thorough brushing with mechanical brooms and/or washing or
by use of compressors or by other methods acceptable to the Engineer. All
hardened mud or other foreign matter shall be loosened by scraping before
sweeping. The debris shall be deposited well clear of the surface to be
sprayed. Road furniture (manholes covers etc.) shall be covered with
adhesive paper or similar materials. Kerbstones, roadside, and any other
objects what shall not benefit from binder spray shall be protected in a
manner approved by the Engineer.
Any defect of the surface shall be made good as instructed by the Engineer
and no binder shall be sprayed until the surface has been approved by the
Engineer. The Engineer’s approval or otherwise of the surface shall be
given immediately prior to the Contractor’s intention to start spraying.
Soon after the surface has been prepared and approved, the quantity of
binder, chippings, requirement of equipment and other resources shall be
worked out so that any operation is not delayed due to lack of required
material or resources.
The binder shall be uniformly sprayed at the specified rate. Spraying of the
binder shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in Sun-Clause
1301 (4). Spraying shall not be carried out later than 12 hours after the
surface has been prepared.
Building paper of sufficient width (not less than 600 mm) or other approved
protective material shall be used at the start and finish of each spray run to
enable the distributor to reach its calibrated road speed. Each spray jet shall
be kept open before discharging binder onto the pavement under treatment.
Ends of previous surface treatment run shall be trimmed back to make the
traverse edge straight and to clean it. This shall form the start point of the
subsequent spray run. The spray run shall be limited to 300 m of length
unless the Contractor demonstrates his ability to plan and execute longer
length without impairing quantity of work. Spray width shall be calculated
allowing for 150 mm longitudinal overlap with adjoining spray passes and
for the width that the following chipping spreader is able to cover.
Longitudinal sprayed butt joint shall not be permitted. The Contractor shall
submit his spray width and length proposals to the Engineer for approval.
The spraying width shall normally be of one lane width so that construction
traffic may run over the other lane.
Immediately after the binder has been sprayed, clean and dry chippings shall
be uniformly applied at the specified rate by the use of mechanical chip-
spreaders. The elapsed time between the spraying of binder spreading of
chippings shall in no case exceed one minute.
Shall it become apparent that the supply of chipping is about to fail, the
binder spraying shall be immediately stopped and shall not resume until and
adequate supply of chipping is assured.
Rolling shall begin immediately after the chippings have spread and, in no
case, later than two minutes after the application of binder.
Rolling shall continue until all chippings are firmly embedded into the
binder and until all excess chipping have been removed or insufficiently
chipped areas have been chipped over. The number of passes shall be
agreed with the Engineer. Usually, each point shall receive at least 6 passes
of the pneumatic tyred roller.
The road shall not be opened to traffic until the binder has attained sufficient
viscosity to prevent the stones being whipped off.
The Contractor shall erect temporary traffic restriction signs, barriers and
removable bumps or any other device, as instructed by the Engineer, to
prevent vehicles traveling too fast over the newly laid surface dressing.
Vehicle speed shall be restricted to a maximum of 30 km/h, until there is
sufficient adhesion to ensure that the chippings shall not be dislodged by
faster vehicles.
Where possible, the traffic shall be distributed across the road so as to obtain
uniform polishing of the road surface.
After traffic has been permitted to run on the surface dressing for a period of
at least two weeks and when instructed by the Engineer, all loose chippings
shall be swept and taken away. Windrows of loose chipping shall not be
allowed to accumulate at the sides of the road.
If any defect in surface dressing work is found, the reasons of the defect
shall be established and keeping them in view the defect shall be rectified as
per direction of the Engineer. It required, the Engineer shall ask the
contractor for redoing the defective portion.
The Contractor shall rectify or redo the defective work at his own expense.
(11) Tolerance
The final average overall width of the surface dressing measured at six
equidistant points over a length of 100 m shall be at least equal to the width
specified or instructed. Al no point shall the distance between the centerline
of the road and the edge of the surface dressing be narrower than that
instructed by more than 13 mm.
The actual rate of application of binder across the lane width shall not by
more than ± 5% of the rate ordered and for each single run of the spray it
shall not vary from the specified rate by more than 0.03 lit per square metre.
The actual rate of application of chipping along and across the lane width
for each single run of the chip-spreader shall not vary by more than ± 5% of
the rate ordered.
(12) Testing
The minimum testing frequency required for the process control shall
be as given in the Table 13.7
CONSTRUCTION
TOLERANCES:
Width One test each and every spray run
Smoothness All apparently rough areas to be checked.
Routine inspection and testing shall be carried out to test the materials
and workmanship for compliance with the requirements specified in
this Section.
Any materials or workmanship not complying with the requirements
specified, shall be replaced or redone with the materials or
workmanship complying with the Specifications or, be repaired so as
to comply with the requirements specified.
(13) Measurement
(b) Actual rate of application measured through tray tests times specified
area sprayed, computed inlitres corrected to 15.6o C.
The lowest value of the above three methods shall be adopted for payment.
However, if the rate of actual spray of binder is much less or more than the
designed/ instructed rate of spray so as to impair quality of surface dressing,
the Engineer shall reject the work or shall ask for appropriate rectification
which the contractor shall execute at his own cost.
The lower of these two values shall be adopted for payment. However rate
of application shall not vary with designed/instructed rate of application to
impair quality of surface dressing. In such event the Engineer shall reject
the work or ask the Contractor to rectify at his own cost.
(14) Payment
The binder i.e. emulsion/bitumen and the cutter shall be paid as per their
respective contract unit rate. The Contractor shall be the full and the final
compensation for the cost of preparation of surface to receive binder,
heating, mixing with cutter, spraying, rectification wherever required,
compliance of all provisions specified in Clause 1301 and 1303 in addition
to those specified in Clause 112.
(1) Scope.
(2) Materials
(a) Aggregate
The grading of coarse and choke aggregate shall be within the limits
specified in the Table 13.8.
(b) Binder
Unless otherwise specified the rate of spray of binder and aggregate shall be
as given in the Tables 13.10 and 13.11.
50 3.0-5.5
(4.0)*
65 4.0-7.0
(5.5)*
75 5.5-8.0
(6.5)*
For use of emulsion clean sand or quarry fines shall normally be laid upon
the prepared based to a depth not exceeding 13 mm.
Immediately following preparation of the base (if this is not practicable the
base must be re-cleaned of loose and foreign material) coarse aggregate
shall be spread in loose depth so as to provide the specified thickness of
surface course with required cross slope and grade after compaction. The
aggregate shall be spread by hand or by an approved spreading device.
Dumping in mass on the base shall not be permitted. The shallers at the
edge of the surface course shall be prepared in advance of spreading the
aggregate to allow the roller to roll the shaller edge and the edge of the loose
aggregate simultaneously. Precautions shall be taken to prevent the coarse
aggregate form becoming mixed or coated with earth or other deleterious
matter both before and after spreading. The surface of the loose aggregate
shall be carefully shaped and all high and low spots shall be remedied by
removing or adding aggregate. The coarse aggregate shall then be dry rolled
with a three wheel roller weighing not less than 8.00 tonnes. Rolling shall
start longitudinally at he sides and proceed towards the centre of the
pavement overlapping on successive passes by at least one half the width of
the rear wheel. The compacted coarse aggregate shall then be tested with a
straight-edge and camber template to ensure that it has a firm, even surface
true to cross-section and having a texture which shall allow uniform
penetration of the binder.
The aggregate shall be spread to the required contour and to such a thickness
that, after being compacted its minimum thickness shall not be less than
specified.
Immediately after the binder has been applied to the coarse aggregate, key
aggregate shall be sprinkled lightly over the surface in sufficient quantity to
prevent sticking of the roller wheels. Then this shall be rolled and
simultaneously with the rolling additional key aggregate shall be added in
small quantities and lightly broomed over the surface while rolling
continues until the surface interstices between the coarse aggregate have
been filled but without covering the coarse aggregate itself. The surface
shall then be rolled until the stone is thoroughly imbedded into the binder
and anchored in place. Rolling shall be continued until the surface is hard
and smooth and shows no perceptible movement under the roller.
(8) Seal coat
The surface shall be swept clean of all loose material and treated with a
second coat a binder and cover aggregate as specified in Clause 1303.
The seal coat shall be applied as soon as practicable after the application of
the choke aggregate and the surface course shall be protected from all traffic
(other than that essential to the construction) until the completion of the seal
coat.
(10) Tolerances
The actual rate of application of binder across the lane width shall not vary
more than ±% of the rate ordered and for each single run of the spray shall
not vary from the specified rate by more than 0.03 litre per square metre.
The actual rate of application of chippings for each single run of the chip-
spreader shall not vary by more than ±5% or the rate ordered.
(11) Testing
BITUMINOUS BINDERS: The Contractor shall produce certificates from all suppliers to
Quality of Binder the effect that all material supplied by them comply with the
relevant Specifications.
In addition, one set of tests for each 50,000 litres or part of it of
supply of binder
Routine inspection and testing shall be carried out to test the materials
and workmanship for compliance with the requirements specified in
this Section.
(12) Measurement
(13) Payment
The penetration macadam shall be paid as per contract unit rate which shall
be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor for the cost of
preparation of existing surface, providing, hauling and spraying bituminous
binder, coarse and choke aggregates and complying with Clauses 1301 and
1304 in addition to those specified in Clause 112.
(1) Scope
(2) Definition
(3) Materials
(a) Binder
The material shall be wet screened to ensure all material greater than
100 mm is eliminated together with dust and foreign matter.
The rate of spray of binder and the rate of spread of the fine aggregate shall
be as specified in the Special Specification or as provided in the BOQ or as
instructed by the Engineer.
During the sand sealing operation tray tests to determine spray rate of binder
and spread rate of fine aggregate shall be carried out at least twice per spray
run.
(5) Construction
The binder shall be uniformly at the specified rate. After this, the fine
aggregate shall be uniformly spread and rolled, all in accordance with Sub-
clause 1303 (8).
Traffic speed shall be restricted as per Sub-clause 1303 (9) for as long as the
Engineer may require.
Any whipped-off aggregate shall be broomed back onto the road, as many
times as are necessary for it to adhere fully to the binder.
(7) Tolerance
Sand seal shall be constructed within the same width tolerance as given in
Sub-clause 1303 (11) for surface dressing.
The actual rate of application of binder across the lane width shall not vary
be more than ±5% of the rate ordered and for each single run of the spray
shall not vary from the specified rate by more than 0.003 litre per square
metre.
The actual rate of application of fine aggregate along and across the lane
width for each single run of the chip spreader shall not vary by more than
±5% of the rate ordered.
(8) Testing
The minimum testing frequency required for the process control shall
be as given in the Table 13.14.
Routine inspection and testing shall be carried out to test the materials
and workmanship for compliance with the requirements specified in
this Section.
(9) Measurement
(10) Payment
Payment for sand seal shall be as per contract unit rate which shall be the
full and the final compensation for the cost of compliance of all
requirements specified in Clause 1301 and 1305 in addition to those
specified in Clause 112.
Should there be any variation between the specified rates of binder and/or
aggregate and their actual rate of application as per the instruction of the
Engineer respectively, the contract unit rate for sand seal shall be adjusted
based on contract unit rates of these materials quoted by the Contractor for
the purpose of adjustment.
(1) Scope
(3) Materials
(a) Emulsion
(b) Aggregate
The grading curve shall be within one of the envelopes provided in the
Table 13.15 or as specified in the Special Specification or in the Bill or
Quantities.
(c) Cement/Lime
Cement and lime shall comply with the requirements of Section 600.
Tray tests shall be carried out at least two tests for every 1000 square metre
of spray during slurry seal operations.
(6) Construction
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, the slurry mixture shall be evenly
spread by a slurry machine at the specified rate.
The finished slurry seal shall be of uniform surface texture and colour
throughout the work. The finished surface shall be free from blow-holes
and irregularities.
All traffic shall be kept off the slurry seal until it has cured to a firm
condition to prevent pick-up of the mixture. Where two application of
slurry are required, the initial treatment shall be cured thoroughly prior to
placing the succeeding application.
(8) Tolerance
Slurry seal shall be constructed within the same width tolerance given in
Sub-Clause 1303 (11).
The rate of application of slurry seal across the width of a lane sealed in a
single pass shall not vary be more than ±5% of the rate ordered, and the
average rate of application along the length of a single pass shall be not less
than the rate ordered.
(9) Testing
The minimum testing frequency required for the process control shall
be as given in the Table 13.16.
Routine inspection and testing shall be carried out to test the materials
and workmanship for compliance with the requirements specified in
this Section.
(10) Measurement
Slurry seal shall be as per contract unit rate which shall be the full and the
final compensation for the cost of compliance of all requirements specified
in Clause 1301 and 1306 in addition to those specified in Clause 112.
Should there be any variation between the specified rates of binder and/or
aggregate and their actual rate of application as per the instruction of the
Engineer respectively, the contract unit rate for sand seal shall be adjusted
based on contract unit rates of these materials quoted by the Contractor for
the purpose of adjustment.
(1) Scope
This Clause comprise all the general requirements for bituminous mixes
which shall apply to Clause 1308 to Clause 1311.
(a) General
The Engineer shall have access at all times to construction plant for the
purpose of inspection. The Contractor shall carry out regular
calibration checks in the presence of the Engineer and shall correct
forthwith any faults found.
Any defect of the surface shall be made good and no bituminous mix shall
be laid until the surface has been approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall demonstrate that he can produce aggregate meeting the
grading requirements of the Specification.
At least two months prior to commencing work using a bituminous mix, the
Contractor shall having demonstrated that he can produce aggregates
meeting the grading requirements of the Specification, submit samples of
each constituent of the mix to the Engineer.
The maximum size of the aggregate for wearing course shall equal to or less
than the thickness of wearing course divided by 2.5 and that for binder
course shall equal to or less than thickness or binder course divided by 2.
The Contractor shall then carry out laboratory tests in order to propose the
proportions of each consistent of the initial mix or mixes to be used for site
trials to be carried out in accordance with Sub-clause 1307 (5).
Shall the Engineer conclude form the site trials that the mix proportions or
aggregate gradings are to be changed, the Contractor shall submit further
samples of the constituents, carry out further laboratory and site trials as
directed by the Engineer.
The Engineer may instruct the alteration of the composition of the aggregate
passing through 0.075 mm by the addition or substitution of mineral filler.
Following laboratory and site trials the determined proportions of the mix
agreed by the Engineer shall become the basis of the working mix and the
Contractor shall maintain this composition within the tolerances given in
Sub-clause 1307 (13).
Any changes in the nature or source of the materials, the Contractor shall
inform the Engineer accordingly. The procedure set out above shall be
followed in establishing the new mix design also.
Full scale laying and compacting site trials shall be carried out by the
Contractor on all asphalt pavement materials proposed for the works using
the construction plant and methods proposed by the Contractor for
construction the works. The trials shall be carried out at a location approved
by the Engineer in his presence.
The trials shall be carried out to enable the Contractor to demonstrate the
suitability of his mixing and compaction equipment to provide and compact
the materials to the specified voids content and confirm that the other
specified requirements of he completed asphalt pavement layer can be
achieved.
Each trials area shall be at least 100 metres long to the full construction
width and depth for the material. It may form part of the Works provided it
complies with this Specification. Any areas which do not comply with this
Specification shall be removed.
The Contractor shall allow in his programme for conducting site trials and
for carrying out the appropriate tests on them. The trial on any pavement
layer shall be undertaken at least 21 days ahead of the Contractor proposing
to commence the full scale work on that layer.
(i) The composition and grading of the material including the bitumen
content and type and grade of bitumen used.
(ii) The moisture content of aggregate in the asphalt plant hot bins.
(iv) The type, size, mass, width of roll, number of wheels, wheel load,
tyre pressures, frequency of vibration and the number of passes of the
compaction equipment, as appropriate for the type of roller.
(v) The target voids and other target properties of the mix together with
the results of the laboratory tests on the mix.
At least eight sets of tests shall be made by the Contractor on each 100
metres of trial for each level of compactive effort and provided all eight sets
of results over the range of compactive effort proposed by the Contractor
meet the specified requirements for the material then the site trial shall be
deemed successful. The above data recorded in the trial shall become the
agreed basis on which the particular material shall be provided and
processed to achieve the specified requirements.
Agreement of the Engineer to a set of data recorded in a site trial shall not
relieve the Contractor of any responsibility to comply with the requirements
of this Specification.
The aggregate shall be dried and heated so that they are mixed at the
following temperatures unless otherwise specified in Clause 1308 to 1311.
The dried aggregates shall be combined in the mixer in the amount of each
fraction of the agreed mix and the bitumen shall then be introduced into the
mixer in the amount specified. The materials shall then be mixed until a
complete and uniform coating of the aggregate is obtained.
The mixing time shall be the shortest required to obtain a uniform mix and
thorough coating. The wet mixing time shall be determined by the
Contractor and agreed by the Engineer for each plant and for each type of
aggregate used. It shall normally not exceed 60 seconds.
Immediately after the surface has been prepared and approved, the mixture
shall be spread to line and level by the laying plant without segregation and
dragging.
The mixture shall be place in widths of one traffic lane at a time, unless
otherwise agreed by the Engineer. The compacted thickness of nay layer
shall be at least 2.5 times the maximum size of the aggregate for wearing
course and at least 2 times the maximum size of the aggregate for binder
course.
(9) Compaction
The layer shall be rolled when the mixture is in such a condition that rolling
does not cause undue displacement or shoving.
Initial rolling with a steel tandem of three-wheeled roller shall follow the
laying plant as closely as possible. The rollers shall be operated with the
drive roll nearest the laying plant, at a slow and uniform speed (not
exceeding 5 km/h).
Rolling shall normally commence from the outer edge and proceed
longitudinally parallel to the centerline, each trip overlapping one half of the
roller width. On superelevated curves, rolling shall begin at the low side
and progress to the high side. Where laying is carried out in lanes care must
be taken to prevent water entrapment.
To prevent adhesion of the mixture to the rollers, the wheels shall be kept
lightly moistened with water.
In areas too small for the roller, a vibrating rate plate compactor or a hand
tamper shall be used to achieve the specified compaction.
Any mixture that becomes loose and broken, mixed with dirt or foreign
matter or is in any way defective, shall be replaced with fresh hot mixture,
which shall be compacted to conform with the surrounding area.
Longitudinal joints shall be rolled directly behind the paving operation. The
first lane shall be placed true to line and level an approximately vertical face.
The mixture placed in the abutting lane shall than be tightly crowded against
the face of the previously placed lane. The paver shall be positioned to
spread material overlapping the joint face by 20 – 30 mm. Before rolling,
the excess mixture shall be raked off and discarded.
When the abutting lane is not placed in the same day, or the joint is
destroyed by traffic, the edge of the lane shall be cut back as necessary,
trimmed to line and painted lightly with hot 80/100 penetration grade
bitumen just before the abutting lane is placed.
Any fresh mixture spread accidentally on the existing work at a joint shall
be carefully removed by brooming it back on to uncompacted work, so as to
avoid formation of irregularities at the joint. The finish at joints shall
comply with the surface requirements and shall present the same uniformity
of finish, texture and density as other sections of the work.
If the results of any tests show that any of the constituent materials fail to
comply with this Specification, the Contractor shall carry out whatever
changes may be necessary to the materials and/or to the source of supply to
ensure compliance.
If the results of more than one test in ten on the mixed material show that
the material fails to comply with this Specification, laying shall forthwith
cease until the reason for the failure has been found and corrected. The
Contractor shall replace any faulty material laid with material complying
with this Specification all at his expense.
(13) Tolerance
(b) Aggregates
The average amount of bitumen in any length of any layer, calculated as the
product of the bitumen contents obtained from single tests and the weight of
the mixture represented by each tests, shall not vary beyond the limit of
tolerance of the amount specified.
The average amount of bitumen for each day’s production calculated form
the check weights of mix shall not vary beyond the limits of tolerance of the
amount specified.
The final average overall width of the upper surface of a bituminous mix
layer measured at six equidistant points over a length of 100 m shall be at
least equal to the width specified. At no point shall the distance between the
centerline of the road and the edge of the upper surface of a bituminous mix
layer be narrower than that specified by more than 13 mm.
(1) Scope
(2) Definition
(3) Materials
(b) Aggregate
Fine aggregate (passing a 4.75 mm sieve) shall be free from clay, silt
organic and other deleterious matter and shall be non-plastic. It shall
consist of entirely crushed rock produced from stone having a Los
Angeles Abrasion of not more than 30. The Sand Equivalent of the
fine aggregate shall be not less than 60, and the SSS not more than 12.
(c) Mineral Filler
The grading of the mixture of coarse and fine aggregate shall be within and
approximately parallel to one of the grading envelopes given in Table 13.18
or as specified in the Special Specification or in the Bill of Quantities.
Asphalt concrete i.e. the mixture of binder, coarse and fine aggregate and
mineral filler, if any, shall comply with the requirements given in the Table
13.19
The Temperature of the bitumen when mixed with the aggregate shall be
between 120o C and 140o C.
(7) Compaction
Rolling shall be continued until the voids measured in the completed layer
are within the appropriate ranges tabulated in the Table 13.19. Rolling shall
be carried out by a sequence of roller in such a manner that it shall ensure
the full specified compaction and at the same time it will provide a finished
surface within the tolerance laid down in this Specification.
The average density after compaction shall not be less than 98% of the
average density obtained from Marshall specimens (50 blows) made during
laboratory trials on the mixture used for site trials. No individual density
shall be below 95% of the average of the laboratory specimens.
(8) Testing
(a) Sampling
Prior to use the Contractor shall supply the Engineer with samples of
all materials proposed to be used. The Contractor shall carry out all
the specified tests as the Engineer may require to satisfy himself that
the material and proportions satisfy this Specification. No material
shall be used, nor job mix adopted until they are approved in writing
by the Engineer.
The minimum testing frequency required for the process control shall
be as provided in the Table 13.20.
BITUMEN:
Quality of Binder The Contractor shall produce certificates from the concemed
all suppliers to the effect that all material supplied by them
comply with the relevant Specifications.
In addition, one set of tests for each 50,000 litres or part of it of
supply of binder
Penetration Test Daily
MIXTURE:
Grading and bitumen content One test for each 100 toones of mix or part of it.
Marshall stability, flow and
voids One test for each 100 toones of mix or part of it.
Control of Temperature As required
CONSTRUCTION
TOLERANCES:
Compaction One test per 500 m2 or part of it
Surface levels Every 10 m or at close intervals
Smoothness Every 50 m2 or at close intervals.
(9) Measurement
(10) Payment
The asphalt concrete shall be paid as per contract unit rate which shall be the
full and the final compensation for the cost of compliance of all
requirements specified in Clause 1307 and 1308 in addition to those
specified in Clause 112.
(11) Adjustment in Contract Unit Rate
(1) Scope
(2) Definition
(3) Materials
(a) Sand
The mineral filler shall comply with Sub-Clause 1308 (3) (c).
(c) Binder
(6) Compaction
Rolling shall be sequence of roller in such a manner that it will ensure the
full specified compaction and at the same time will provide a finished
surface within the tolerance laid down in this Specification.
The minimum in-situ density shall be 87% of the density of the Marshall
specimens compacted form the Approved Job Mix.
(7) Testing
(a) Sampling
Prior to use the Contractor shall supply the Engineer with samples of
all materials proposed to be used. He shall carry out all the specified
tests as the Engineer may require to satisfy himself that the material
and proportions satisfy this Specification. No material shall be used,
nor job mix adopted until they are approved in writing by the Engineer.
BITUMEN:
Quality of Binder The Contractor shall produce certificates from the concemed
all suppliers to the effect that all material supplied by them
comply with the relevant Specifications.
In addition, one set of tests for each 50,000 litres or part of it of
supply of binder
Penetration Test At close intervals as directed by the Engineer.
MIXTURE:
Grading and bitumen content One test for each 100 toones of mix or part of it.
Marshall stability, flow and
voids One test for each 100 toones of mix or part of it.
Control of Temperature As required
CONSTRUCTION
TOLERANCES:
Compaction One test per 500 m2 or part of it
Surface levels Every 10 m or at close intervals
Smoothness Every 50 m2 or at close intervals.
Sand Asphalt concrete shall be measured cubic metre as the product of the
length and the compacted cross-sectional area of the sand asphalt laid as per
drawing or as instructed by the Engineer.
(9) Payment
The sand asphalt shall be paid as per contract unit rate which shall be the
full and the final compensation for the cost of compliance of all
requirements specified in Clause 1307 and 1309 in addition to those
specified in Clause 112.
(1) Scope
(2) Definition
(a) Emulsion
This shall comply with all requirements for water of potable quality
and be free of all substances likely to adversely affect either process.
(iii) Filler
Where coarse and fine aggregates are produced from the same
screening or crushing operation and laboratory test indicate that
their combined grading is inconsistent or unlikely to meet
specified mix requirements, they shall be stockpiled separately
and re-blended later as appropriate. The combined aggregate
of the proposed mix, including added natural sand or filler shall
be clean, free from weathered or decomposed stone, organic
matter shale, clay and other substances which in the opinion of
the Engineer may be deleterious to the mixture. The fraction
passing the 0.425 mm sieve shall be non-plastic.
When a satisfactory laboratory trial mix has been obtained, trials of this mix
and the production and laying processes shall be carried out.
If the Engineer is satisfied that the mixture meets the Specified requirements
and that the Contractor’s mixing laying and compaction plant is suitable for
and can produce emulsion aggregate mix to the required standard as
specified, he shall approve the mix.
Emulsion aggregate mix may be laid by grader, provided the Contractor can
demonstrate in the site trials that he can achieve the geometric tolerances for
the base with this method. The minimum thickness of a single layer shall
not be less than 80 mm nor more than 120 mm.
If result form any part of the production, laying and compaction operation
fail to meet the specified requirements, an immediate re-test shall be carried
out. If the variations continue for more than one day, all mixing shall cease
and all plant, materials and processes shall be checked. The Contractor shall
make such adjustments or modifications as are necessary to ensure that
when mixing restarts the material produced shall comply with these
requirements. The cost re-testing and any necessary stoppages, adjustments
and replacement of defective material shall be borne by the Contractor.
Any segregated material formed on the edges and interior of the laid area
during grading of loose mix to level shall be dug out by hand and either
scattered evenly back into the mix or discarded before compaction begings.
(7) Testing
(a) Sampling
Prior to use the Contractor shall supply the Engineer with samples of
all materials proposed to be used. The Contractor shall carry out all
the specified tests as the Engineer may require to satisfy himself that
the material and proportions satisfy this Specification. No material
shall be used, nor job mix adopted until they are approved in writing
by the Engineer.
BITUMEN:
Quality of Binder The Contractor shall produce certificates from the concemed all
suppliers to the effect that all material supplied by them comply with
the relevant Specifications.
In addition, one set of tests for each 20,000 litres or part of it of supply
required.
Water Content One test for each 100 toones of mix or part of it.
Sieve Test One test for each 100 toones of mix or part of it.
MIXTURE:
Grading and bitumen
content One test for each 100 toones of mix or part of it.
Marshall stability, flow or
Duriez Test One test for each 100 toones of mix or part of it.
CONSTRUCTION
TOLERANCES:
Compaction One test per 500 m2 or part of it
Surface levels Every 10 m or at close intervals
Smoothness Every 50 m2 or at close intervals.
(c) Routine Inspection and Testing
(8) Measurement
(9) Payment
The emulsion shall be paid as per contract unit rate which shall be the full
and the final compensation for the cost of compliance of all requirements
specified in Clause 1307 and 1310 in addition to those specified in Clause
112.
The varied emulsion aggregate mix shall be paid as per adjusted rate.
(1) Scope
(3) Materials
(b) Aggregate
Aggregate Class A B
LAA Max. 25 30
ACV. Max 20 20
SSS Max. 12 12
FI Max 20 25
The fine aggregate (passing 4.75 mm sieve) shall be free from clay, silt,
organic and other deleterious matter. Unless otherwise specified, it
shall consist of at least 90 percent entirely crushed sand produced form
stone having a Los Angles Abrasion of not more than 30. The Sand
Equivalent of the fine aggregate shall be not less than 60 and the SSS
not more than 112
The mixture shall comply with requirements given in the Table 13.27:
Description Requirements
Marshall Stability 50 blows (N) 7,000
Flow Value (mm) <4
Voids in total Mix (%) 2-4
Compression/Immersion Ratio 0.75
Cold asphalt generally shall be laid for surfacing, base, leveling and
patching works.
The moisture content of the mixture shall be adjusted in the mixing plant to
permit optimum compaction. The aggregate shall have a moisture content
in the range 3% - 5% at the time the emulsion is added.
Cold asphalt shall be placed at ambient temperature and may be laid by
grader, provided the Contractor can demonstrate in the site trials that the he
can achieve the specified geometric tolerances with this method.
(6) Compaction
The average density of the cold asphalt after compaction shall not be less
than 98% of the average density obtained from Marshall specimens (50
blows) made during laboratory trials on the mixture used for site trials. No
individual density shall be below 95% of the average of the laboratory
specimens.
(7) Testing
(a) Sampling
Prior to use the Contractor shall supply the Engineer with samples of
all materials proposed to be used. The Contractor shall carry out all
the specified tests as the Engineer may require to satisfy himself that
the material and proportions satisfy this Specification. No material
shall be used, nor job mix adopted until they are approved in writing
by the Engineer.
EMULSION:
Quality of Binder The Contractor shall produce certificates from the concemed all
suppliers to the effect that all material supplied by them comply with
the relevant Specifications.
In addition, one set of tests for each 20,000 litres or part of it of supply
required.
Water Content One test for each 100 of mix or part of it.
Sieve Test One test for each 100 of mix or part of it.
MIXTURE:
Grading and bitumen
content One test for each 100 toones of mix or part of it.
Marshall stability, flow
and voids One test for each 100 toones of mix or part of it.
CONSTRUCTION
TOLERANCES:
Compaction One test per 500 m2 or part of it
Surface levels Every 10 m or at close intervals
Smoothness Every 50 m2 or at close intervals.
(8) Measurement
Cold asphalt shall be measured cubic metre calculated as the product of the
length and the compacted cross-sectional area of the cold asphalt laid as per
drawing or as instructed by the Engineer.
(9) Payment
The cold asphalt shall be paid as per contract unit rate which shall be the full
and the final compensation for the cost of compliance of all requirements
specified in Clause 1307 and 13011 in addition to those specified in Clause
112.
Page No.
1401 CONCRETE KERBS 14-1
1402 CONCRETE/STONE FOOTPATHS 14-2
1403 BRICK PAVING IN FOOTPATHS 14-3
1404 BITUMINOUS FOOTPATHS 14-4
1405 CYCLE TRACKS 14-5
SECTION 1400-KERBS AND FOOTPATHS
(1) Scope
This Clause covers the works for construction of kerbs in the central median
and/or along the footpaths or separators.
(2) Materials
Cement sand mortar used for bedding and joint shall be in 1:3 ratio and shall
comply with the Sub-clause 2502 (2).
(3) Laying
Concrete shall be tested in accordance with Section 2000 and shall meet the
specified criteria.
All kerbs shall be laid true to the lines and levels shown on the Drawing or
as instructed by the Engineer.
(5) Measurement
The concrete kerbs measured as above shall be paid at the contract unit rate
which shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor as per
Clause 112 including cost for excavation and backfilling , if any, and all
other incidental costs so as to complete the work as specified.
(1) Scope
(2) Materials
(b) Pre-cast cement concrete blocks of grade M/20/20 as per Section 2000.
Unless otherwise specified or ordered by the Engineer they shall be 50
mm thick of a uniform width of 600 mm and not less than 450 mm nor
more than 900 mm in length.
(c) Natural stone slab cut and dressed from stone of good and sound
quality, uniform in texture and free from defects. The stones, when
immersed in water for 24 hours, shall not absorb water by more than
5% of their dry weight when tested in accordance with IS:1124. The
specific gravity of the stones shall be at least 2.55. The minimum
thickness of the natural stone slab shall be 25 mm and minimum size
shall be 300 mm x 300 mm.
Concrete and cement sand mortar shall meet the requirements specified in
Section 2000 and Sub-clause 2502 (2) respectively. Granular subbase shall
comply with Clause 1201. Bricks shall comply with the requirements of NS
1/2035. The class of the bricks shall be as specified in the Contract.
(3) Laying
The base shall be prepared and finished to the lines, levels and dimensions
as indicated on the Drawing. Generally material for base shall be:
Concrete shall be tested in accordance with Section 2000 and shall meet the
specified criteria. Granular subbase shall be tested in accordance with
Clause 1201 and shall meet the specified criteria. One set of test for specific
gravity and water absorption (3 tests in a set) shall be carried for each source
of stones and the results shall meet the specified criteria.
All footpaths shall be constructed true to the lines and levels shown on the
Drawing or as instructed by the Engineer.
(5) Measurement
(6) Payment
(1) Scope
This Clause covers the works for construction of footpaths with bricks laid
on edge as shown on the Drawing.
(2) Materials
Burnt clay brick shall comply with the requirements of NS 1/2035. The
Class of the bricks to be used shall be as shown on the Drawing. They shall
be free form cracks and flaws and nodules of free lime. The brick shall have
smooth rectangular faces with sharp corners and emit a clear ringing sound
when stuck.
Bricks shall be laid on a sand bed at least 500 mm thick. In cases where two
or more layers of bricks are used each layer shall be separated by a layer of
sand of 25 mm thickness. Bricks shall be laid on edge in the pattern shown
in the Drawing or specified in the contract. Each brick shall be laid
separately and tamped firmly into place on the sand-bed. The top surface of
the layer shall be smooth and even.
Brick be laid to the true lines and levels shown on the Drawing or instructed
by the Engineer.
(5) Measurement
Brick shall be measured in square meter for the completed and accepted
work. Excavation and sand bedding shall not be measured. They shall be
deemed included in the measurement of the paving.
(6) Payment
The brick paving as measured above shall be paid at the contract unit rate
which shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor as per
Clause 112.
(1) Scope
(2) Materials
The stipulations contained in Section 1300 shall govern with regard to the
scope and materials of prime coat and premix except that the binder content
(net bitumen) of the premix shall be 6% by weight of the mix. The type of
the mix to be used shall be as described in the Bill of Quantities. The
stipulations contained in Section 1200 shall govern with regard to the scope
and materials for base/subbase.
(3) Laying
(5) Measurement
(6) Payment
(1) General
Page No.
1501 PERMANENT TRAFFIC SIGNS 15-1
1502 ROAD MARKINGS 15-7
1503 ROAD MARKER STONE 15-10
1504 DELINEATOR POSTS 15-12
SECTION 1500- TRAFFIC SIGNS, ROAD MARKING, ROAD MARKER
STONES AND DELINEATORS
(1) Scope
This Clause covers the supply and erection of permanent road traffic signs
along the roadside, over the carriageway and crossroads, at interchanges and
at the locations indicated on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer.
(2) Materials
Steel bolts and nuts shall conform to IS 1367. All steel bolts, nuts and
washers shall have a hot-dip (galvanized) zinc coating.
Steel plate shall be 2.00 mm thick and comply with the requirements
of IS 1079. After any cutting, welding and punching has been
completed all sharp edges shall be uniformly rounded off and
smoothed down. All physically adhering contaminants shall be
removed and then thoroughly cleaned.
(iii) The sheeting shall not delaminate, blister, crack, peel and chip
during the manufacturing process and during its service life.
(iv) The sheeting supplied shall be free from dirt, solid lumps, scales,
ragged edges and non-uniformity of colour.
(v) The colour of the sheeting shall be even and free from any spots or
loss of colour. The colour shall not fade under local weather
conditions during its expected service life.
(vii) The reflective surface of the sheeting shall be durable and remain
sharp during its expected service life. Bad weather conditions such
as rain, dew, etc, shall not reduce the reflectivity.
(viii) The reflective surface of the sheeting shall be easily cleaned with
soap and water with no adverse effect on its reflectivity and
durability when used on the roads.
(ix) The adhesive used on the backing of the sheeting shall have give a
high quality bonding to clean, smooth and grease free aluminium
or other sign plates approved by the sheeting manufacturer. The
adhesive shall withstand the conditions without allowing the
sheeting to peel.
(g) Paints
Zinc chromate primer shall comply with the requirements of IS: 2074.
Other types of primer shall comply with NS 190/2045. Enamel paint
shall comply with NS 112/2042.
Part of the sign plate not covered by the sheeting, including the reverse
of the plate shall be applied with protective paint, applied by either
stove-enameling or powder-coating process.
(4) Signs
(d) Welding
Where details for the construction of sign faces, the framework of the
sign faces and the attachment thereof to the supporting framework are
not shown in the Drawing, the Contractor shall design these himself
and submit the details to the Engineer for approval before manufacture.
(g) Posts
The total length of the post shall be determined in such a way that the
bottom side of the sign is 1.75 m above the carriageway surface. The
section of the post shall be as shown on the Drawing or as instructed
by the Engineer.
(6) Painting
Structural steel for sign face supports and frame work shall be given a
wire brush surface preparation and painted. Unless otherwise
specified, all painting work shall be carried out in accordance with IS:
1477.
Painting shall not be carried out more than six months prior to erection.
(7) Storage
All traffic signs or portions of traffic signs shall be carefully handled and
stored in a weather-proof storeroom to prevent any permanent deformation
or damage to painted surfaces.
(a) Position
(c) Erection
All welding done during erection shall comply with the requirements
for welding during manufacture.
(e) On Site Painting
All painting done after erection shall comply with the requirements for
painting during manufacture. All places where the painting work has
been damaged before or during erection shall be made good by the
Contractor at his own cost to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The work shall conform to the relevant Specifications and shall be to the
true lines, levels and dimensions as indicated on the Drawing or as directed
by the Engineer.
(10) Measurement
(11) Payment
(1) Scope
This Clause covers the permanent marking of the road surface with white or
yellow paint as indicated on the Drawing or instructed by the Engineer.
The colour, width and layout of road marking shall be in accordance with
the Traffic Signs Manual (latest publication), Department of Roads.
(2) Materials
The paint shall be delivered to the site in sealed containers bearing the name
of the manufacturer and the type of paint.
The viscosity of the paint shall be such that it can be applied without
thinning. Under no circumstance thinning shall be allowed.
Road marking paint shall not be applied to damp surfaces or when the
relative humidity exceeds 80%, or at temperatures lower than 10o C, or
when, in the opinion of the Engineer, wind strength is such that it may
adversely affect the painting operations.
Before the paint is applied, the surface shall be clean and dry and
completely free form any soil grease, oil, acid or any other material which
shall be detrimental to the bond between the paint and the surface. The
portions of the surface where the paint is to be applied shall be properly
cleaned by means of watering, brooming or compressed air.
The line or marks shall be set out by means of paint spots of the same colour
as the proposed final lines and marks. These spot marks shall be at such
intervals as needed to ensure that the road marking can be accurately applied,
and in no case they shall be more than 1.5 from each other.
After spotting, the positions of the proposed road markings such as dotted
lines, starting and finishing points shall be indicated on the road. Pre-
marking shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of
any painting operations.
After the machine itself has been satisfactorily adjusted, the rate of
application shall be checked and adjusted, if necessary, before application
on a large scale is commenced.
Where two or three lines are required next to each other, the lines shall be
applied simultaneously by the same machine. The paint shall be stirred
before application in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Where painting is done by hand, it shall be applied in two layers, and the
second layer shall not be applied before the first layer has dried out
completely. As most road marking paint reacts with the bitumen surface of
the road, the paint shall be applied with only one stroke of the brush or roller
at any one point on the road to prevent reaction with bitumen surface.
(a) Width
The width of the lines and other markings shall not deviate form the
specified width by more than 5%.
(b) Position
The position of lines, letters, figures, arrows, and other marking shall
not deviate from the true position specified by more than 20 mm.
The alignment of any edge or a longitudinal line shall not deviate from
the true alignment by more than 10 mm in 15 m.
If any material not complying with the requirement is delivered on the site
or used in the works, or if any sub-standard work is carried out, such
material or work shall be removed, replaced or repaired as required by the
Engineer at the Contractor’s own cost. Rejected road marking and paint
which has been splashed or dripped on the surfacing, kerbs, structures or
other such surfaces, shall be removed by the Contractor at his own cost, in
such a way that the marking or split paint shall not show up again later.
(11) Protection
After the application of paint, the road markings shall be protected against
damage by traffic or other causes. The Contractor is responsible at his own
cost for the erection, placing and removal of all warning boards, flags, cones,
barricades and other protective measures which may be necessary.
(12) Tests and Standard of Acceptance
The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall be to the true lines,
level and dimensions as indicated on the Drawing or as directed by the
Engineer, subject to the tolerances as indicated in these Specifications.
(13) Measurement
The measurement of road marking shall be in linear meter for each type of
marking.
(14) Payment
(1) Scope
The work covers the supply, painting, lettering and fixing of road marker
stones and shall include.
The dimensions and other details of each type of marker stones shall be in
accordance with the details shown in the DOR’s “Departmental Policy
Document - The Establishment of Road Marker Stones” (latest
publication).
(2) Materials
Each marker stone shall contain following road reference and location
information:
Marker stones shall normally be placed on the left hand side of the
road as one proceeds from East to West and from South to North. On
divided roads with a centre median the marker stones shall be placed
on the left hand side of the road in each direction of travel. In hilly
areas, where the road has a valley on one side and a hill slope on other,
the marker stones shall be placed on the valley side of the road.
Marker stones posts shall be bedded into the ground with concrete
foundation of grade M 10/40 as shown in the Drawing. Marker stones
shall be applied with a coat of primer and two coats of enamel paint.
The work shall conform to these Specification and shall be to the true lines,
levels and dimensions as indicated on the Drawing or as directed by the
Engineer.
(5) Measurement
(6) Payment
The road marker stones measured as provided above shall be paid at the
respective contract unit rate for each type of stone which shall be the full
and the final compensation to the Contractor as per Clause 112 and also for
the cost of excavation, backfilling concrete foundations and all other
incidental works so as to complete the work as specified.
(1) Scope
The work covers supplying and fixing of delineator posts. The design and
painting of the posts shall be in accordance with the Traffic Sign Manual
(latest publication).
(2) Materials
(3) Manufacturing
The post shall be true to the shape, smooth and without honeycombing or
other blemishes. The posts shall be provided with recess.
The work shall conform to these Specification and shall be to the true lines,
levels and dimensions as indicated on the Drawing or as directed by the
Engineer.
(6) Measurement
(7) Payment
Page No.
1601 SCOPE 16-1
1602 GENERAL 16-1
1603 TYPES OF PILES 16-1
1604 PENETRATION AND BEARING VALUE 16-1
1605 PRECAST CONCRETPILES 16-2
1606 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE OF PILES 16-2
1607 DRIVING EQUIPMENT 16-3
1608 PILE DRIVING 16-4
1609 CUTTING AND LENGTHENING OF PILES 16-5
1610 PILE HEAVE 16-5
1611 CAST-IN-SITU PILES 16-6
1612 BORED AND CAST-IN-SITU PILES 16-6
1613 DRIVEN SHELL CAST-IN-STIU PILES 16-13
1614 PILE TESTS 16-15
1615 PILE RECORDS 16-17
1616 MEASUREMENT 16-18
1617 PAYMENT 16-19
SECTION 1600 – PILING FOR STRUCTURES
1601. SCOPE
This section covers the works connected with various types of piles required for
structures.
1602. GENERAL
The requirements contained in this specification and in the Drawing are the
minimum requirements. Strict compliance with these minimum requirements
shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of adopting whatever
additional measures which may be necessary to ensure the completion of the work
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Unless contracted hereunder, the provision of
IRC: 78-1983 shall be strictly followed.
In addition to submitting the records required under Sub-clause 1607 (3) the
Contractor shall report immediately to the Engineer any circumstances which
indicate that the ground conditions differ from those expected by the Contractor
from his interpretation of the soil survey so as to materially affect the bearing
capacity of the piles.
Timber, steel and pre-cast concrete piles are of driven type. Piles may be of solid
or hollow Section or steel cased piles filled with concrete. They may be of
circular, square, hexagonal, H, I, or Z Section as applicable.
Timber and steel/steel sheet piles shall comply with their Specifications as
provided in the contract.
The bearing values of the piles shown on the Drawing or indicated in the contract
are the minimum bearing values to which must be driven or installed. The driving
or installation of the piles shall continue until the estimated penetration and set is
reached or until the pile has been driven to substantial refusal or to a penetration
and set satisfactory to the Engineer. When water jets are used the bearing
capacity of a pile shall be determined from the results of driving with the hammer
after the water jets have been withdrawn. The bearing value and set for the
purpose of this Clause shall be calculated from the appropriate formula as given
in IS 2911 or such other criteria as shall be indicated or described in the contract.
Every pile shall be marked with the date of casting and an identification number.
Pre-stressed piles shall also be marked with the pre-stressing force applied.
Pre-cast concrete piles shall be of the size and shape as shown on the Drawing. If
a square Section is employed, the corners shall be chambered at least 25 mm
unless otherwise specified on the Drawing. The length of pile shall not normally
exceed 25 metres. However, where special equipments for handling and
installation are available to the satisfaction of the Engineer, longer length shall be
permitted.
Piles shall be cast with a driving point for hard driving and shall be cat with a
metal shoe approved by the Engineer
When testing of piles are specified in the contract, the pile lengths as shown
on the Drawing or described in the contract shall be used for tendering
purpose only. The number, Section and length of piles as specified shall be
subject to change. No piles except test piles, shall be ordered, delivered to
site or manufactured on site for any units of a structure until the Engineer
has determined from the results of the driving of the test pile. When the test
piles are not specified, the number and lengths of piles to be ordered,
delivered to site or manufactured on site shall be as specified in the contract.
All piles shall be handled, transported and stored in such a way that they
shall not be damaged. The use of can hooks, lifting tongs or other pointer
tools shall not be permitted. Precast concrete piles shall be supported at the
indicated pickup points and shall only be lifted with bridles or slings
attached at such pickup points. If no pickup points are indicated they shall
be assumed to be at a distance of 0.207 times the length of pile from each
end for two points lifts. For three points lift it shall be at a distance of 0.145
times length of pile from each end with the middle point being at the centre.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage caused by handling or
storage.
Pile Hammers, other than drop hammers shall be of approved steam, air or
diesel hammers, that develop sufficient energy per blow to drive the piles at
a penetration rate of not less than 5 mm per blow at the required bearing
value. Steam or air hammers shall be with boiler or air capacity at least
equal to that specified by the manufacturers of the hammers to be used. The
boiler or compressor shall be equipped with an accurate pressure gauge.
The value, mechanism and other parts of the hammers shall be maintained in
good condition and working order so that the length of stroke and number of
blows per minute for which the hammer is designed shall be obtained.
Inefficient steam, air, or diesel hammers shall be removed from the site. As
a general guide the size of the hammer normally required for steel piles shall
be one which develops approximately 1100 kg metres energy per blow. Pre-
cast concrete piles and steel shell for cast-in-situ piles longer than 15 metres
shall normally require a hammer which develops 1725 kg metres energy per
blow. Drop hammers shall in no case weigh less than the combined weight
of the pile, dolly and helmet. The Contractor shall, upon request, furnish the
Engineer with evidence of the weight of the drop hammer as he requires.
A driving helmet shall be used which fits closely over the head of the
pile. A cushion block of coir or wood shall be used between the pile
head and the helmet and the helmet shall have a dolly of suitable
material on the upper side.
(c) Shells for cast in-situ piles, if not driven with an internal mandrel shall
be driven with a helmet as for steel piles. Shells driven with an
internal mandrel shall have a cushion of low water cement ratio green
concrete placed in the bottom of the shell. Fresh green concrete shall
be added to the cushion after every 30 minutes of driving or after any
break in driving of longer than 30 minutes.
The jet or jets shall be freely eroding the material under the pile. The nozzle
of each jet shall have a minimum diameter of 19 mm and shall generally be
circular. The pump supplying the water shall be of such size & type that it
shall maintain a water pressure of at least 9 kg/cm_ at the orifice of each
nozzle.
(1) General
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 24 hours before beginning
any pile driving operations and no piles shall be driven unless the Engineer
or his Inspector is present. Before any foundation piles are driven in any
unit including test piles, the excavation shall be made, approximately, to the
planned footing level. Piles to be driven through embankments over 1.5 m
in depth constructed by the Contractor shall be driven in holes excavated
through the embankment of dimensions not less than the pile dimensions
plus 15 mm. After driving, the space around the pile shall be filled with dry
sand or single size gravel. During pile driving operations the water level in
the excavation shall be kept below the top of the pile. Under water pile
driving shall only be permitted when the contract calls for a concrete seal
foundation. In such cases, the piles shall be driven by a mechanical hammer
equipped to drive when submerged. When the top of the hammer is
submerged during driving, it shall be equipped with accurate measuring
detachable measuring rods, for the purpose of recording pile penetration.
Care shall be taken to obtain accurate location and spacing of the pilling. In
all cases of under water driving, the equipment and method to be used shall
be approved by the Engineer in writing. When satisfactory penetration of
piles cannot be obtained without damage to the pile from driving, and the
character of the soil is considered suitable, the Contractor may with the
Engineer’s approval use water jets in sufficient numbers to obtain the
desired penetration. Before the desired penetration is reached the jets shall
be withdrawn and the pile shall be allowed the jetting or the provision of
jetting equipment. Water jets shall not be used as an aid for driving steel
piling. The driving of piles by means of followers shall be avoided if
practicable and shall only be done with the written permission of the
Engineer, who may require that one pile from any group of 10 or less shall
be a long pile driven without a follower to determine the average bearing
power of the group. Sawing or cutting the body of a pile to assist in
springing it to proper location shall not be permitted. If a pile vibrates
excessively or shows signs of buckling during it shall be braced or guyed as
directed by the Engineer. Broken, spilt or wrongly treated piles shall not be
measured for payment and if required by the Engineer they shall be
completely withdrawn and replaced by satisfactory piles.
(2) Installation
Installation of piles shall be carried out in accordance with the pile layout
Drawing or as directed by the Engineer.
The Engineer shall decide the sequence of the group of piles that the
Contractor should undertake for installation and shall follow this sequence.
In a group the installation shall proceed from those on the centre of the
group towards those on the periphery.
(3) Temporary
The Contractor shall ensure that free standing piles are temporarily braced
on stayed immediately after driving to prevent loosening of the piles in the
ground and to ensure that no damage resulting from oscillation, vibration or
movement of any free-standing pile length can occur.
During driving, the piles shall not deviate from the vertical or the specified
rake (in the case of raker piles) by more than 40 mm per metre of pile length,
and after driving the centre of the pile at cut-off level, shall be not more than
150 mm from its planned location.
Concrete piles shall be cut off at such level that they shall extend into the
cap or footing as indicated in the Drawing. If piles are to be lengthened the
main or splicing reinforcement shall be stripped of concrete for the distance
necessary to effect a lapped reinforcement splice in accordance with Clause
2013. Alternatively, subject to the Engineer’s approval, the reinforcement
shall be exposed for a minimum of 250 mm and the extension reinforcement
butt welded to the original reinforcement is at least equal to the 28 days
cube strength of the concrete in the original pile and approval of the
Engineer to resume driving has been obtained. In cases, where a substantial
number of pile extensions are expected, the Contractor may propose special
extension methods and procedures. In such cases, the Contractor shall
submit full details of the method and procedure proposed and carry out such
tests as the Engineer may require to substantiate the soundness, strength and
durability of the extended piles and their suitability to fulfill their function
adequately.
Piles shall be cut off at the appropriate level for incorporation of the footing
or cap as shown in the Drawing. When driven to cut-off level without
damage to the head a tolerance of 25 mm from the true cut off level shall be
allowed.
The Contractor shall take and maintain records of the levels of every pile
immediately after driving in accordance with the requirements of the Engineer.
After all piles in the group have been completed, the levels shall be checked to
determine whether any of the piles has heaved. Such heaved pile shall be re-
driven and pile shall not be considered complete until all heaved piles have been
re-driven as directed by the Engineer.
Cast in situ concrete piles may be either installed by marking a bore into the
ground by removal of material or by driving a metal casing with a shoe at the tip
and displacing the material laterally. The two types of piles are termed as bored
and cast-in-situ piles and driven shell and cast-in-situ piles respectively.
(2) Concrete
(3) Reinforcement
(a) Supply
The Contractor shall get approval of the Engineer for any other
material proposed by him for the drilling fluid.
(b) Mixing
Bentonite and any other material shall be mixed thoroughly with clean
water to make a suspension which shall maintain the stability of the
pile excavation for the period necessary to place concrete and
complete the construction.
(c) Tests
The Contractors shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that his
proposed construction method for the pile do not weaken the pile shaft by
contamination of the concrete by sectional reduction, by washing out of
cement, by breaking during pulling of temporary casing or in any other way
including the construction of neighbouring piles.
(a) Procedure
(ii) Boring and excavation inside the steel casing shall be carried down
to the casing toe level or to a level approved by the Engineer. The
excavation shall be continue to final pile tip level using either
temporary casing under water or using drilling mud. The fluid
level inside casing shall at all times be at least 2 metres higher than
outside the casings.
(vii) After hardening, the top Section of the concrete pile shall be
broken to reach sound concrete in the pile.
After the contract has been awarded the Contractor shall prepare a
detailed programme and establish for the pile construction. The
detailed programme shall contain all required information on materials,
equipment, methods of work etc., and be approved in writing by the
Engineer. Such approval shall not however relieve the Contractor of
his responsibilities for pile construction. The import of any boring
equipment or materials by the Contractor, before he has receive the
Engineer’s approval of proposed construction methods, shall be at the
Contractor’s risk.
The Contractor shall check the casing position for each pile during and
immediately after placing the casing, and agree it with the Engineer.
(c) Tolerances
The Centre of the complete pile at cut off level shall not deviate more
than 100 mm from the theoretically correct position shown on the
drawing. The inclination of the pile shall not deviate more than 1:100
from vertical. The Contractor shall provide suitable equipement such
as inverted pendulum, to check the vertically of the boreholes at
intervals during drilling and prior to concreting.
(6) Boring
(a) Methods
Piles shall not be bored so close to other piles which are cast and
contain workable or unset concrete likely to flow.
Boring and excavation for a pile shall not commence until 24 hours
after completion of any pile within a radius of 6 metres center to center.
Pile through water and/or soft upper soil layers shall be provided with
permanent steel casing if shown in the Drawing.
The pile boring shall be carried out using temporary steel casing bored in
pile toe, to the level of side fall or to a level approved by the Engineer.
Before concreting the temporary casing shall be gradually withdrawn.
Under certain circumstances the Contractor may permitted to bore all part or
the pile without casing under water or using drilling fluid to stabilize the
borehole.
Where borehole is formed without casing under water or using drilling fluid
for maintaining the stability of a boring, the level of the water or fluid in the
excavation shall be maintained so that the water or fluid pressure always
exceeds the pressure exerted by the soils and external ground water. The
water or fluid level shall be maintained at a level not less than 2 meters
above the level of the river water level or any artesian pressure level.
In the event of a rapid loss of water or bentonite suspension from the pile
excavation, the excavation shall be backfilled without delay and the
instruction of the Engineer shall be obtained before excavation at that
location is resumed.
(9) Pumping
Pumping from the borehole shall not be permitted unless a casing has been
placed into a stable stratum which prevents the flow of water from other
strata in significant quantities into the boring, or unless it can be shown that
pumping shall not have a detrimental effect on the surrounding soil or
property.
The final toe level of other piles may subsequently be altered according to
the results of the tests loading detail in the Section.
(12) Inspection and Cleaning bottom of Excavation
The time between final excavation including bottom cleaning and the start
of concreting shall be reduced as much as possible and in any case shall not
exceed 6 hours.
Joints in longitudinal bars in piles with tension (for instance for test loading)
shall be carried out by welding unless another method has been approved by
the Engineer.
(iii) The use of pumped concrete and the methods in its use shall be
approved.
(iv) The Contractor shall take precautions in the design of the mix
and placing of the concrete to avoid arching of the concrete in a
casing. No spoil, liquid or other foreign matter shall be
allowed to contaminate the concrete.
(x) The hopper and pipe of the tremie shall be clean and watering
throughout. The pipe shall extend to the base of the boring. A
sliding plug or barrier shall be placed in the pipe to prevent
direct contact between the first charge of concrete in the pipe
of he tremie and the water of drilling fluid. At all times the
pipe shall penetrate the concrete placed and shall not be
withdrawn from the concrete until completion of concreting.
The bottom of the tremie pipe shall be kept at least 1.5 metres
under the surface of concrete. At all times a sufficient quantity
of concrete shall be maintained within the pipe to ensure that
the pressure from it exceeds that from the water or drilling
fluid. The internal diameter of the pipe tremie shall not be less
than 150 mm for concrete made with 20 mm aggregate and not
less than 200 mm for concrete made with 40 mm aggregate. It
shall be so designed that external projection are minimized,
allowing the tremie to pass through reinforcing cages without
causing damage. The internal face to the pipe of the tremie
shall be free from projections.
Slump
Pilling mix
Minimum Range Typical conditions of use
workability
mm mm
A 75 75-150 Placed into water free unlined or
permanently lined bore of 600
mm diameter or over where
casting level lies below
temporary casting: reinforcement
widely spaced bearing ample
room for free movement of
concrete between bars.
The pile shall be concreted with certain over height to allow for
chiseling off the top concrete down to sound hard concrete.
(e) Supervision
When by test, the safe allowable bearing value of any pile is found to be less
than the design load, longer piles or additional piles shall be installed as
ordered in writing by the Engineer.
Steel shells for concrete in-situ piles which protruded above ground or bed
level shall be as shown on the Drawing, specified in the contract or ordered
by the Engineer.
(2) Construction
Steel casings shall be driven as per layout plan shown on the drawing
or as directed by the Engineer. Sequence of driving steel casing in pile
group shall be as agreed by the Engineer.
The piles shall be cast with the concrete using design mix as specified
in the contract.
The concrete shall be placed to fill the entire volume of the casing
without the formation of voids caused by entrapped air. Proper
compaction shall be employed to obtain a dense and high quality
concrete. The concrete shall be vibrated immediately after placing
each lift and lifts shall not exceed 1.25 m in height. The filling of piles
in conjunction with the placing of concrete in the footing shall not be
permitted. The volume of concrete placed shall be observed in the
case of few piles initially cast and the average figure obtained shall be
used to check, whether there is any deviations in the volume of
concrete placed for the subsequent piles.
(e) Miscellaneous
The Contractor shall furnish test piles of the type, number and length
specified in the contract. Generally the test piles shall be located so as to
permit their use in the finished structure and they shall be installed at the
positions shown on the Drawing or specified in the contract.
In order to obtain the best possible data from the test pilling the Engineer
shall have the right to change test piles from their planned location to any
other location in that group or any other group of the structure without any
adjustment in the Contract Prices.
The installation shall be done using the same equipment as is to be used for
installing the other piles in the works. The Contractor shall co-operate with
and assist the Engineer in obtaining data for bearing for the full length of the
installation.
When using driven piles in soft or plastic soils, the Engineer may require
test piles to be re-driven. In such cases the driving shall be stopped at a
point when the top of the pile is 600 mm to 1500 mm above cut off level and
driving shall be resumed after a minimum of 24 hours.
Loading tests shall be made on those piles shown in the Drawing or ordered
by the Engineer. All labour, material, equipment and attendance required to
complete the tests shall be furnished by the Contractor.
(c) The load after each increment shall be kept constant until the rate of
settlement does not exceed 0.25 mm per hour.
(d) The value of settlement shall be recoded before the next increase of
load.
(e) The full test load shall be maintained for 48 hours and the total
settlement shall be recorded.
(f) The load shall be reduced in decrements equal to the increments with
which it was applied.
(g) The load after each reduction shall be kept constant until the rate of
recovery does not exceed 0.25 mm per hour.
(h) The amount of recovery shall be recorded before the next decrease of
the load.
(i) The Contractor shall, with 24 hours of the completion of the test,
submit to the Engineer for each pile tested, graphs showing;
(j) The settlement of the pile under the test load and recovery of the pile
after the removal of the load shall be within the limits required in the
contract or ordered by the Engineer.
(a) A load test shall consist of the application of a load equal to twice the
specified bearing capacity or as otherwise provided for herein or as
directed by the Engineer. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer
the load tests shall be completed before the remaining piles in the same
structure are driven or cast.
(b) Load tests shall be performed on the day indicated by the Engineer.
The Engineer may order load tests to be performed on piles other than
test piles and may also specify different increments of load, more
frequent loadings of gauges and different period of loadings than
specified herein or in Sub-clause 1614 (2). Such changes shall not
continue any claim by the Contractor for any additional payment or
compensation other payment for test pile and load test in accordance
with the contract unit price quoted by the Contractor in the Bill of
Quantities.
(c) Load tests shall be made by method approved by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer detailed plans of loading
system and apparatus he intends to use at least 3 weeks in advance.
The apparatus shall be so constructed so as to allow the various
increments of the load to be placed gradually without causing vibration
to the test piles. Tension anchor piles, if used, shall be of a design and
driven to a depth satisfactory to the Engineer. Steel shells or piles
whose walls are not of adequate strength to withstand the test loading
when empty, shall have the required reinforcement and concrete
placed before loading.
(d) The load test shall not be started until the concrete has attained a
minimum compressive strength of 95% of specified strength. If the
Contractor so selects, he may use high early strength cement (but not
high alumina cement) in the concrete of the load test pile and the
tension piles in order to decrease the time for load testing.
(e) Suitable approved apparatus for determining accurately the load on the
pile and the settlement of the pile under each increment of load shall
be supplied by the Contractor. The apparatus shall have a working
capacity of three times the design load for the pile being tested.
Reference points for measuring pile settlement shall be sufficiently
removed from the pile to preclude all possibility of disturbance.
(f) All pile load settlements shall be measured by adequate devices, such
as gauges, and shall be checked by means of an Engineer’s level.
Increments of deflection shall be recorded just after application of each
load increment and at 15 minutes intervals thereafter. The safe
allowable load shall be considered as 50 percent of the load which,
after 48 hours of continuous application, has caused not more than 6
mm of permanent settlement, measured at the top of this pile.
(g) The first load to be applied to the test pile shall be 50% of the pile
design load and the first increment shall be up to the pile design load.
The load on the pile shall be increased to twice the design load by
applying additional loads in three equal increments. A minimum
periods of 2 hours shall intervene the application of each increment. If
there is a question as to whether the test pile shall support the test load,
the load increments shall be reduced by 50 percent, at the direction of
the Engineer, in order that a more closely controlled failure curve may
be plotted.
(h) When directed by the Engineer load tests shall be continued beyond
twice the design load in 10-ton increments to failure or to a maximum
of 3 times the design load.
The Contractor shall keep records as indicated below for the installation of each
pile and shall submit two signed copies of these records to the Engineer not later
than noon of the next working day after the pile was installed. The signed records
shall from a record of the work. The following data shall be recorded.
Those information which are not applicable for the given type of pilling work
may be omitted.
1616. MEASUREMETN
The piles shall be measured in line metres of pile as completed and accepted in
the structure. Pay lengths of the accepted piles shall be measured from the butt of
the shoe to the cut-off level of the pile shown on the Drawing or as instructed by
the Engineer. No allowance shall be made for cut-offs or reinforcing steel
projecting into the concrete structure as called for in the Drawing. Any additional
pile lengths that may be necessary to suit the Contractor’s method of operation or
for any other reasons shall not be included in the measurements.
Test piles shall be measured per number of load test carried out including the
complete installation of the pile. Piles driven by the Contractor for his own
information or for calibrating diesel hammers shall not be measured as test piles.
1617. PAYMENT
Pile shoes when called for on the Drawing or by the Engineer shall not be paid for
separately, but full compensation for all the work involved in supplying and
fitting pile shoes shall be considered as included in the unit rate for pre cast
concrete piles and no additional compensation shall be allowed.
Splicing of piles, when allowed, shall not be paid for separately but full
compensation for all the work involved shall be considered as included in the unit
rate fro pre cast concrete piles.
Test piles shall be paid at contract unit rate which shall be full and final
compensation for the cost of all operations and incidental costs associated with
supply of piles in place and testing there of in addition to those specified in
Clause 112.
SECTION 1700 – WELL FOUNDATION
Page No.
1701 SCOPE 17-1
1702 GENERAL 17-1
1703 CUTTING EDGE AND CURB 17-1
1704 STENING 17-1
1705 SINKING 17-2
1706 BOTTOM PLUGGING 17-4
1707 SAND FILLING 17-4
1708 TOP PLUG 17-5
1709 MEASUREMENT 17-5
1717 PAYMENT 17-5
SECTION 1700 – WELL FOUNDATION
1701. SCOPE
This work shall consist of construction of well, taking it down to the indicated
levels, plugging the bottom and top including filling inside of the well in
accordance with the details shown on the Drawing or as approved by the Engineer.
When the Drawing do not include details of the ground tests made on or near the
centre line of wells the Contractor shall carry out at his own expense one
bore/drill holes per well with penetration test (or similar approved tests). The
depth to which the bore/drill holes tests are carried out shall be determined by the
Engineer. A bore/drill hole log and a record of the tests and bagged or bottled
samples of material shall be supplied to the Engineer for determining foundation
depth of the wells.
1702. GENERAL
The well curb shall be of reinforced cement concrete. The well steining shall be
of plain or reinforced cement concrete as indicated on the Drawing. The
Specifications for plain and reinforced cement concrete, steel reinforcement and
structural steel work and cutting edge shall be as given in the relevant sections of
these Specification
The dimension and shape of the cutting edge and curb shall be strictly in
conformity to Drawing or as directed by the Engineer. The well curb shall be
placed truly in position and level. It may be precast or cast-in-situ, if it is cast in
situ, all concreting in the well curb shall be done in one continuous operation.
The well curb shall be allowed to set for at least 7 days before sinking is started.
When the curb is to be laid in dry beds, the site shall be excavated upto 300 mm
above the sub-soil water level before the cutting edge is placed.
For well which are to be pitched in water, an earthen/sand island where possible,
shall be constructed and curb shall be placed or cast on this island. In case of any
deep or fast flowing water where an island may not be possible to construct the
curb may be precast, floated and lowered in its final position with the help of
necessary equipment.
For wells going through bouldery strata requiring use of explosives as an aid for
well sinking, the entire inside surface of the well curb and steining upto a
minimum height of 1 metre above the well curb, shall be protected by a 6 mm
thick mild steel plate which shall be suitably stiffened.
The cutting edge shall be designed by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, if otherwise not specified in the contract.
1704. STEINING
The dimensions and shape of the well steining shall strictly conform to those
shown on the Drawing.
The steining of the well shall be built in one straight line form bottom to top, the
worked being checked carefully with the aid of straight edges of lengths approved
by the Engineer. Steining built in the first stage shall not be more than 2 metres
and in subsequent stages it shall not exceed the diameter of the well or the depth
of well sunk below the adjoining bed level at a time. As far as possible, the stages
of work shall not be kept at the location of joints in the vertical steining bars.
After sinking of a stage is complete all damaged portions of steining at top of the
previous stage shall be properly repaired before constructing the next stage.
1705. SINKING
(1) General
The well shall be maintain in plumb and in the correct position during
sinking and immediate steps shall be taken to remedy any deviations. The
well shall be sunk by excavating material uniformly form inside the dredge
hole. Sinking or loading of the well with kentledge shall be commenced
only after the steining has been cured for at least 48 hours or as specified in
the approved Drawing. The Contractor shall supply all grabs, water jetting
equipment, pumps, diving gear and other equipment required for the sinking
and founding of the wells and shall allow the Engineer and his nominees for
the use of diving suit and apparatus for inspection purpose. Details of the
equipment to be used in construction of the well shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval within 28 days of the award of the contract.
Kentledge shall be placed in an orderly and safe manner and in such a way
that it does not interfere with the excavation of the material from inside the
dredge hole and also does not in any way damage the steining of the well.
(3) Dewatering of Well
Explosives shall not be generally used as an aid for well sinking. However,
in case where explosives are to be used, they shall be of mild charges and
prior approval of the Engineer shall be obtained. Blasting of any sort shall
only be done in the presence of Engineer and not before the
concrete/masonry in the steining has hardened sufficiently and is more than
7 days old.
If blasting has been used for setting the well after it has reached the design
foundation level, normally 24 hours shall be allowed to lapse before the
bottom plug is laid.
The charges shall be exploded well below the cutting edge by making a
sump so as to avoid chances on any damages to the curb or to the steining of
the well.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer at least 28 days prior to the
commencement of well sinking construction proposals to ensure safety of
persons working on or liable to enter into the well excavation.
Notwithstanding guard rails and toe boards shall be provided around the top
of well excavation at all times.
When the wells have to sunk close to each other and distance between them
is not greater than the diameter of wells, sinking shall be taken up on all
wells and they shall be sunk alternately so that sinking of all wells proceeds
uniformly and together.
In sinking dump-bell or double-D shaped wells, the excavation in both the
dredge holes should be carried out simultaneously and equally to facilitate
even sinking.
All necessary precautions shall be taken against any possible damage to the
foundations of existing structures in the vicinity of the wells, prior to
commencement of dredging from inside the well.
The dredged material shall not be allowed to accumulate over the well. It
shall be dumped, as far way from the well as possible, and then it shall be
simultaneously removed to a safer place.
In case the river stream flows along one edge of the well being sunk, the
dredged material shall not be dumped on the dry side of the bank but on the
side on which the river current flows.
Very deep sump shall not be below the well curb, as it entails risk of
jumping (sudden sinking) of the well; normally the depth of sump shall not
exceed 3.0 metres below the level of the cutting edge unless otherwise
specifically permitted by the Engineer.
In case a well sinks suddenly and with a jerk, the steining of the well shall
be examined to the satisfaction of the Engineer to see that no damage has
occurred to it.
Tilt and shift of each well shall be measured regularly during the entire
sinking operation. Observations to this effect shall be taken at each stage of
casting of the steining. Simultaneously as the sinking proceeds, necessary
corrective measures be taken to contain the tilts and shifts within the
permissible limits.
Unless otherwise specified the tilt of any well shall not exceed 1 in 80 and
the shift shall not be more than 150 mm.
Before bottom plugging is resorted to, the Contractor shall take from the bottom
of the excavation an undisturbed soil or sample (in the form of a core 3 m long
and at least 70 mm diameter). In case the soil encountered is inferior to that
adopted in design, the well shall be redesigned by the Engineer adopting the soil
properties actually encountered and the founding level of the well duly revised.
Each well, after being sunk to its final position shall be insured that the whole
steining has not developed cracks for its entire length. The sum shall be checked
that it is uniform. If required, it shall be made uniform by resuming minor
excavation in the dredge hole.
Before commencing bottom plugging, all the loose material from the bottom of
the well shall be removed and the depth of the bulb so formed more than 1/6th
diameter of the well shall be filled up with sand and then with concrete.
The concrete mix used in bottom plug shall have a minimum cement content of
330 kg/m3 and a slump of about 150 mm to permit easy flow of concrete through
tremie to fill up all cavities.
Concrete for the plug shall be laid by ‘Tremie Pipe’ method by skip boxes or any
other method if stipulated in the contract. Concrete shall be laid evenly inside the
well.
Least disturbance shall be caused to the water inside the well while laying
concrete in the bottom plug where concreting is placed under the water this shall
be carried out in accordance with Clause 2007.
Concreting shall be done in one continuous operation till dredge hole is filled upto
the required height and thereafter sounding shall be taken or other approved
method of measurement shall be applied to ensure that the concrete has been laid
to the required height.
Concrete as laid shall not be disturbed in any way for at least 14 days.
In order to check any rise in the level of the bottom plug, sounding should be
taken at the close of concreting and for 3 days thereafter once every day.
When the bottom plugging is approved by the Engineer the well shall be filled
with sand. A minimum of 3 days after the bottom plug has been laid shall elapse
before the well is filled with sand.
Before filling with sand, the height of the bottom plug shall be verified.
Sand to be filled shall be clean and free from earth, clay clods, roots and boulders.
After filling the sand upto the required height, top plug shall be laid over it. The
thickness of this plug and the cement concrete mix to be used shall be as indicated
on the Drawing.
1709. MEASUREMENT
Concrete for bottom plug shall be measured in cubic metre as per actual
consumption of cement, sand and aggregate.
Concrete for curb, well steining and top plugging shall be measured in cubic
metre as specified in Clause 2917.
From 0 m upto 3 m
From 3 m upto 6 m
From 6 m upto 9 m
From 9 m upto 12 m
From 12 m upto 15 m
From 15 m upto 18 m
Below 18 m at the rate of each metre.
1710. PAYMENT
Cutting edge, concrete for bottom plugging, various classes of concrete for curb,
well steining and top plugging, reinforcement, sand filling, formwork and
boring/drilling shall be paid at their respective contract unit rates.
The well sinking shall be paid as per contract unit rate for different depths.
The contract rate shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor as
per Clause 112 and also include cost of formation of island, dewatering,
excavation, bailing out materials, providing, placing and removal of kentledge
and other operations including incidental costs necessary to complete the item as
per this Specification.
SECTION 1800 – FLASEWORK, FORMWORK AND SURFACE FINISH FOR
CONCRETE STRUCTURES
Page No.
1801 SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS 18-1
1802 GENERAL 18-1
1803 FLASEWORK 18-1
1804 FORMWORK FOR CONCRETE 18-5
1805 SURFACE FINISH ON FORMED SURFACES 18-8
1806 FINISHES ON UNFORMED SURFACES 18-10
1807 REMEDIAL WORK TO DEFECTIVE SURFACES 18-11
1808 MEASUREMENT 18-12
1809 PAYMENT 18-13
SECTION 1800 – FLASEWORK, FORMWORK AND SURFACE FINISH FOR
CONCRETE STRUCTURES
This section covers the preparation, construction and removal of falsework and
formwork for concrete structures. It also covers the quality requirements for
surface finish on formed and unformed surfaces.
Definitions used in this Clause and other relevant Clause of this Section and other
relevant Sections of these Specifications are as follows:
Formwork means the surface against which concrete is placed to form a face.
All the immediate support necessary to retain the surface in position while
concrete is placed, shall be treated an integral part of formwork.
Falsework means the structural elements supporting both the formwork and
the concrete until the concrete becomes self supporting.
An exposed face is one which will remain visible when construction has been
completed.
1802. GENERAL
The Contractor shall be responsible for designing and construction falsework and
formwork so that they will support the loads imposed on them by the fresh
concrete together with additional stresses imposed by vibrating equipment and by
construction traffic, and so that after the concrete has hardened the formed faces
shall be in the positions shown on the Drawing within the tolerances set out in
Clause 1805.
Before construction begins, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer Drawing
showing details of the proposed formwork and falsework in accordance with this
Section and other relevant Section of these Specification.
1803. FALSEWORK
The design of all falsework for structures with span lengths of 6 metres or
more and the design of all falsework where traffic openings are specified
shall conform to the requirements of this Clause.
Detailed working Drawing in triplicate and design calculations for falsework
shall be furnished by the Contractor to the Engineer.
No falsework construction shall start until the Engineer has reviewed and
approved the Drawing. The Contractor shall provide sufficient time for the
Engineer to complete this review.
The falsework drawing shall include but not limited to the following:-
The calculations must show the stresses & deflections of all supporting
members. The design of falsework shall be based upon the maximum
loads, the maximum stresses and deflections and the conditions listed
below. The stresses listed are based upon the use of undamaged high
quality materials and such stresses shall be reduced by the Contractor
if lesser quality materials are to be used. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the proper evaluation of his falsework material and
design of falsework to carry safely the actual loads imposed.
(i) The design loads for falsework shall consist of the sum of
dead and live vertical loads and horizontal load.
(ii) The vertical design loads for the combined live and dead
loads shall not be less than the actual required loads with due
allowance for dynamic loads. However, it shall not be less
than 0.5 t/m2.
(iii) Dead load shall include the weight of concrete, reinforcing
steel, forms and falsework.
(iv) Live load shall consist of the actual weight of the equipment
to be supported by falsework, applied as concentrated loads,
at the points of contact and a uniform of and less than 0.1
t/m2 applied over the area supported, plus 0.11t/lm applied at
the outside edges of deck overhangs.
(v) The horizontal loads to be resisted in any direction by
diagonal bracing, ties or other means approved by the
Engineer shall not be less than 2 percent of the total dead
load.
(vi) Falsework footing shall be designed to carry the load
imposed upon them without exceeding the estimated soil
bearing capacity and anticipated settlements.
(vii) If the concrete is to be prestressed, the falsework shall be
designed to support increased or readjusted loads caused by
the prestressing forces.
(viii) Joists supporting slabs and overhangs shall be considered as
falsework and they shall be designed for the maximum
loading and deflections loading and deflections permissible
on jacks, brackets, columns joists and other manufactures
devices shall not exceed the manufacturer’s
recommendations and in all cases their deflections shall be
less than 1/270 of their clear span.
If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish catalogue
data listing the manufacturer’s recommendations for manufactured
devices and perform tests as necessary to demonstrate the adequacy
of any such device proposed for use.
(2) Construction
(3) Removal
Formwork shall be so designed that it may be easily removed from the work
without damage to the faces of the concrete. It shall also incorporate
provisions for making minor adjustments in position, if required, to ensure
the correct location of concrete faces. Due allowance shall be made in the
position of all formwork for movement and settlement under the weight of
fresh concrete.
The internal and external angles on concrete surfaces shall be formed with
fillets and chamfers of the sizes shown on the Drawing unless otherwise
instructed by the Engineer.
Shear keys of the size and shape as indicated on the Drawing shall be
provided in all construction joints
Before any reinforcement is placed into position within formwork, the latter
shall be thoroughly cleaned and then dressed with a release agent. The
agent shall be either a suitable oil incorporating a wetting agent, an emulsion
of water suspended in oil or a low viscosity oil containing chemical agents.
The Contractor shall not use an emulsion of oil suspended in water nor any
release agent which causes staining or discoloration of the concrete, air
holes on the concrete surface, or retards the set of the concrete or affects the
strength of concrete.
Before placing concrete all dirt, construction debris and other foreign matter
shall be removed completely from within the placing area.
Before concrete placing commences, all wedges and other adjusting devices
shall be secured against movement during concrete placing and the
Contractor shall maintain a watch on the formwork during placing to ensure
that no movement occurs. If any movement noticed, the formwork shall be
set right immediately.
(3) Removal of Formwork
Alternatively, formwork may be removed when the concrete has attained the
strength set out in Table 18.1, provided that the attained strength is
determined by making test cubes and curing them under the same conditions
as the concrete to which they refer.
Compliance with these requirements shall not relieve the Contractor of his
obligation to delay removal of formwork until the removal can be completed
without damage to the concrete.
As soon as the formwork has been removed, bolt holes in concrete faces
other than construction joints which are not required for subsequent
operations shall be completely filled with mortar sufficiently dry to prevent
any slumping at the face. The mortar shall be mixed in the same proportions
as the fine aggregate and cement in the surrounding concrete and with the
same materials and shall be finished flush with the face of the concrete.
After of the formwork, the date of casting of concrete shall be marked on the
surface of related concrete by water proof paint/marker for estimation of
cuffing time.
Note : fck is the Characteristic Strength for the class of concrete used.
Class of Finish
This finish is for surfaces against which backfill or further concrete will be
placed. Formwork may be sawn boards, sheet metal or any other suitable
material which will prevent the loss of laitance from the concrete being
placed.
This finish is for surfaces which are permanently exposed to view but he
highest standard of finish is not required. Forms to provide a Class F2 finish
shall be faced with wrought thicknessed tongued and grooved boards with
square edges arranged in uniform pattern and close jointed or with suitable
sheet material. The thickness of boards or sheets shall be such that there
shall be no visible deflection under the pressure exerted by the concrete
placed against them.
This is for surfaces which will be in contact with water flowing at high
velocity, and for surfaces prominently exposed to view where good
appearance is of special importance. To achieve this finish, which shall be
free of board marks, the formwork shall be faced with plywood or
equivalent material in large sheets. The sheets shall be arranged in an
approved uniform pattern. Wherever possible, joints between sheets shall
be arranged to coincide with architectural features or changes in direction of
the surfaces.
All joints between panels shall be vertical and horizontal unless otherwise
directed. Suitable joints shall be provided between sheets to maintain
accurate alignment in the plane of the sheets. Unfaced wrought boarding or
standard steel panels will not be permitted for Class F3 finish. The
Contractor shall ensure that the surface is protected from rust marks,
spillages and stains of all kinds.
For curved surfaces where F2 or F3 finishes are called for, the formwork
face shall be built up of splines cut to make a tight surface which shall then
be dressed to produce the required finish.
(5) Tolerances
All parts of formed concrete surfaces shall be in the positions shown on the
Drawing within the tolerances set out in Table 18.2
In cases where the Drawing call for tolerances other than those given in
Table 18.2 the Drawing shall rule.
Note: The tolerances A, B and C given in the table are defined as follows:
Horizontal or nearly horizontal surfaces which are not cast against formwork shall
be finished to the class shown on the Drawing and defined hereunder.
(1) UF 1 Finish
All surfaces on which no higher class of finish called for on the Drawing or
instructed by the Engineer shall be given a UF 1 finish.
(2) UF 2 Finish
This is a floated finish for roof or floor slabs and other surfaces where a hard
trawled surface is not required.
The surface shall first be treated as a class UF 1 finish and after the concrete
has hardened sufficiently, it shall be floated by hand or machine sufficient
only to produce a uniform surface free from screed marks.
(3) UF 3 Finish
This is a hard trowel led surface for use where weather resistance or
appearance is important, or which is subject to high velocity water flow.
The surface shall be floated as for a UF 2 finish but to the tolerance stated
below in Sub-clause 1806 (5). When the moisture film has disappeared and
the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent laitance from being worked
to the surface, it shall be steel-trowel led under firm pressure to produce a
dense, smooth uniform surface free from trowel marks.
A smooth riding surface of uniform texture true to the required grade and
cross section, shall be obtained in all bridge roadway decks.
The placing the concrete in bridge roadway decks shall not be permitted
until the Engineer is satisfied that appropriate methods, equipment such as
concrete finishers and experienced operator, are employed to finish the deck,
and all necessary finishing tools and equipment are available on site and in
satisfactory conditions for use.
Bridge deck surfaces shall be within the tolerances state below in Sub-clause
1806 (5) for UF3 finish and comply with the following additional
requirements:-
(5) Tolerances
In case where the Drawing call for tolerances other then those given in
Table 18.3 the Drawing shall rule.
Note: The tolerances A, B and C given in the table are defined as follows:
Areas of honey combing which the Engineer agrees, shall be repaired after
cutting back to sound concrete when the concrete is no more than 3 day old. Care
shall be taken that reinforcement and sheathing ducts are not damaged. The
cavity shall have sides at right angles to the face of the concrete. After cleaning
out with water and compressed air, compressed air, a thin layer of cement grout
shall be brushed on to the concrete surfaces in the cavity. It shall then be filled
immediately with the concrete of the same class as the main body. The concrete
shall be prepared from the aggregate of maximum size 0.5 times the depth of the
cavity or 20 mm whichever is the smaller. A form provided with a lip to enable
concrete to be placed shall be used against the cavity. The form shall be filled
above the top edge of the cavity.
After seven days the lip of concrete shall be broken off and the surface shall be
ground smooth.
When the concrete is more than three day old, areas of honey combing shall be
repaired using an epoxy bonding agent with a method approved by the Engineer.
Surface irregularities which are outside the limits of tolerance set out in Clause
1806 shall be ground down in the manner and to the extent instructed by the
Engineer.
Blowholes in vertical surfaces shall be filled with laitance, or mortar using fine
aggregate not larger than 0.3 mm, rubbed over the affected area with a rubber face
float and finished with polythene.
Defects other than those mentioned above shall be dealt with as instructed by the
Engineer.
1808. MEASUREMENT
Formwork less than 300 mm high to edges of slabs shall be measured in linear
metre.
Inclined formwork shall be measured in accordance with the following
classification:
Formwork required for lean concrete, to form construction joints and shear keys
for future concrete and other construction surfaces shall not be measured and the
costs shall be included in the rates for other work.
Form work to contraction and expansion joints shall be measured in square metre
on one face only. The rates shall include for the costs stated below and for
forming recesses for sealant and channels for grout.
Formwork less than 300 mm high to edges of slab shall be measured in the linear
metre.
1809. PAYMENT
The formwork shall be paid as per the contract unit rate. In addition to those
specified in Clause 112 the rates for formwork shall include the cost of
submission of details, transportation and use of all materials for formwork and
falsework, erection including provision of supports, fillets and chamfers 75 mm
and less in width, bolts, ties, fixing, cutting to waste, drilling or notching the
formwork for reinforcement where required, working around pipes, ducts,
conduits and waterstops, temporary opinings, cleaning, dressing, removal of
formwork and falsework, filling bolt holes and any remedial work and for
complying with Clause 2007, 2009, 2012 and Section 1800 including all
incidental works required to complete the work as per Specification.
The payment for unformed surfaces of concrete shall be deemed included in the
contract unit rate of the relevant concrete.
SECTION 1900 – BEARINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS
Page No.
1901 EXPANSION JOINTS 19-1
1902 BEARINGS 19-12
SECTION 1900 – BEARINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS
(1) Scope
This Clause covers the works in connection with the fabrication and placing of
expansion joints as shown on the Drawing to this Specification or as directed by
the Engineer.
Expansion joints are defined as joints placed in gaps between the deck ends or the
deck and the back wall. The purpose of the expansion joint is to permit free
movement of the bridge deck due to thermal effect and rotational articulation, to
prevent cracking in the surface layer by effectively supporting the surfacing and
to prevent water and water-borne contaminants from invading the bearing area
and substructure.
(d) Prior to manufacture of the joints, the Contractor shall submit detail
Drawing showing exact positions of all elements. Only after the
approval of the Drawing by the Engineer, the Contractor shall start
fabricating those parts.
(e) The Contractor may offer proprietary expansion joints already tested
elsewhere in lieu of the type specified in the contract. The proprietary
joints offered by the Contractor shall comply in all respects with the
manufacturer’s specifications and meet the required range of
movements and rotations and be and be fit purpose of ensuring
satisfactory long term performance in the bridge.
(f) The compressing seal (for slab seal expansion joint) and strip seal (for
seal expansion joint shall only be obtained from the reputed
manufactures.
(a) In this type of joint, the wearing coat shall be made continuous over
the joint. The other alternative shall be to keep a gap in the wearing
coat, which is filled up with a seal, and filler, to be provided in
extremely hot areas.
(b) Material of steel plate shall conform to IS: 2062. The exposed
metallic components shall be galvanized or coated with approved anti-
corrosive paint. The thickness shall be 20 mm or so for obtaining
satisfactory performance.
(c) Plates shall be placed to the line, grade and expansion gap shown on
the Drawing with any adjustment required for temperature, care being
taken with the top of the plates.
(e) Any temporary bolts or other fixing to hold the expansion plates in
their correct positions which prevent relative movement of the
adjacent parts of the joints shall be removed as soon as the concrete
has sufficiently. In any case, temporary bolts or other fitting shall be
removed within 6 hours of placing concrete unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer.
(f) Care shall be taken to prevent damage to expansion joint plates or its
coating.
(g) If any damage occur to the plates and coating, shall be restored by the
Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(4) Buried Joints
(b) 8 mm dia, 100 mm long nail spaced at 300 mm c/c along the centerline
of the plate shall be welded to the bottom surface of the copper plate to
protrude vertically into the joint gap in order to prevent dislodging of
the plate.
(c) The plate and the nails shall be protected against corrosion by
galvanizing or any approved anti-corrosive coating with a minimum
thickness of 100 micron. These shall be completely free of oil, rust,
loose paint or other similar material before applicable of anti-corrosive
coating.
(d) The material used for filling expansion joint shall be bitumen
impregnated felt elastomer or any other suitable material, as specified
on the Drawing. Impregnated felt shall conform to the requirements of
IS: 1838, and shall be got approved from the Engineer. The joint filler
shall consist of large pieces. Assembly of small pieces to make up the
required size shall be avoided.
(e) Expansion joint materials shall be handled with care and stored under
cover by the Contractor to prevent damage.
(f) Any damage occurring after delivery shall be made good to the
satisfaction of the Engineer at the expense of the Contractor.
(h) Pre-moulded expansion joint filler shall not be placed in position prior
to the placing of the abutting material. If the two adjacent surfaces of
the joint are to be placed at different times, this type of joint filler shall
not be placed until the second face is about to be placed.
(j) Sealant split or splashed onto finished surfaces of the bridge during
joint filling operations shall be removed and the surface made good to
the Engineer’s approval.
(k) No joint shall be sealed until inspected by the Engineer and approval is
given to proceed with the work.
(a) Material
(i) Steel inserts shall conform to IS: 2062. Use of any other
materials like fiberglass or similar material shall not be
permitted.
(b) Fabrication
(i) Steel inserts shall be grit blasted and provided with epoxy paint.
(ii) Edges of reinforcing steel sections shall be rounded.
Plan dimension ± 5 mm
Total height ± 3 mm
(ii) Expansion joint material shall be handled with care and stored
under cover to prevent damage. Any damage occurring after
delivery shall be made good at the expense of the Contractor to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(d) Installation
Steel Inserts
(i) Deck casting shall be done leaving pockets or recess for steel
inserts and anchors of the expansion joint as per the Drawing.
(iii) The top of the insert shall be flush with the finished level of
wearing course maintaining the camber.
(v) Anchor rods shall be tied/welded with the existing deck main
reinforcement maintaining level and alignment.
(iii) While removing the spacer bar after concreting, care shall be
taken to see that the concrete is not damaged during withdrawal
of space bar. If the spacer bar happens to be snugly fitted, it
shall not be pulled by any means: it shall be gas cut in two pieces
and then removed.
Concreting of Pocket
(i) Concreting of pocket shall be done with great care using proper
mix conforming to grade similar to that deck casting besides
ensuring efficient bonding between deck and steel insert. Care
shall be given for ensuring efficient bonding with the already
cast concrete.
(ii) Needle vibrations shall be used. Care shall be taken so that the
position of steel inserts is not disturbed during vibration.
(iii) Spacer bar shall be removed within an appropriate time before
the joint is required to permit movement.
(i) Special jig shall be used to pre-set the ESU during installation.
(iv) ESU shall be removed and coated and with special adhesive.
(vi) ESU shall be tightened with stainless steel nuts and lock washers
in position. Tightened nuts shall be locked with lock washers.
Pre-Setting
The steel insert unit of expansion joint can be fixed in any month of
the year. The expansion gap between bridge superstructure may vary
from time to time; hence initial fixing distance between fixing points
shall depend on the month of installation of steel insert. The c/c
distance between stainless steel fixing of bolts as indicated on the
Drawing shall be taken as only nominal. The same shall be modified
by pre-setting depending on:
(ii) The elapsed period between the casting and/or pre-stressing and
fixing of steel inserts for calculating the remnant creep and
shrinkage.
Special requirements for Installation
(i) Prior to construction of bridge deck area adjacent to the joint, the
Contractor shall provide detailed working Drawing showing the
location of all bolts, recesses and holes necessary for the
installation of the joint. Reinforcing bars in superstructure shall
be amended as required to ensure that there will be no
interference in the installation of the joint.
(ii) All bearing surfaces and recesses, which are in contact with the
joint assembly, shall be checked with a straight edge to ensure
flatness of profile.
(iv) Sections of the jointing making the completed joint shall follow a
straight line.
(v) The fixing bolts shall not be placed in a position until at least 28
days after stressing is completed in post-tensioned box or beam
and slab structures. Prior to placing sections of jointing, contract
surfaces shall be cleaned to remove all grease, tar, paint, oil, mud
or any other foreign material that may affect adhesion of the
sealant.
(viii) Bolt cavities shall be cleaned and plugged with neoprene cavity
plugs. Prior to placing the plugs sufficient sealant shall be
placed in the cavities to cause extrusion of the sealant be the
plugs.
(ix) All excess sealant shall be removed from the jointing and
adjacent areas.
(e) Acceptance Test
(i) Routine test: Each expansion joint shall be tested for a least
100 cycles for a test movement, which shall be 10 per cent
more than the design expansion contraction movement.
(iii) The type test for abrasion resistance shall be carried out to for
one joint out of every 20 nos. as per IS: 3400 (3) and the
standard deviation shall be within ± 20 per cent.
(a) Components
(i) Edge Beams: This special claw leg profiled member shall be
extruded rolled steel section combing good weld ability with
notch toughness.
(ii) Strip seal: This shall be of chloroprene with high tear strength,
insensitive to oil, gasoline, and ozone. It shall have high
resistance to aging. This component, provide to ensure water
tightness, shall have bulbous shape of the part of the seal, which
is inserted into the groove, provided in the edge beam. The seal
should be vulcanized in single operation for minimum full length
of joint.
(b) Material
(i) The steel shall conform to steel grade Rst 37-2 of German
Standard or equivalent.
(i) Rolled steel profiles for edge beams shall be long enough to cater
for a 2-lane carriageway. These shall be cut to size of actual
requirements by means of a mitre box saw. Alignment of the
cut-to-size steel profiles shall then be made in accordance with
the actual bridge cross-section on worktables. For this purpose,
the contour of bridge cross-section shall be sketched onto these
tables. After the steel profiles are aligned, they shall be chucked
to the tables by means of screw clamps and tacked by arc
welding.
(ii) Anchor plates shall be cut to the required size by gas cutting.
These shall be welded to the edge beams.]
(iii) Anchor loops shall be bent to the required shape and welded to
anchor plates.
(e) Installation
(i) The width of the gap to cater for movement due to thermal effect,
pre-stress, shrinkage and creep, superstructure deformations (if
any) and sub-structure deformations (if any) shall be determined
and intimated to the manufacturer. Depending upon the
temperature at which the joint is likely to be installed, the gap
dimension shall be pre-set.
(ii) Taking the width of gap for movement of the joint into account,
the dimensions of the recess in the decking shall be established in
accordance with the Drawing or design data of the manufacturer.
The surfaces of the recess shall be thoroughly cleaned and all dirt
and debris removed. The exposed reinforcement shall be
suitably adjusted to permit unobstructed lowering of the joint
into the recess.
(vi) Concrete shall then be filled into the recess. The packing
concrete shall feature low shrinkage and have the same strength
as that of the superstructure, but in any case not less than M
35/10 grade. After the concrete has cured, the movable
installation brackets still in place shall be removed.
(viii) As soon as the concrete in the recess has become initially set, a
study ramp shall be placed over the joint to protect the exposed
steel beams and neoprene seals from traffic. Expansion joint
shall not be exposed to traffic loading before the carriageway
surfacing is placed.
(ix) The carriageway surfacing shall be finished flush with the top of
the steel sections. The actual junction of the surfacing/wearing
coat with the steel edge section shall be formed by a wedge
shaped joint with a sealing compound. The horizontal leg of the
edge beam shall be cleaned beforehand. It shall be ensured that
thorough compaction of the surfacing in is made in order to
prevent any premature depression forming in it.
(ii) For neoprene seal, the acceptance test shall conform to the
requirements stipulated in Table 19.1. It shall also be stretch
tested. The Contractor shall produce test certificates conducted
in a recognized and approved laboratory.
(v) The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that water tightness test
for the type of joint has been carried out in an approved
laboratory to check the water tightness under a water pressure of
4 bars.
(7) Measurement
(8) Payment
(1) Scope
The Clause covers the work in connection with the furnishing and fixing
bearings in position in accordance with the details shown on the Drawing to
the requirements of these Specifications or as directed by the Engineer.
(2) General
(a) Bearing plates, bars, rockets, assemblies and other expansion or fixed
devices shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown on
the Drawing.
(b) All bearing shall be capable of being replaced during the lifetime of
the structure and shall be robust, durable and proven type obtained
from the approved manufacturers, who can provide complete facilities
for raw materials and finished products.
(c) The Contractor shall exercise care in setting and fixing all bearing in
their correct positions and ensuring that uniformity is obtained on all
bearing surfaces.
(d) Bearings shall be handled with care and stored under cover.
(f) It shall be ensured that the bearings are set truly level and in exact
positions as indicated on the Drawing so as to have full and even
bearing on the seats. Thin mortar pads (not exceeding 12 mm) may
even be made to meet with this requirement. The finished level plane
shall not vary more than 4 mm from the level shown on the Drawing.
(h) The anchor bolts, if shown on the Drawing, shall be installed to permit
true positioning of the bearing assemblies. The drilled holes for fixing
the bolts shall be completely filled with mortar consisting of 1 part of
cement: 2 part of sand.
(3) Metallic (Steel) Bearings
(a) Materials
(i) Railway axles (R 19) are also acceptable as forged steel for
rollers.
(v) Coating
(i) All work shall conform strictly to the Drawing. Care shall be
taken to ensure that all parts of an assembly fit accurately
together.
(ii) Knuckle pins, rolling surface of the rollers and bearing surface
of the bearing plates shall be machined and all bolt holes shall
be drilled. The whole bearing shall be fitted and finished as
required for good quality machined work to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. However, in case of bearings which are to be
grouted or bedded on a suitable yielding material on any
surface which is to be in permanent contact with the grout or
the yielding material may be left unmahcined.
(c) Workmanship
(iii) Casting shall be true to the forms and dimension shown on the
Drawing and shall be free from pouring faults, sponginess,
cracks, blowholes and other defects on position affecting their
appearance or strength. Warped or distorted casting shall not
be accepted. Exposed surfaces shall be smooth and dense.
(v) All irregularities, fins or risers shall be ground off flush with
the adjacent surface. Casting with visible cracks, blow holes or
similar blemishes shall be rejected, if the imperfections are
located in bearing surfaces or cannot be remedied to the
approval of the Engineer.
(vi) Imperfections, which are not located in, bearing surfaces shall
be cleaned out, filled with weld metal of the appropriate
composition and ground flush.
(vii) All surfaces of major components like top plates, saddle plates,
base plates, roller of the bearings shall be machined all over for
correct alignment interchangeability, proper fitting etc.
(d) Tolerances
Height of Bearing
Base Plate
Tolerance on length and width of the base plate shall not exceed + 1.0
mm, tolerance on the thickness of the plate shall not exceed + 0.5 mm.
No minus tolerance shall be allowed. All rocking, rolling and sliding
surfaces shall have a machine smooth finish to 20 micron maximum
mean deviation as per IS: 3073.
Casting
General
(ii) Roller and rocker bearing shall be placed so that their axles of
rotations are horizontal and normal to the direction of
movement of the members they support. Upper and lower
bearing plates shall be set horizontal in both directions.
Placing
(iii) It shall be ensured that while placing the girders, the bearing
are in their exact positions as indicated on the approved
Drawing and not displaced therefrom.
(vi) After placing and finishing the mortar the bearing shall be
checked for position and shims or other temporary supports
removed and the mortar made good. If the bearing has moved,
bearing or the plate shall be lifted, the mortar removed and the
whole procedure repeated.
(vii) Exposed faces of the mortar shall be cured under damp Hessian
for 7 days.
(viii) Placing of the bearing and mortar shall only be carried out in
the presence of the Engineer.
All bearing with sliding surfaces shall be cleaned and lightly lubricated
with an approved lubricant immediately before erection.
The raw elastomeric content of the compound shall not be lower than
60 per cent by its weight. The ash content shall not exceed 5 per cent.
(as per tests conducted in accordance with ASTM D-297, sub-section
10).
EPDM and other similar candidate elastomers for bridges bearing use
shall not be permitted.
Properties
Shear moulds of the elastomer bearing shall neither be less than 0.80
N/sq.mm nor greater than 1.20 N/sq.mm.
Note: For use of elastomer in extreme clod climates, the Engineer may
specific special grade of low temperature resistant elastomer in
conformity with operating ambient temperature resistant elastomer in
conformity with operating ambient temperature conditions. The
specifications of such special grade elastomer including the tests for
low temperature resistance shall be mutually agreed to by the Engineer
and the Contractor and are outside the purview of these specifications.
Laminates of mild steel conforming to IS: 2062 shall only be permitted
to be used. Use of any other material like fiberglass or similar fabric,
as laminates shall not be permitted.
The Engineer shall invariably get the test (a) performed in his presence
or in the presence of his authorized representative to satisfy the
requirement. In case of any disputes regarding interpretation of results,
the Engineer may carry out test as per ASTM S-3452-78
(Chromatography test) at the manufacturer’s cost in a recognized
laboratory.
The elastomer specimen to conduct the test shall be obtained from the
bearings selected at random for destructive test. Remaining part of the
test bearing shall be preserved by the Engineer for any test to be done
in future if required.
(b) Fabrication
The mould used shall have standard surface finish adequate to produce
bearing free from any surface blemishes.
Steel plates for laminates shall be sand blasted, clean of all mill scales
and shall be free from all contaminants prior to bonding by
vulcanization. Rusted plates with pitting shall not be used. All edges
of plates shall be rounded.
Name of manufacturer
Date of manufacturer
Elastomer grade used
Bearing dimensions
Production batch no.
Acceptance lot no.
Date of testing
Explanation of marking used on the bearing
(iii) The face plate with the required thickness of pack plate shall be
loosely fitted to the anchors embedded in the projection below
the superstructure, with elastomer washers and anchor screws.
(v) The required clearance between the stainless steel face of the
elastomeric bearing and that of the vertical face plate installed
on the projection below the soffit shall be checked. After
adjustment of the required working clearance the small gap
between the vertical face of the projection below the soffit and
the back of the face (plate with pack plates, if any) shall be
grouted with epoxy grout.
(5) Special Bearings
(A) Special bearing shall be those type of bearings which shall be also
designed for other than usual loads and functions.
(B) Materials
(i) Cast Steel, Mild Steel, Stainless Steel shall conform to Sub-
clause 1902 3 (a)
Bottom Plate
Saddle Plate
The top plate shall have stainless steel plate welded to its
bottom which shall be slide over PTEF. The assembly shall be
connected to the superstructure by tight fitted anchor bolts.
Translatory movements along longitudinal axis of bridge shall
be accommodated at the PTFE/Stainless steel-sliding surface.
The material of top plate shall be cast steel.
Guide Plate
(a) General
(b) Fabrication
(i) The surface matting with the PTFE in the sliding pair
shall be corrosion resistant stainless steel. The
stainless steel shall overlap the PTFE after full
movement on all sides. If stainless steel sheet is used,
it shall be bonded by continuous welding along the
edges. The surface shall be prepared by thorough
clearing to remove grease, dust or any other foreign
substance.
(iii) The thickness of the PTFE shall not be less than 4.5
mm with projection above the recess not exceeding
2.0 mm. When the piston is subjected to tilting, the
seal shall slide along the wall and alter its shape
according to the angle of tilt. At the same time it
shall be sufficiently rigid to bridge the gap between
the piston and the wall of the pot. However, the
percentage of plan area of the lubrication activities to
the gross area shall not exceed 25 percent. The depth
of the cavity shall not exceed 2.0 mm.
(iv) The diameter to thickness ratio of the confined
elastomer shall not exceed 15. The surface of the
confined elastomer shall be smooth.
(c) Materials
(i) Steel
(ii) PTFE
(iii) Elastomer
50+5
15.5
(d) Workmanship
(i) Welding
(e) Tolerance
Machined : -0 to + 1mm
Unmachined : Class 2 of IS:4897
(f) Painting
(g) Test
(i) General
(6) Measurement
(7) Payment
The bearing shall be paid at the contract unit rate which shall be the full and
the final compensation to the Contractor as per Clause 112 and for all costs
required to complete the work as per these Specifications.
SECTION 2000 – CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
Page No.
2001 SCOPE 20-1
2002 DEFINITIONS 20-1
2003 MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE 20-1
2004 THE DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIXES 20-7
2005 MIXING CONCRETE 20-13
2006 TRANSPORTATION OF CONCRETE 20-14
2007 PLACING OF CONCRETE 20-14
2008 COMPACTION OF CONCRETE 20-17
2009 CURING OF CONCRETE 20-18
2010 PROTECTION OF FRESH CONCRETE 20-19
2011 CONCRETING IN HOT WEATHER 20-19
2012 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 20-20
2013 RECORDS OF CONCRETE PLACING 20-20
2014 REINFORCEMENT 20-21
2015 CONCRETE FOR SECONDARY 20-23
2016 EARLY LOADING 20-24
2017 MEASUREMENT 20-24
2018 PAYMENT 20-25
SECTION 2000 – CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
2001. SCOPE
This Section covers the materials, design of mixes, transport, placing, compaction
and curing of concrete and mortar required in the works. It also covers
reinforcement for concrete.
2002. DEFINITIONS
A pour refers to the operation of placing concrete into any mould, bay or
formwork, etc. and also to the volume which has to be filled. Pours in vertical
succession are referred to as lifts.
(1) General
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details of all materials
which he purposes to use for making concrete. No concrete shall be placed
in the works until the Engineer has approved the materials of which it is
composed. In accordance with Clause 603, approved materials shall not
thereafter be altered or substituted by other materials without the consent of
the Engineer.
(2) Cement
Cement shall be free flowing and free of lumps. It shall be supplied in the
manufacturer’s sealed unbroken bags or in bulk. Bagged cement shall be
transported in vehicles provided with effective means of ensuring that it is
protected from the weather.
Cement form broken bags shall not be used in the works. Cement in bags
shall be used in the order in which it is delivered.
Bulk cement shall be stored in weather proof silos which shall bear a clear
indication of the type of cement contained in them. Different types of
cement shall not be mixed in the same silo.
Cement which has become hardened or lumpy or fails to comply with the
Specification in any way shall be removed from the Site.
All cement for any one structure shall be from the same source as far as
possible.
All cement used in the works shall be tested by the manufacturer. The
manufacturer shall provide the results of tests as given in Table 20.1 and
20.2 for each supply and for the last six months of his production. The
Contractor shall supply two copies of each certificate to the Engineer.
Minimum Average
Compressive Strength of three
mortar cubes, (N/mm2)
3 days 16,27*
7 days 22,37*
28 days 33,53*
Each set of tests carried out by the manufacturer on samples taken from
cement which is subsequently to site shall relate to no more than one day’s
output of each cement plant.
The Contractor shall constitute each type of cement and not less than one
samples for every 200 tonnes or part of it, representative samples to be
tested when instructed by the Engineer in a laboratory acceptable to him, in
case of the concrete mixes do not comply with the requirements of this
Specification.
Cement which is stored on site for longer than one month shall be tested in
such laboratory for every 200 tonnes or part thereof and at monthly intervals
thereafter.
The Contractor shall keep full records of all data relevant to the manufacture,
delivery, testing and the cement used in the works and shall provide the
Engineer with two copies thereof.
Fine aggregate shall be clean hard and durable and shall be natural sand,
crushed gravel sand or crushed rock sand complying with IS 383. All the
material shall pass through a 4.75 mm IS sieve and the grading shall be in
accordance with IS 383. In order to achieve an acceptable grading, it may
be necessary to blend materials from more than one source.
The deviation from the initial fineness modulus shall be no more than ±
0.30 for ordinary concrete and ± 0.20 for high quality concrete.
Coarse aggregate shall be clean hard and durable crushed rock, crushed
gravel or natural gravel corresponding to the following classes:
Coarse aggregate shall be supplied in the nominal size called for in the
contract and shall be of the grading as single sized aggregate or graded
aggregate of nominal size 40 mm, 20 mm, 12.5 mm and 10 mm in
accordance with IS 383.
If the Flakiness Index of the coarse aggregate varies by more than five units
from the average value of the aggregate used in the approved trial mix, then
a new set of trial mixes shall be carried out if the workability of the mixes
has been adversely affected by such variation.
Water Absorption: the aggregate shall not have a water absorption of more
than 2 per cent when tested as set out in IS 2386 Part 3.
Los Angeles Abrasion (LAA): The aggregate shall have LAA not more than
45% for ordinary concrete, and not more than 35% for high quality concrete,
when tested in accordance with IS 2386 Part 4.
Aggregate Crushing Value (ACV): The aggregate shall have ACV not more
than 30% for pavement structure and not more than 45% for other structure
when tested in accordance with IS 2486 Part 4.
All the materials shall be accepted if the results of not less than three
consecutive sets of test executed in accordance with IS 2386 (Part 1-8)
show compliance with the Sub-clause 2003 (3) and (4).
In addition to the above routine tests, the Contractor shall carry out the
following tests at the stated frequencies.
The storage of aggregate shall be arranged in such a way that drying out in
hot weather is prevented in order to avoid fluctuations in water content.
Storage of fine aggregates shall be arranged in such way that they can drain
sufficiently before use in order to prevent fluctuations in water content of
the concrete.
Water shall be clean and free from harmful matter and shall comply with the
requirements of IS 456.
Brackish water containing more than 1000 ppm chloride ion 2000 ppm
sulphate ion shall not be used for mixing or curing concrete.
The Contractor shall carry out tests in compliance with IS 456 to establish
compliance with Specifications.
(8) Admixture
(a) General
In all cases the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details of
the admixture he proposes to use and the manner in which he proposes
to add it in the mix. The information provided shall include:
(i) The typical dosage, the method of dosing, and the detrimental
effects of an excess or deficiency in the dosage.
(iv) Whether the admixture leads to the entrainment of air when used at
the manufacturer’s recommended dosage, and if so the extent to
which it does so.
The chloride ion content of any admixture shall not exceed 1 per cent
by weight of the admixture nor 0.02 per cent by weight of the cement
in the mix.
Workability agents shall comply with BS 5075 and shall not have any
adverse effect on the properties of the concrete.
Consistence of the mix, assessed through the Slump Test where the slump is
measured in millimeters, is designate as follows:
Classes of Consi Type of uses Characteristic Maxim Trial Early works test cubes
concrete st- Strength fck um mixes Any one Average of
ence (N/mm2) Nomina Minimal result 3
l Size Target (aver. of consecutive
of Strength 3 cubes) results
Aggreg fck=1.1fck (N/mm2) (N/mm2)
ate mm (N/mm2)
M 10/75 S Ordinary 10 75 11 10 14
M 10/40 S Ordinary 10 40 11 10 14
M 15/20 S Ordinary 15 20 16.5 15 19
M 15/40 S Ordinary 15 40 16.5 15 19
M 20/20 S Ordinary 20 20 22 20 24
M 20/40 S Ordinary 20 40 22 20 24
M 25/20 S Ordinary 25 20 27.5 25 29
M 25/40 S Ordinary 25 40 27.5 25 29
M 30/40 S High Quality 30 40 33 30 34
M 30/20 P High Quality 30 20 33 30 34
M 30/12 P High Quality 30 12 33 30 34
M 35/40 P High Quality 35 40 38.5 35 39
M 35/20 P High Quality 35 20 38.5 35 39
M 40/20 P High Quality 40 20 44 40 44
M 45/20 P High Quality 45 20 49.5 45 49
M 50/20 P High Quality 50 20 55 50 54
SM 30/40 VP Underwater 30 40 33 30 34
SM 30/20 VP Underwater 30 20 33 30 34
SM 30/20 F Bored Piles 30 20 33 30 34
SM 40/20 S Precast Piles 40 20 44 40 44
SM 45/20 S Post-tensioned 45 20 49.5 45 49
Girders
The contractor shall design all the concrete mixes called for in the Drawing
using the ingredients which have been approved by the Engineer in
accordance with Clause 2003 and in compliance with the following
requirements:
(a) The aggregate portion shall be well graded from the nominal
maximum size of stone down to the 150 micron size.
(b) The cement content shall be such to achieve the strength called for in
Table 20.3 but in any case not less than the minimum necessary as
shown in Table 20.4.
(c) The workability shall be consistent with ease of placing and proper
compaction having regard to the presence of reinforcement and other
obstructions.
(d) The water/cement ratio shall be the minimum consistent with adequate
workability but in any case not greater than 0.5 for classes of concrete
from M20 to M50 taking due account of any water contained in the
aggregates. The Contractor shall take into account that this
requirement may in certain cases require the inclusion of a workability
agent in the mix.
Note: The minimum cement contents shown in the above table are required
in order to achieve impermeability and durability. In order to meet
the strength requirements in the Specification higher contents may be
required.
The categories applicable to the works are based on the factors listed
hereunder:
For each mix of concrete for which the Contractor has proposed a design, he
shall prepare the number of concrete batches specified hereunder:
Samples shall be taken from each batch and the following action taken, all
in accordance with BS 1881:
(a) The slump of the concrete shall be determined
(b) Six tests cubes shall be cast from each batch. In the case of concrete
having a maximum aggregate size of 20 mm, 150 mm cubes shall be
used. In the case of concrete containing lager aggregate, 200 mm
cubes shall be used and in addition any pieces of aggregate retained on
a 50 mm IS sieve shall be removed form the mixed concrete before
casting the cubes.
(c) The density of all the cubes shall be determined before the strength
tests are carried out.
(e) Three cubes from each batch shall be tested for compressive strength
at seven days and the remaining three at 28 days.
M 15/20
A “result” being the average strength of the three cubes from one batch, the
average of the three results form tests at 28 days for the nominal
composition shall not be less than the Minimal Target Strength shown in
Table 20.3.
One result from the modified compositions shall not be less than the
nominal strength as shown on Table 20.3.
Samples shall be taken from each batch and the action taken similar to the
above Sub-clause 2004 (3) (a) to (e).
The average of the three results of tests at 28 days shall not be less than the
Minimal Target Strength shown in Table 20.3.
The Contractor shall also carry out tests to determine the drying shrinkage
of the concrete unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Based on the results of the tests on the Laboratory trial and site trial mixes,
the Contractor shall submit full details of his proposals for mix design to the
Engineer, including the type and source of each ingredient, and the results of
the tests on the trial mixes.
If the Engineer does not agree to a proposed concrete mix for any reason,
the Contractor shall amend his proposals and carry out further trial mixes.
No mix shall be used in the works without the written consent of the
Engineer.
(a) Sampling
For each class of concrete in production at each plant for use in the
works, samples of concrete shall be taken at the point of mixing or of
deposition as instructed by the Engineer, all in accordance with the
sampling procedures described in BS 1881 and with the further
requirements set out below.
(b) Testing
(i) The slump of the concrete shall be determined for each batch from
which samples are taken and in addition for other batches at the
point of production and deposition or at the frequency instructed
by the Engineer.
The slump of concrete in any batch shall not differ from the value
established by the trial mixes by more than 25 mm or one third of
the value whichever is the less.
(ii) The air content of air entrained concrete in any batch shall be
within 1.5 times of the required value and the average value of four
consecutive measurements shall be within the required value
expressed as a percentage of the volume of freshly mixed concrete.
(iii) Early Works: Until such times as sufficient test results are
available to apply the method of control described in (iv) below,
the compressive strength of the concrete at 28 days shall be such
that no result (average of 3 cubes) is less than the characteristic
strength fck as shown in Table 20.3 under the heading “early works
test cubes” and also that the average of three consecutive results in
not less than fck +4 as shown in Table 20.3 under the same heading.
The 7-day cube result may be used as an early strength indicator, at
the discretion of the Engineer.
Before any batching, mixing transporting, placing, compacting and finishing and
curing the concrete ordered or delivered to site, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer full details including Drawing of all the plant which he propose to use
and the arrangements he propose to make.
Concrete for the works shall be batched and mixed in one or more plants or
concrete mixer unless the Engineer agrees to some other arrangement. If concrete
mixers are used, there shall be sufficient number of mixtures including stand by
mixers.
Batching and mixing plants shall be complying with the requirements of IS 1791
and capable of producing a uniform distribution of the ingredients throughout the
mass. Truck mixers shall comply with the requirements of IS 4925 and shall only
be used with the prior approval of the Engineer. If the plant proposed by the
Contractor does not fall within the scope of IS 1791 it shall have been tested in
accordance with IS 4634 and shall have a mixing performance within the limits of
IS 1791.
The aggregate storage bins shall be provided with drainage facilities arranged so
that the drainage water is not discharged to the weigh hoppers. Each bin shall be
drawn at least once per week and any accumulations of mud or silt shall be
removed.
If bulk cement is used, the scale and weight hopper for cement shall be distinct
from the scale and weight hopper for aggregates.
The weights of cement and each size of aggregate and the weight or volume of
water as indicated by the mechanism employed shall be within a tolerance of plus
or minus three per cent of the respective weight per batch agreed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide standard test weights at least equivalent to the
maximum working load used on the most heavily loaded scale and other auxiliary
equipment required for checking the satisfactory operation of each scale or
measuring device. Tests shall be made by the Contractor in the presence of the
Engineer but not less than once per three months. The Contractor shall furnish
the Engineer with copies of the complete results of all check tests and shall make
any adjustments, repairs or replacements necessary to ensure satisfactory
performance.
The nominal drum or pan capacity of the mixer shall not be exceeded. The
turning speed and the mixing time shall be as recommended by the manufacturer,
but in addition, when water is the last ingredient to be added, mixing shall
continue for at least one minute after all the water has been added to the drum or
the pan.
The blades of pan mixers shall be maintained within the tolerances specified by
the manufacturer of the mixer and the blades shall be replaced when it is no
longer possible to maintain the tolerances by adjustment.
The water to be added to the mix shall be reduced by the amount of free water
contained in the coarse and fine aggregates. This amount shall be determined by
the Contractor by a method agreed by the Engineer immediately before mixing
begins each day and thereafter at least once per hour and for each delivery of
aggregates during concreting. When the correct quantity of water, determined as
set out in the Specification, has been added to the mix, no further water shall be
added, either during mixing or subsequently.
Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly
cleaned before any fresh concrete is mixed. Mixers shall be cleaned out before
changing to another type of cement.
The concrete shall be discharged from the mixer and transported to the works by
means which shall prevent adulteration, segregation or loss of ingredients, and
shall ensure that the concrete is of the required workability at the point and time
of placing. The loss of slump between discharge from the mixer and placing shall
be within the tolerances specified in Sub-clause 2004 (5) (b) (i).
The capacity of the means of transport shall not be less than the full volume of a
batch.
The time elapsing between mixing transporting placing and compacting altogether
of a batch of concrete shall not be longer than the initial setting time of the
concrete. If the placing of any batch of concrete is delayed beyond this period,
the concrete shall not be placed in the works.
Concrete shall not be placed until the Engineer’s consent has been given in
writing. The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least two full working
day notice of his intention to place concrete.
Any flow of water into an excavation shall be diverted through proper side
drains to a sump or be removed by other suitable which will prevent
washing away the freshly deposited concrete or any of its constituents. Any
under drain constructed for this purpose shall be completely grouted up
when they are no longer required by a method agreed by the Engineer.
If any fissures have been cleaned out they shall be filled with mortar or with
concrete as instructed by the Engineer.
The amount of mortar placed at one time shall be limited so that it does not
dry out or set before being covered with concrete.
When placing on a nearly horizontal surface, placing shall start at the lower
end of the surface to avoid decompaction of concrete.
Layers shall not be placed so that they form feather edges nor shall they be
placed on a previous layer which has taken its initial set. In order to comply
with this requirement, another layer may be started before initial set of the
preceding layer.
All work shall be completed on each batch of concrete before its initial set
commences and thereafter the concrete shall not be disturbed before it has
set hard. No concrete that has partially hardened during transit shall be used
in the works and the transport of concrete from the mixer to the point of
placing shall be such that this requirement can be complied with.
In dry weather, covers shall be provided for all fresh concrete surfaces
which are not being worked on. Water shall not be added to concrete for
any reason.
When concrete is discharged from the place above its final deposition,
segregation shall be prevented by the use of chutes, down pipes, trunking,
baffles or other appropriate devices.
Forms for walls shall be provided with openings or other devices that will
permit the concrete to be placed in a manner that will prevent segregation
and accumulations of hardened concrete on the formwork or reinforcement
above the level of the placed concrete.
If the level of concrete in a tremie pipe is allowed to fall to such extent that
the water enters the pipe, the latter shall be removed from the pour and filled
with concrete before being again lowered into the placing position. During
and after concreting under water, pumping or dewatering in the immediate
vicinity shall be suspended if there is any danger that such work will disturb
the freshly placed concrete.
If the concrete placing is interrupted for any reason and the duration of the
interruption cannot be forecast or is likely to be prolonged, the Contractor
shall immediately take the necessary action to form a construction joint so
as to eliminate as far as possible feather edges and sloping top surfaces and
shall thoroughly compact the concrete in accordance with Clause 2008. All
work on the concrete shall be completed before elapse of initial setting time
and it shall not thereafter be disturbed until it is hard enough to resist
damage. Plant and materials to comply with this requirement shall be
readily available at all time during concrete placing.
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, pours shall not be more than two
meters high and shall as far as possible have a uniform thickness over the
plan area of the pour. Concrete shall be placed to the full planned height of
all pours except in the circumstances described in Sub-clause 2007 (4).
The Contractor shall plan the dimensions and sequence of pours in such a
way that cracking of the concrete does not take place due to thermal or
shrinkage stresses.
The Contractor shall arrange that the intervals between successive lifts of
concrete in one Section of the works are of equal duration. This duration
shall not be less than three days or not more than seven days under
temperate weather conditions unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
Concrete shall be fully compacted throughout the full extent of the placed layer.
It shall thoroughly worked against the formwork and around any reinforcement
and other embedded item, without displacing them. Care shall be taken at arrises
or other confined spaces. Successive layers of the same pour shall be thoroughly
worked together.
Vibration shall be continued at each until the concrete ceases to contract, air
bubbles have ceased to appear, and a thin layer of mortar has appeared on the
surface. Vibrators shall not be used to move concrete laterally and shall be
withdrawn slowly to prevent the formation of voids.
The vibrators shall be inserted vertically into the concrete to penetrate the layer
underneath at regular spacing which shall not exceed the distance from the
vibrator over which vibration is visibly effective and some extent of vibration is
overlapped.
Vibration shall not be applied by way of reinforcement nor shall the vibrator be
allowed to touch reinforcement, sheathing ducts or other embedded items.
(1) General
Concrete shall be protected during the first stage of hardening from loss of
moisture and from the development of temperatures differentials within the
concrete sufficient to cause cracking. The methods used for curing shall not
cause damage of any kind to the concrete.
The curing process shall commence as soon as the concrete is hard enough
to resist damage from the process. In the case of large areas or continuous
pours, it shall commence on the completed Section of the pour before the
rest of the pour is finished.
Water used for curing shall be of the same quality as that used for mixing.
Formed surfaces may be cured by retaining the formwork in place for the
required curing period.
(b) use of low heat cement for mass concreting, subject to the agreement
of the Engineer;
(c) leaving formwork in place during the curing period. Steel forms shall
be suitably insulated on the outside;
Freshly placed concrete shall be protected from rainfall and from water running
over the surface until it is sufficiently hard to resist damage from these causes.
Concrete placed in the works shall not be subjected to any loading including
traffic until it has attained at least its characteristic strength as defined in Clause
2004.
(1) General
In the event that conditions becomes such that even with the use of
equipment the requirements cannot be met, concrete placing shall
immediately cease until such time as the requirements can again be met.
During hot weather the Contractor shall take all measures necessary to
ensure that the temperature of concrete at the time of placing in the works
does not exceed 30oC and that the concrete does not lose any moisture
during transporting and placing.
Such measures may include but are not necessarily limited to the following:
After concrete has been placed, the selected curing process shall be
commenced as soon as possible. If any interval occurs between completion
of placing and start of curing, the concrete shall be closely covered during
the interval with polythene sheet to prevent loss of moisture.
2012. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Where construction joints are shown in the Drawing, the Contractor shall form
such joints in such positions. The locations of joints which the Contractor
requires to make for the purpose of construction shall be subject to the approval of
the Engineer. Construction joints shall be in vertical or horizontal planes except
in sloping slabs where they shall be normal to the exposed surface or elsewhere
where the Drawing require a different arrangement.
Feather edges of concrete at joints shall be avoided. Any feather edges which
may have formed where reinforcing bars project through a joint shall be cut back
until sound concrete has been reached.
The intersections of horizontal and near horizontal joints and exposed faces of
concrete shall appear as straight lines produced by use of a guide strip fixed to the
formwork at the top of the concrete lift, or by other means acceptable to the
Engineer.
Construction joints formed as free surfaces shall not exceed a slope of 20 per cent
from the horizontal.
The surface of the fresh concrete in horizontal or near horizontal joints shall be
thoroughly cleaned and roughened by means of high pressure water, and air jets
or wire brush, when the concrete is hard enough to withstand the treatment
without the leaching of cement. The surface of vertical or near vertical joints
shall be similarly treated if circumstances permit the removal of formwork at a
suitable time.
Where concrete has become too hard for the above treatment to be successful, the
surface whether formed or free shall be thoroughly scabbled by mechanical means,
manually or wet sand blasted and then washed with clean water. The indentations
produced by scabbling shall not be less than 10 mm deep and shall be away from
the finished face by 40 mm.
Records of the details of every pour of concrete placed in the works shall be kept
by the Contractor in a form agreed by the Engineer. These records shall include
class of concrete, location of pour, date and duration of pour, ambient temperature
and concrete temperature at time of placing and all relevant meteorological
information such as rain, wind etc., moisture contents of the aggregates, details of
mixes batch numbers, cement batch number, results of all tests undertaken, part of
the structure and place where test cube samples are taken from.
The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer four copies of these records each
week covering work carried out the preceding week. In addition he shall supply
to the Engineer monthly histograms of all 28 day cubes strength results together
with cumulative and monthly standard deviations, Coefficient of Variation, and
any other information which the Engineer may require concerning the concrete
placed in the works.
2014. REINFORCEMENT
(1) General
Reinforcement as plain bars ad deformed bars and steel fabric shall comply
with the following Indian Standards.
The sampling and frequency of testing shall be as set out in the NS 84-2042
and NS 191-2045.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawing, bending and cutting shall comply
with IS 2052.
The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the accuracy of any bar bending
schedules supplied and shall be responsible for cutting, bending, and fixing
the reinforcement in accordance with the Drawing.
Bars shall be bent mechanically using appropriate bar benders. Bars shall be
bent cold by the application of slow steady pressure. At temperature below
5oC the rate of bending shall be reduced if necessary to prevent facture in
the steel. Bending reinforcement inside the forms shall not be permitted
except for mild steel bars of diameter less or equal to 12 mm, when it is
absolutely necessary.
Reinforcement shall be thoroughly cleaned. All dirt, scale, loose rust, oil
and other contaminants shall be removed before placing it in position. If the
reinforcement is contaminated with concrete form previous operation, it
shall be cleaned before concreting in that Section.
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, all intersecting bars shall be either
tied together with not less than 1.6 mm diameter soft annealed iron wire and
the end of the wire turned into the body of the concrete, or shall be secured
with a wire clip of a type agreed by the Engineer.
Spacer blocks shall be used for ensuring that the correct cover is maintained
on the reinforcement. Blocks shall be as small as practicable and of a shape
agreed by the Engineer. They shall be made of mortar mixed in the
proportions of one part of cement to two parts of sand by weight. Wires cast
into the block for tying in to the reinforcement shall have not less than 1.6
mm diameter and shall be soft annealed iron.
The Contractor shall ensure that reinforcement left exposed in the works
shall not suffer distortion, displacement or other damage. When it is
necessary to bend protruding reinforcement aside temporarily, the radius of
the bend shall not be less than four times the bar diameter for mild steel bars
of six times the bar diameter for high yield bars. Such bends shall be
carefully straightened without leaving residual kinks or damaging the
concrete round them before concrete placing. In no circumstances heating
and bending of high yield bars shall be permitted.
Bars complying with IS 1786 or other high tensile bars shall not be bent
after placing in the works.
Non-structural concrete (NS concrete) shall be used only for non structural
purposes where shown on the Drawing.
No fines concrete (NF concrete) is intended for use where a porous concrete
is required and shall only be used where shown on the Drawing or instructed
by the Engineer.
The mix shall consist of Ordinary Portland cement and aggregate complying
with this Specification. The aggregate size shall be 40 mm to 10 mm only.
The weight of cement mixed with 0.3 cubic metres of aggregate shall not be
less than 50 kg. The quantity of water shall not exceed that required to
produce a smooth cement paste which will coat evenly the whole of the
aggregate.
Concrete for structural purposes shall not be mixed by hand. Where non
structural concrete is required, hand mixing may be carried out subject to
approval of the Engineer.
For making hand mixed concrete, cement sand and aggregate shall be
batched separately by volume or by weight as applicable. Then cement and
sand shall be mixed dry to uniform colour. The aggregate shall be stacked
in a proper shape upon which cement sand mix shall be spread and whole
mix shall be turned up and down to have uniform mix of all ingredients.
Then water shall be added as specified in Sub-clause 2015 (1) and shall be
mixed to uniform consistency.
No load shall be applied to any part of a structure until the specified curing period
has expired, and thereafter loading shall be allowed after approval by the
Engineer. The Engineer’s decision shall be based on the type of load to be
applied, the age of concrete, the magnitude of stress induced and the propping of
the structure.
No structure shall be opened to traffic until test cubes have attained the specified
minimum 28 days strength as defined in Clause 2004.
2017. MEASUREMNT
(1) Concrete
(a) bolt holes, pockets, box outs an cast in components provided that the
volume of each is less than 0.15 cubic metres;
(b) mortar beds, fillets, drips, rebates, recesses, grooves, chamfers and the
like of 100 mm total width or less;
(c) reinforcement
(4) Reinforcement
Rolling margin or cutting waste shall not be measured. Length along centre
line of the individual reinforcement of each type placed as described above
shall be measured including their hooks, and bents, if any. An average
weight of at least 5 samples each one metre length shall be determined by
the laboratory approved by the Engineer. The weight of each type of the
reinforcement shall be determined by multiplying average weight of the
respective reinforcement by its length.
2018. PAYMENT
(1) Concrete
Every class of concrete shall be paid as per respective contract unit rate. In
addition to those specified in Clause 112 the respective rate shall also
include the cost of:
(c) laying to sloping surfaces not exceeding 15o from the horizontal and
to falls.
(f) complying with the requirements of Clauses 2001 to 2013, 1806 and
1807.
(2) Admixtures, Workability and Hardening Agent
Payment shall be made at contract unit rate which shall be the full and the
final compensation to the Contractor as per Clause 112 and for all specified
in the contract.
(3) Reinforcement
The fabric reinforcement shall be paid at contract unit rate which shall be
also inclusive of compensation for wastage and laps.
If accepted as substandard work the payment for such work shall be made at
the contract unit rate reduced by the formula given below
The reduced contract unit rates of substandard concrete and other items
contained shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor.
SECTION 2100 – CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
Page No.
2101 SCOPE 21-1
2102 GENERAL 21-1
2103 CEMENT AND CONCRETE CLASSES FOR PRESTRESSED
CONCRETE STRUCTURES 21-1
2104 TENDON SHEATHS 21-1
2105 ANCHORAGES 21-2
2106 PRESTRESSING TENDONS 21-2
2107 INSTALLATION OF PRESTRESSING TENDONS 21-3
2108 JACKS FOR PRESTRESSING 21-3
2109 TENSIONING OPERATIONS 21-4
2110 BONDING AND GROUTING 21-5
2111 REJECTION OF PRESTRESSED WORK 21-7
2112 TESTING PRESSTRESSED WORK 21-7
2113 MEASUREMENT 21-7
2114 PAYMENT 21-7
SECTION 2100 – CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
2101. SCOPE
This section covers the materials, equipment and methods required for carrying
out prestressing operations on in-situ concrete. This Section also covers the
classes of concrete appropriate to prestressed concrete. The production of in-situ
concrete is covered by Section 2000.
2102. GENERAL
Prestressed concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with IRC 18, 1985
and BSCP 110, ‘The Structural Use of Concrete, Part 1, Materials and
Workmanship’, except that where the requirement of the Codes differ from this
Specification, this Specification shall take precedence.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer full details of the plant he proposes to
use for the installation of prestressing tendons, the materials he proposes to use
and the arrangements he proposes to make. He shall also submit evidence of his
competence to undertake the installation.
Concrete classes for prestressed concrete shall be not less than M45/20 high
quality concrete and shall comply with Section 2000.
Tendon sheaths shall conform the recommendation of IRC Code 18. Tendon
sheaths shall be tested at the manufacture in accordance with Appendix 1 of IRC
code and 18 and the Contractor shall provide test certificates in accordance with
Clause 605.
The stools, saddles or supports for the ducts shall be of rigid construction and of
such from that they remain securely in position and maintain the correct profile of
the cables without strain on the sheath until the concrete placed round them has
hardened. The supports shall be not more than one metre apart.
Vents shall be incorporated into each duct at high and low points, at each end and
at intermediate points not more than five metres apart or in accordance with the
Drawing. Blocking of vents during concreting operations shall be prevented.
2105. ANCHORAGES
Anchorages shall be the correct type for the prestressing system and must have
been used in similar other works. The procured anchorages shall conform to BS
4447. They shall be rigidly fixed true to alignment in the formwork so that they
cannot move during concreting operations. The anchorages shall be provided
with means for rejecting grout into the ducts.
If the anchorage is fixed after the main body of the concrete has been placed, it
shall be carefully bedded so that it is bearing evenly and is in intimate contact
with the concrete.
Tendons and wires used in prestressed concrete shall comply with the standards
indicated on the Drawing. The Standards include the following:
All wires, bars and/or strands shall be assigned the lot number and shall have
suitable tags for their identification. All samples shall be truly representative of
the lot to be furnished and in the case of wire or strand. The Contractor shall
furnish samples of at least 5 m length selected form each lot for testing.
Tendons shall be stored on site under cover and protected from the weather. The
storage area shall have a hard impermeable floor. Tendons shall be stored either
straight or in the coils in which they left the factory.
Tendons shall not be allowed to become affected by excessive rusting or by
pitting of the surface by corrosion. If pitting is present the Contractor shall
replace the affected tendons by new ones. Tendons shall be supplied in coils of
sufficiently large diameter such that tendons shall retain their physical properties
and shall be straight as it unwinds from the coil.
Fabrication shall be carried out clear of the ground and under cover, or
where this is impractical, and agreed by the Engineer, in the open with
suitable precautions.
The fabrication procedures shall not cause any mechanical damage to the
tendons. Any tendon material found to be bent or kinked at fabrication shall
be rejected unless tests are made to the satisfaction of the Engineer which
show that the damage is not detrimental.
Where required for the particular system, the ends of the tendon shall be
prepared at fabrication for subsequent stressing and anchoring.
The prestressing steel (or where the tendons are accommodated in ducts, the
sheaths, ducting or formers) shall be accurately placed in the position shown
on the Drawing and shall be firmly secured in position. They shall not
deviate from the positions shown on the Drawing by more than 5 mm in all
directions.
Wooden supports shall not be used nor shall the sheaths, ducting or formers
be placed on previous layers of fresh concrete or be adjusted during the
placing of concrete.
The Contractor shall maintain tensioning jacks in good working order and shall
ensure true and accurate readings by regular testing, calibration and servicing.
(1) General
Stressing of the tendons shall be carried out with due care by experienced
workmen under competent supervision approved by the Engineer. Adequate
steps shall be taken to safeguard against injury. Special precautions shall be
taken when working with and near tendons which have been tensioned or
are in the process being tensioned.
The Contractor shall ensure that he has been supplied all required
instructions by the Engineer and that he has the necessary information to
carry out the works. The instructions controlling the stressing operations are
based on the design of the structure and may be modified by the Engineer as
a result of the information obtained from site tensioning records.
Full and accurate records shall be kept of all stressing operations and two
copies of the records, which shall include welding-device slip measurements
during anchoring, loads and extensions, shall be submitted to the Engineer
on the day following each stressing operation. The accuracy of the
measurement of cable extensions, shall be plus or minus two per cent (±2).
The Engineer may order the Contractor to cease any or all stressing
operations where proper records are not being kept or where the operations
are not being properly or safely carried out. The Contractor shall take
immediate steps to ensure that the work is carried out to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
Where the required tensions or extensions are not obtained the tendons shall
be re-tensioned as directed by the Engineer. If on re-stressing, the
extensions are not achieved, the Engineer may at his discretion reject the
tendons involved.
(2) Post-tensioning
After stressing and anchoring, no tendon shall be cut, bent or in any way
deformed until the Engineer has given his final approval.
Where tendons are cut back, the exposed ends of the tendons and
anchorages shall be heavily coated with an approved bituminous compound
or epoxy resin to prevent corrosion of the prestressing steel.
The properties of grout, the equipment and the grouting procedure shall be as
follows:
(1) Grout Type
The grout shall be a colloidal mix of water and ordinary Portland Cement
with a water/Cement ratio of between 0.40 and 0.45 by weight.
A admixtures of an approved type may be authorized by the Engineer for
incorporation in the grout if tests have shown that their use improves the
properties of the grout, for examples by increasing the workability, by
reducing bleeding, or expanding grout.
A positive displacement pump shall be used for injecting the grout, capable
of developing a pressure of at least 1 N/mm2. The pump shall be fitted with
a pressure gauge and an effective control against build-up of excessive
pressure. The pump suction intake shall be kept below the surface level of
the grout at all times during grouting operations.
All tendons shall be grouted in their ducts as soon as practicable after the
stressing operation. Each duct shall be cleaned by blowing through
compressed air, flushing with clean water and surplus water shall be
removed by compressed air or other approved means. Openings at the
anchorages other than grout injection nozzle openings shall be plugged with
mortar or other suitable material. Subsequent to the hardening of the
plugging material the nozzle of the injection pipe shall be firmly connected
to the duct in such a way that air cannot be sucked in. Injection shall be
commenced from one end only and its progress monitored by the
appearance of grout at successive vent holes. When the consistency of the
grout emerging from a vent is equal to that of the grout being injected, that
vent shall be plugged.
Grouting shall not be carried out when the air temperature is 2o C or lower
The grout shall be tested in accordance with the Standards and Codes and its
fluidity, bleeding, setting and compressive strength shall comply with the
following requirements:
The compressive strength of the hardened grout shall not be less than
17 N/mm2 at seven days.
To demonstrate that the grout type and equipment are meeting the
requirements of this Specification, the Contractor shall carry out a site trial
in accordance with Section 500 at least 25 hours before the intended date
to commence the work.
In cases where excessive loss of prestress has occurred or in which grouting has
not been satisfactorily carried out, or which is deficient in any other manner, the
Contractor shall propose corrective measures to the Engineer’s agreement. The
Contractor shall not rectify any deficiency prior to the Engineer’s agreement or
instructions. Corrective measures shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and at the Contractor’s expenses failing which the element shall be
replaced by the Contractor at his cost.
2113. MEASUREMNT
Formwork, staging scaffolding shall be measured and paid as per Section 1800.
2114. PAYMENT
Page No.
2201 GENERAL 22-1
2202 MATERIALS 22-1
2203 FABRICATION: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 22-1
2204 FABRICATION OF BOLTED STRUCTURES 22-12
2205 CASTING AND HEAT TREATMENT 22-18
2206 WELDED CONSTRUCTION 22-19
2207 FIELD ERECTION REQUIREMENTS 22-26
2208 ASSEMBLING AND BOLTING 22-27
2209 PROTECTION AGAINST CORROSION 22-29
2210 MEASUREMENT 22-36
2211 PAYMENT 22-36
SECTION 2200 –STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK
2201. GENERAL
(1) Scope
The fabrication, storage, handling and erection of structural steel works shall
comply with the relevant Sections of the IS and IRC, if otherwise not
specified in the contract.
Should there be any disagreement between IS and IRC, the provision in the
IRC shall prevail to the extent of the disagreement.
2202. MATERIALS
(1) Material for use in connection with the protection of the steel work against
corrosion are specified in Clause 2209. Other materials used in connection
with steel structures such as concrete, bearing pads, etc., shall be governed
by the appropriate Sections of these Specifications. Unless otherwise
specified or described in the contract, structural steel materials shall comply
with the appropriate standards listed below.
(1) General
This Clause shall apply to all operations undertaken in the fabrication in the
workshop or elsewhere whether on or off the site. The requirements
contained herein shall not be waived, nor shall be modified to conform to
any set of rules that any shop adopted as its standard unless so authorized in
writing by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall furnish shop detail Drawing for the complete
fabrication of all components/elements required by the contract. When it is
specified in the contract that the employer shall furnish prints of standard
shop detail Drawing, the Contractor shall be required to make any additions
or revisions to the detail Drawing as may be necessary to produce a finished
structure in accordance with the contract. Shop detail Drawing shall consist
of detailed Drawing showing the dimension and sizes of the
components/elements, bolt lists for field erection, a match marking diagram,
complete field erection Drawing and such other details and information as
may be necessary for fabrication.
Shop detail Drawing shall be prepared in a neat and legible form, on the dull
side of tracing cloth, with India ink, or by other methods approved by the
Engineer. Each sheet shall have a title in the lower right hand corner giving
the fabricator’s name, the fabricator’s contract number and brief description
of the details shown on the sheet.
Bills of material and bolt lists may be furnished on the fabricator’s own
standard sheets.
The Contractor shall submit blueprints of shop Drawing to the Engineer for
approval. No work shall be done in the shop until such Drawing has been
finally approved. In general, 2 sets of preliminary prints shall be required,
but the Contractor shall furnish additional prints free of charge upon request.
Only checked Drawing in complete sets shall be submitted for approval.
The details of anchorages, bearing plates, castings, etc., shall be submitted
in advance, in order to avoid delay in construction.
After the Drawing has been finally approved, the Contractor shall, without
direct compensation thereof, furnish to the Engineer 4 sets of prints of the
corrected Drawing, and such additional prints as may be required. The shop
Drawing as approved by the Engineer shall become a part of the contract.
(a) Storage
Before and after fabrication, all materials shall be so stored that they
are not deformed or damaged, and shall be protected against the
accumulation of water, dirt, oil or other foreign matter. Material that
has become pitted from exposure or other causes shall not be
acceptable for any use. Material that has been damaged during storage
shall be replaced with equivalent or better material.
(b) Identification
All metals shall be neatly and accurately cut to required size with
proper allowance as may be necessary or required for finishing
operations.
When the cutting torch is used, the burned edges shall be trimmed
smooth to exact lines by milling, chipping or grinding. Maximum
deviation for “free hand” cutting shall be 1.5 mm from true lines. A
mechanical guide shall be used for the flame cutting torch on all work
requiring precision cutting on which the maximum deviation permitted
shall not be greater than 0.8 mm. All “notch effects” shall be
completely removed form the portions of members where the extreme
fibre is subject to flexure, tension or perpendicular shear.
Where the ends of members which are to which are to take bearing, are
cut with a torch, a suitable allowance in their length shall be made to
permit proper milling or planning.
(e) Re-entrants
(i) They shall be so taken from the stock plates that the bent-line is at
right angles to the direction of rolling.
(ii) The radius of bends, measured to the concave face of the metal
shall be more than specified below.
Sweeps for laying out and checking curved surfaces shall be made of
wood or metal and shall be of sufficient length to produce accurate
results.
One new pilot and one driving nut for each size of shouldered pin.
All erection pins, bolts and washers necessary for field erection
Extra rivets of each size and length, in the amount of 10 rivets plus
10 per cent of number actually required for field erection, to
compensate for loose due to misuse, improper driving or other
contingencies.
(v) Sections:
(4) Machining
The surface shall be true but may show very slight grooves.
(ii) Finish:
The surface shall be true and smooth and shall show no visual
evidence of grooves.
The surface shall be the same as the defined for rough finish,
The surface shall be the same as that defined for smooth finish.
After a column has been otherwise completely welded and before the
cap or base plates are attached, the bearing surfaces shall be milled to
the angle shown in the plan.
Cap and base plates of columns shall have full contact with the surface
after assembly. Sole plates of beams and girders shall have full
contact with the flanges. Warped for deformed plates shall be machine
finished or otherwise straightened by an approved to secure an
accurate and uniform contact. Countersunk river heads or extruding
weld metal shall be chipped smooth and flush with the surrounding
surface.
The ends of members shall not be milled until such members have
been completely welded. Members whose ends are improperly milled
shall be rejected.
Joints in main chord tension members shall be close and neat, and in
no case shall the opening be more than 3 mm.
All bridge pins and roller 150 mm in diameter and smaller shall be
made of Bright steel bars complying with IS 9550.
All material shall be accurately and legibly marked according to the field
erection plan, prior to dispatch. Such markings shall be made with
contrasting paint on previously painted surfaces. The omission of marks on
duplicate pieces shall not be permitted unless otherwise authorized by the
Engineer.
Pins, roller nets, name plates, sheet lead, and small parts be boxed or crated
for shipment. Pins shall be shipped with the nuts in place.
When the Engineer directs, finished work shall be weighed in the presence
of the Inspector. The fabricator shall supply satisfactory scales and shall do
the handling and weighing. When requested by the Engineer, members
weighing more than 300 kg shall be marked to show their scale weight.
Anchor bolts, pier nose angles, and other anchorage or grillage materials
shall be dispatched in advance of other material to suit the requirements of
the construction work.
(6) Shop Painting
All ferrous metals which have not been plated, galvanized or enameled shall
be given one shop coat of paint of the kind specified in the contract. Non-
ferrous metals shall not be painted or otherwise surface treated unless so
specified in the contract. All cleaning and painting shall conform to Clause
2209.
The Contractor shall advise the Engineer as to the actual date and
place of preparation of materials so that sufficient time may be had,
prior to such preparation, to arrange for inspection. This inspection
will be dependent upon the character and importance of the work and
may involve inspection in the mill, the foundry, the fabricating shop
and the field, as may be considered necessary by the Engineer.
Information relative to the time of beginning various operations, such
as mill rolling, foundry casting, heat treating, shop layout, punching,
riveting, welding, milling, assembling, painting and shipping, shall be
furnished to the Engineer in sufficient time so that he may provide for
the proper supervision and inspection of the work. In general 28 days
shall be considered as the required time of advance notice. Failure to
furnish information shall result in the rejection of the material involved.
The Inspector shall reject the materials and/or the workmanship which
do not fulfill the requirements of the contract. However, in cases of
dispute, the Contractor may appeal to the Engineer, whose decision
shall be the final.
The Contractor shall furnish all facilities, tools and such assistance as
the Inspector may require for the inspection of material and
workmanship in the mill, foundry or shop. The inspector shall be
granted free access to the plant premises for the required inspection
service. All fabricated parts shall be piled separately in such a manner
as to facilitate inspection.
The Contractor shall furnish office space at the fabrication plant for
the Inspector’s use during the period of fabrication, assembly and
paintings.
(d) Testing
Where no specified tests are provided for in the contract, tests for
metals shall be conducted in accordance with the Engineer’s directions.
(e) Rejection
(2) Stringers
Stringers shall be straight and their bearing surfaces shall be true, and free
from all burrs and distorted edges.
The fixed ends of stringers supported on brackets or on the top flanges of
floor beams shall be secured by means of bolts having hexagonal heads and
nuts.
The web plate of a finished girder shall in no case project beyond the face of
the flange angles or end stiffener angles. In girders with full-length cover
plates, the edges of the web shall not be more than 6 mm inside the face of
the flange angles except that, in cases of cambered beams, the width of the
web may be 13 mm less than the distance (back to back) between the flange
angles provided the web is centred. In girders without cover plates, the
edges of the web shall not be more than 3 mm below the face of the top
flange angles. In girders with partial length cover plates, the above
requirements shall apply together with the additional requirement that,
unless the edges of the webs are flush with the faces of the flange angles at
the ends of the cover plate, any space between them shall be plugged with a
weld at least 13 mm long. In no case shall the ends of the webs be more
than 9 mm inside the face of the end stiffener angles.
When splices in flange angles are required by the contact, the abutting ends
of the angles shall be milled to a close fit. All holes in such splices shall be
subpunched and reamed, or drilled form the solid. Smoothly ground butt
welds will be acceptable for joints in flange angles in lieu of milling. Such
welds shall not be considered as a substitute for the splice plates or angles as
detailed.
(a) General
All holes shall be true to the shape and size specified, clean-cut
perpendicular to the axis of the member and free from all burrs and
distorted, torn or ragged edges.
The minimum distance from the centre of a hole to a sheared edge
shall be 38 mm, and the minimum distance to a planed or rolled edge
shall be 1.5 times the diameter of the bolt specified for such hole,
except as hereinafter provided or otherwise indicated in the plan. The
edge distance for lace bars shall be not less than 1.6 times the diameter
of the rivet or bolt.
(b) Type
When general reaming is specified in the contract for low carbon and
low alloy steels, all bolt holes, including connection holes to main
members, shall be subpunched (or subdrilled) and reamed, or drilled
from the solid; except for the following, which may be full punched:
The diameter of full sized punched holes shall be 1.5 mm larger than
the nominal diameter of the rivet or bolt. The diameter of the die shall
not exceed the diameter of the punch by more than 1.5 mm.
All holes shall be so accurately punched that, after the assembly of the
component parts of a member, and before any reaming is done, a
cylindrical pin whose diameter is 3 mm less than the nominal diameter
of the punched hole shall pass freely through at least 75 per cent of the
holes in any group. Correspondingly, a pin whose diameter is 5 mm
less than the nominal diameter of the punched holes shall pass freely
through all holes in any group. Material falling to meet either of the
above requirements shall be rejected. Reaming shall not be permitted
as a corrective measure.
The diameter of holes for turned bolts shall be 0.4 mm larger than the
diameter of the bolt. If the bolts are to be inserted in the shop, the holes may
be either drilled from the solid, or subpunched and reamed. If the bolts are
to be inserted in the field, the holes shall be subpunched or subdrilled in the
shop and reamed in the field. All drilling or reaming for turned bolts shall
be done after the parts to be connected are assembled and securely fastened
together. No offsets shall be permitted in holes for turned bolts.
(8) Bolts
The heads and the nuts shall be hexagonal. The bolt shall be machined
from a hexagonal bar, the size of which shall be the same as the bolt
head. The shank of the bolt shall be turned and given a smooth finish
to exact diameter. The length of the unthreaded portion of the bolt
under the head shall be 3 mm greater than the thickness of material it
is to pass through. The diameter of the unthreaded portion of the bolt
shall have a diameter at least 2.4 mm less than the diameter of the
unthreaded portion of the bolt, and it shall be the nearest standard bolt
size. The threads shall extend from the end of the bolt to within 1
thread distance form the shoulder. Washers 6 mm in thickness shall be
used under all nuts, and the hole in the washer shall be the same size as
the reamed or drilled hole.
(c) Anchor Bolts
Anchor bolts shall be the swage type and shall have hexagonal nuts.
Bolts for expansion joints shall be provided with 2 nuts. Those
portions of bolts which extend above masonry or concrete shall be
painted 1 shop coat of paint.
Only general grade load indicators shall be used with general high
strength friction grip bolts.
Each high strength friction grip bolt when installed in the works shall
be complete with one washer placed under the nut and one indicator
placed under the bolt head and each bolt shall be tightened at all stages
by rotating the nut only, the bolt head being completely restrained
against rotational movement.
All high strength friction grip bolts shall first be tightened sufficiently
to secure the structural steel work during its erection or assembly.
Following completion of the erection or assembly of each portion of
the structural steelwork those bolts shall be finally tightened until the
gaps between the load indicators and either the bolt heads or the nut
face washers have been reduced to:
(i) 0.40 mm where load indicators are fitted under the bolt heads
(ii) 0.250 mm where load indicators are fitted under the nuts and
beneath nut face washers.
16 80
20 160
22 210
24 270
27 340
30 460
After bedding down of the joints, each nut and the protruding threads
of the bolt shall be permanently marked to record their relative
positions. The nuts shall then be tightened to the approval of the
Engineer by the part-turn of the nut method in accordance with BS
4604: Part 1.
The casting shall be accomplished by a method that will ensure the complete
filling of all corners, arises and edges. Castings requiring undercut surfaces
shall be cast by the “lost wax process” or equivalent. Where practicable,
casting having one machined surface shall be cast with the surface down.
Metal from different melts shall not be permitted in the same casting.
Casting shall not be withdrawn from the mould until they have properly
cooled. Quenching of casting to speed up the cooling shall not be permitted.
All casting shall be thoroughly cleaned of moulding and core sand blasting
or by other approved methods. All high spots and rough edges resulting
from pouring connections shall be ground smooth.
All casting shall ring true when suspended and struck with a hammer.
When ordered by the Engineer, the soundness of the casting shall be further
tested by drilling, planning, magnetic particle test or X-ray.
Any structural defect in a casting such as blow holes, pipes sand holes,
cracks, checks, slag inclusions, cold shuts, unfilled arises, warped surfaces,
or deformations from core or flask movement shall be cause for rejection.
Castings with minor defects shall not be repaired until the Engineer has
given his permission. The method employed in such repair work shall be
approved by the Engineer.
The term “heat treatment” shall mean any method of intentionally and
systematically applying heat, at a temperature below the melting point, to
any casting after it has cooled. This heat may be applied one or more times
irrespective of cooling the procedure.
The term “annealing” shall mean either normalizing (air cooling) a casting
or full annealing (furnace cooling) a casting.
Full annealing shall consist of a heat treatment in which the casting is heated
slowly to the proper temperature above the critical range, maintained in such
temperature for the required time, and allowed to cool slowly in the furnace
until the temperature has fallen to 260 degrees F or less. The casting may
then be withdrawn from the furnace and air cooled. The furnace
temperature shall be controlled by pyrometers.
All other casting shall be annealed when so specified in the contract.
All forgings, and such other steel Sections as may be required by the
contract, shall be full annealed. Other steel members, except primped web
stiffeners, that have been partially-heated shall be full annealed unless
otherwise authorized by the Engineer
(1) General
(a) IS 814 - 1991 covered electrodes for manual arc welding of carbon and
carbon manganese steel (fifth revision).
(b) IS 814 - 1991 filler rods and wires for gas welding (second revision).
Welding equipment shall comply with the appropriate Indian Standard listed
below unless otherwise stipulated in the contract or agreed by the Engineer.
Site welding shall not be carried out unless prior written agreement from
the Engineer has been obtained. All such welding shall be subject to
100% non-destructive testing.
(5) Workmanship
(a) Assembly
Material that is to be welded shall be free form loose mill scale, rust,
or other foreign matter on the surface to be welded and for a distance
of at least 50 mm on each side of the weld. The preparation of edges
for welding may be by milling, chipping or cutting with a torch. All
traces of overheated metal caused by torch cutting shall be removed.
For this chipping to expose clean metal may be required. Grinding
shall not be permitted on any surface or edge which is to be welded,
unless the surface is subsequently thoroughly cleaned of carborundum
and metal particles.
Members or parts which have been painted shall have all of the paint
remove from the area which will be affected by the heat of the arc.
This shall be accomplished by burning with a blow torch or blow pipe
and brushing with a wire brush.
(b) Welding
During moderately cold weather the use of small movable shelters and
preheating the metal by means of blow torches will be in general
satisfactory. When the temperature is below- 10o C, the span or
portion of structure under going welding shall be entirely housed in
and heated to a minimum of 5o C. The use of open salamanders for
such heating shall not be permitted.
Welding procedures shall be such that distortion is reduced to the
minimum practicable and local distortion is negligible in the final
structure.
All welds shall be of the specified size and shape, and they shall be
placed at the locations designated. Welds which are not in conformity
with those required or welds which are defective, shall be chipped out
and redone in an approved manner. Weld protrusions which interfere
with later work or which present an uneven or unworkmanlike
appearance shall be finished smooth by chipping and grinding.
Deposited weld metal must be completely fused to all metal with
which it is in contact. The weld shall be free of all pits, porous
Sections, cold shuts, or slag inclusions. All pits and craters shall be
filled and all ends shall be boxed.
An electrode of the proper size shall be selected for the weld desired.
The electric current shall be adjusted for the electrode so that full
fusion will be obtained without undercutting. Undercut welds shall be
chipped back to bright metal and rewelded. The arc shall be kept
uniform and steady and shall be applied in a manner which will fuse
the metal without boiling, running or unnecessary spatter.
The final finished surface of the weld shall be smooth and regular and
shall conform as closely as practicable to the design requirements. All
slag shall be removed from the finished weld. All flux deposit which
may cause paint to rot shall be entirely removed. The entire surface
shall be thoroughly wire-brushed before painting. If required by the
Engineer, the final surface shall be finished smooth by chipping and
grinding the weld deposit.
(d) Weld Inspection
Inspection shall be made during the welding process and after the weld
is completed and cooled in accordance with IS 3600. All defects shall
be entirely removed or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Engineer shall designate at least 25 mm of every 2500 mm of
welding for removal, to determine the penetration, fusion and porosity
of the weld.
Plug borings shall be furnished when requested with the use of “X-
ray” or magnetic-particle examinations may be made where the proper
testing equipment is available. In such cases the inspection practice
shall be in accordance with IS 1182 or IS 5334 as appropriate.
The samples of material shall be selected and marked by the Engineer when
the materials for the work are inspected at the mills.
The welding and flame cutting trials shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of
the Engineer the procedures to be adopted in the fabrication of the work
which shall include:
(b) The heat control techniques required to ensure that the flame cut
surfaces of steel are free from cracks, local hardness, and any other
defects which would be detrimental to the finished work.
The trials shall include specimen weld details representative of the actual
construction which shall be welded in a manner simulating the most
unfavorable conditions liable to occur in the particular fabrication. Where
primers are to be applied to the work prior to fabrication, they shall be
applied to the sample material before the procedure trials are made. After
welding the specimens shall be held at a temperature not less than 10o for a
period of not less than 72 hours and shall then be sectioned and examined
for cracks and other defects.
Separate tests shall be performed in each case with the root of the
weld in tension and compression respectively.
Unless otherwise described in the contract, all butt welds shall be complete
penetration welds made between prepared fusion faces.
In butt joints the root edges or root faces shall not be out of alignment by
more than 0.125 times the thickness of the thinner material for material up
to 12 mm thick or by more than 2 mm for thicker material.
(a) One pair of run-on plates and one pair of run-off plates all prepared
to the same thickness and profile as the parent metal shall be
attached by clamps to the start and finish respectively of all butt
welds. Unless otherwise required by the Engineer, approximately 1
in 5 pairs of run-off plates, for butt welds in tension flanges and1
pairs for other butt welds, shall be production test plates. The
combined size of each pair of production test plates shall be either
225 mm, 300mm or 375 mm wide x 200 mm long as shown in Table
22.2 the length being measured in the rolling direction of the metal
and at right angles to the weld.
(b) Butt welds shall run the full length of the joint and extend at full
weld profile for a minimum distance of 25 mm into the run-off plates,
and for a minimum distances of 200 mm, 275 mm, 350 mm
respectively into the 225 mm x 200 mm x 200 mm run-off
production test plates.
(c) On completion of the welds the run-off production test plates shall
not be removed until they have been marked in a manner agreed by
the Engineer to identify them with the joints to which they are
attached.
(d) When removing the run-on and run-off plates by flame cutting the
cuts shall not be nearer than 5 mm to the sides of the parent metal
and the remaining metal shall be removed by grinding or other
method agreed by the Engineer.
(e) Specimens for the following tests to be carried out in accordance
with Clause 621 shall be selected from the run-off production test
plates by the Engineer:
(10) Camber
Before placing column bases, bed plates or shoes and the bearing shall be
prepared to proper elevation.
(3) Flasework
(a) Design
The Contractor shall prepare plans and design of the falsework. When
so requested these plans shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
approval, before the construction of the falsework is started. The
Engineer’s approval of such plans or his acquiescence in the work
shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for satisfactory results.
(c) Construction
(d) Removal
The straightening of bends shall be done by methods that will not produce
embrittlement, fracture or damage. All material shall be straightened cold
when practicable. No plated, galvanized, enameled, heat treated aluminium
and similar metals shall be heated. When metal of these types can not be
satisfactorily straightened cold, they shall be returned to the fabricator for
repair or replacement.
Mild steel and structural grade steel may be heated when necessary to
accomplish straightening. Other carbon steel and low alloy steels shall not
be heated unless specific approval is granted by the Engineer. Heating and
straightening shall conform to the requirements of Sub-clause 2203 (3) (g).
2208. ASSEMBLING AND BOLTING
(1) General
All field contact surfaces, including shims, which have not been given a
shop coat of paint, shall be thoroughly cleaned and given a coat of the
specified “soap coat” paint, except when such surfaces are to be completely
sealed by welding. Assembly of Sections shall be made while the contact
paint is still plastics. All surfaces of metal which will be inaccessible after
erection shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter, spot coated and
field painted in accordance with the provisions of Clause 2209.
Immediately before assembly, all pins shall be thoroughly cleaned and given
a coat of red lead. The pins shall be inserted into the holes before the red
lead is dry and the pin nuts are drawn tight. The exposed threads shall be
effectively burred or checked at he face of the nut.
Steel structures shall be assembled to correct line and elevation before any
welding is undertaken.
(2) Trusses
Trusses spans, except those portions erected by the cantilever method, shall
be erected on blocks so placed as to provide required camber. The camber
shall be secured by adjusting all panel points to the elevations as shown in
the plan or as directed by the Engineer.
Care shall be taken that trusses are in perfect alignment and that all milled
ends of compression members are in full contact. The spans must be fully
erected, including all portals, laterals, struts and sways, and all field
connections, except connection for stringers, rails and expansion devices
shall be securely drift pinned and bolted before any of these is permitted. In
case of cantilever spans, the Engineer may permit welding portions of the
anchor spans before the cantilever arms are completely erected.
Simple girder and beam spans shall be accurately set to square or skew as
required in the Drawing, with all diaphragms drift pinned and bolted in
place before field welding is permitted. Truss, girder or beam spans
designed continuous over supports shall be completely erected before any
welding is permitted.
Unless otherwise provided in the contract, suspended spans shall not be until
the adjoining spans are completely erected. No welding shall be permitted
until the erection is complete.
For continuous or cantilever spans, the number of fitting-up bolts and drift
pins required shall be determined by the Engineer for the stresses developed
in the various joints during erection. Drift pins and bolts shall be used in
equal proportions and shall be located as to hold effectively the joint
members in close contact and in correct position during all welding
operations.
Erection washers not less than 5 mm in thickness and not less than 50 mm in
diameter shall be used with all erection bolts.
(4) Welding
Contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, mill scale, dirt, grease,
paint lacquer, or other foreign material before assembly. All bolts shall be
installed with a hardened washer under nut or bolt head whichever is the
element turned in tightening. Bolts may be tightened by any method to the
required tension. The torque value needed to develop the required bolt
tension shall be determined by the Engineer. Bolt tension shall be checked
at locations determined by the Engineer in the presence of the Contractor
and in such manner that the Engineer can read the torque gauge. Other
methods of determining bolt tension may be used, provided the prior
approval of the Engineer is obtained in writing. Nuts shall be positioned
whenever practicable on the side of the Engineer which will not be visible
from the traveled way. Nuts for bolt which can be partially bedded in
concrete shall be positioned on the side of the member that will be encased
in concrete. Bolts up to 6 mm larger in diameter of those shown in the
Drawing may be used provided that the required clearance and edge distance
are not reduced below those required for the lager bolt.
Before paint is applied to any surface other than metal-coated surfaces the
appropriate surface preparations as described in the contract shall be carried
out in accordance with the following:
(a) Bare Metal Surfaces
Steel work surfaces which will have concrete cast against them shall
be left unpainted. The surfaces shall be thoroughly wire brushed to
remove loose rust, mill scale and surface contamination.
Paint from painter’s kettles shall be returned to store at the end of each
working period where it shall be kept in a sealed container. Before it is re-
issued it shall be thoroughly mixed and no fresh paint or thinners shall be
added.
All paint shall be supplied from the store to the painters ready for
application. The addition of thinners or of any material shall be thereafter
prohibited. Any instruction given by the paint manufacturer shall be strictly
followed.
(a) When the ambient temperature falls below 4oC or the relative
humidity rises above 90o except if otherwise stated in the
manufacturer’s instructions.
The total dry paint film thickness of the paint system on bare steel surfaces
and on metal coated surfaces shall be as described in the contract. The dry
paint film shall be measured by Elcometer or other instrument approved by
the Engineer.
In order to obtain the dry film thickness specified, the Contractor shall
ensure that the coverage rate given by the manufacturer shall enable this
thickness to be attained.
Wet film thickness gauges may be used for checking but shall not be
permitted as a means of predicting the dry film thickness.
No paint shall be used after the expiration of the “pot-life” stipulated by the
manufacturer. The paints of expired “pot-life” shall not be mixed with fresh
paint or have thinners added to them.
Painted steel work which is to be stored prior to erection shall be kept clear
of the ground and shall be laid or stacked in an orderly manner that will
ensure that no water or dirt can accumulate on the surfaces. Suitable
packing shall be laid between the layers of stacked materials. Where cover
is provided, it shall be ventilated.
Areas of paint which have been damaged during handling, storing, loading
and off-loading, transportation, erection and construction shall be cleaned to
bare metal, and the edges of the undamaged paint leveled with sandpaper.
The full specified painting system shall then be re-applied and the new paint
shall overlap the existing paint by at least 50 mm all round the affected area.
As soon as possible after joints have been made and passed by the Engineer
the parent and joint material, exposed parts of bolts, nut washers, weld and
weld affected areas shall be prepared as stated in the contract and brought up
to the same state of painting as the adjoining surfaces.
(a) Brush
(b) Roller (for shop painting only), supplemented by brush where
necessary.
(c) Air pressure spraying
(d) Airless spraying
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with duplicate copies of the
manufacturer’s data sheets for the paints he proposes to use. Following the
Engineer’s written instruction the requirements of the paint manufacturer’s
data sheets shall be adopted for the works.
Where called for by the Engineer the Contractor shall carry out paint
application procedure trials, either at the fabricator’s works or at Site as
appropriate, with the equipment and labour to be used in the works. The
Contractor shall supply suitable blast cleaned steel and sufficient paint for
the trials and must demonstrate his ability to apply each coat of paint of a
designated paint system in accordance with the Specification and the paint
manufacturer’s data sheet. No painting of the contract steelwork shall be
permitted until the procedure trials have been complete to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. Any adjustment to the registered paint formulation shown to
be required by the trials, other than an increase in the amount of thinners,
must be agreed by the Engineer and made at the paint manufacturer’s work
before the final stage of a paint procedure trial and before delivery of the
first batch of paint.
All requirements of the paint manufacturer’s data sheets shall be complied
with. Paint shall be supplied from the Contractor’s paint store to the
painters ready for application, the only adjustment of formulation being as
provided in paragraph 2 above. Any addition of thinners must be made in
the store under the supervision of the Engineer and only as allowed under
the manufacturer data.
a. Cover Plates
Etch primers and blast primers shall be suitable for continuous spray
application. They shall not be used on phosphated steel nor shall they be
overcoated with zinc rich primers.
2210. MEASUREMNT
The structural steel shall be measured in tonne and shall be based on the net
weight of metal in the fabricated/erected structure computed on the basis of
nominal weight of the elements. While computing the weight, the specific gravity
of steel shall be adopted 7.85 tonne per cubic metre. The weight shall be
determined from the dimensions shown on the Drawing. The weight so measured
shall be inclusive of weld fillets and weight of protective coatings, if any.
All operations like cutting, bending, straightening, heat and cold treatments,
machining, temporary and permanent erection, connection, bolts, nuts and
washers, welding, painting and protection against corrosion and other ancillary
and incidental operations shall be deemed included in the weight of the steel
structure as measured above
2211. PAYMENT
The structural steel as measured shall be paid at the contract unit rate which shall
be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor as per Clause 112 and
also for the cost of all operations required for fabrication, connections, oiling,
painting, temporary erection, inspection, tests and final erection including all
other ancillary and incidental works needed to compete the work as per these
Specifications and/or directed by the Engineer.
SECTION 2300 – TIMBER CONSTRUCTION
Page No.
2301 SCOPE 23-1
2302 MATERIALS 23-1
2303 CONSTRUCTION 23-2
2304 TESTS AND STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE 23-3
2305 MEASUREMENT 23-3
2306 PAYMENT 23-3
SECTION 2300 –TIMBER CONSTRUCTION
2301. SCOPE
2302. MATERIALS
(1) Timber
Timber shall be straight and free form twist, sapwood, shakes, dead and
loose knots, worm holes, other holes, signs of decay and other defects, and
seasoned and shall comply with the requirements of IS 883-1994 The
Engineer shall inspect and stamp each timber to be used as structural
members. The natural moisture content of any untreated timber delivered to
site shall not exceed those as recommended by IS 287-1993. When timber
is specified as unsawn it shall be cut above the ground swell and shall taper
from butt to tip. A straight line drawn from the centre of the tip to the centre
of the butt shall not fall outside the centre line of the piece at any point more
than 1% of the length of the piece. When the timber is specified as sawn it
shall be sawn true and square to the full dimensions. When timber is
specified as wrot it shall be finished with a plane, smooth and true to
dimensions on the faces so specified.
(2) Hardware
Hardware shall consist of bolts, with the necessary nuts and washers, timber
connectors, drift pins, dowels, nails, screw nails, coach bolts, spikes and
other metal fasteners. They shall be galvanised or ungalvanised as specified.
Bolts, nuts and washers shall be mild steel and comply with IS 1363-1992.
Timber connector shall be of the type shown on the Drawing. Drift Pins and
dowels shall be mild steel. Nails shall comply with IS 723-1972. Screw
nails and screws shall comply with IS 451-1972/IS 2585-1968. Coach bolts
shall comply with IS 2609-1972. Spikes and other metal fastenings shall be
mild steel.
(4) Galvanizing
When described in the contract or shown on the Drawing, all hardware shall
be galvanised in accordance with the Indian Standard Recommended
Practice for Hot-Dip Galvanising or Iron and Steel: IS 2629-1985 and IS
1367 Part 13-1983: Hot Dip Galvanised Coating on threaded Fasteners. The
Engineer may require galvanised hardware to be tested in accordance with
IS 2633-1986.
(5) Flashing
2303. CONSTRUCTION
(2) Framing
All timber shall be accurately cut and framed to a close fit and shall have
even bearing over the entire contact surfaces. No shimming shall be
permitted in making joints. Holes for drift pins and dowels in untreated
timber shall be bored with a bit 1.5 mm less in diameter than the pin or
dowel. Holes for drift pins and dowels in treated timber shall be bored to
the same diameter as the pin or dowel. Holes in small timbers for spikes
may be bored with a bit with the same diameter as the smaller end of the
spike, when necessary to prevent splitting. All bolts shall be fitted with
washers. Groundsills shall be firmly and evenly bedded in solid material.
Posts shall be framed true and have full even bearing on the sills, caps shall
be framed true and have full bearing on the posts or piles. Bents shall be
properly aligned before bracing is placed. The minimum distance between
the outside bolt and the end of any brace shall be 200 mm. In placing beams
and/or stringers for bridge decks the better edge shall be place downwards.
The top of beams and stringers after placing shall not vary from a plane
more than that will permit bearing of the superstructure timber on all the
beams and/or stringers. Kerbs and railings shall be accurately framed and
aligned so that on completion they present a smooth visual line vertically
and horizontally. Floor planks shall be laid such that no joints will occur
over any one stringer or beam close than every third plank. No planks other
than required to fill out skews, shall be less than 2 metres in length and at
least 50% of the planks shall be 5 metres or more in length. Close boarded
floor planks shall be laid longitudinally breaking joint by at least 600 mm.
They shall be secured in place by barbed nails, screws or coach bolts as
shown on the Drawing, or described in the contract. These fastenings shall
be spaced at not more than 250 mm and be staggered. Two fasteners shall
be placed at each end of each plank.
The materials shall be tested in accordance with the relevant standards specified
and shall meet the prescribed criteria. The Contractor shall furnish necessary test
certificates as required by the Engineer
The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall be to the true lines,
levels and dimensions as indicated on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer.
2305. MEASUREMNT
Depending upon the nature of work, the quantities shall be measured in numbers,
in the units of volume, area, or length as specified in the contract.
2306. PAYMENT
The quantities measured as provided above shall be paid at the contract unit rate
applicable for the particular type of work. The Contract unit rate shall be the full
and the final payment to the Contractor as per Clause 112 to complete the work as
per these Specifications.
SECTION 2400 – MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES
Page No.
2401 GABIONS 24-1
2402 CRIB WALLS 24-7
2403 SLOPE STABLISATION AND SURFACE EROSION
PROJECTION 24-10
2404 SUB-SURFACE DRAIN 24-18
2405 DRILLED SUB-SURFACE DRAINS 24-21
2406 SCOUR PROJECTION AND RIVER TRAINING WORKS 24-23
SECTION 2400 –MISCELLANCEOUS STRUCTURES
2401. GABIONS
(1) Scope
(2) Materials
(a) Stone
Stones used for filling the gabion boxes or mattresses shall be clean,
hard, sound, unweathered and angular rock fragments or boulders.
The specific gravity of the stone shall be not less than 2.50 and the
stones shall not absorb water more than 5 percent when tested as per
IS: 1124. The length of any stone shall not exceed three times its
dimension of the mesh of the crate. However smaller size of stones as
spalls shall be allowed for filling voids and its volume including voids
shall not be more than 20 percent of the total volume of the stone.
Before filling any gabion boxes and mattresses the Contractor shall
submit representative samples of the rock he proposes to use in the
gabion for approval by the Engineer. Further representative samples
shall be submitted for approval each time when there is a change in the
type and strength of the rock.
(b) Gabion
Gabions shall consist of steel wire mesh crates. The steel wire shall be
mild steel wire complying with NS 169-2045. All wires used in the
manufacturing crates and diaphragms, binding and connecting lids and
boxes shall be galvanized with an heavy coating of zinc by an
electrolytic or hit dip galvanizing process. The weight of deposition of
zinc shall be in accordance with NS 163-2045. Zinc coating shall be
uniform and be able to withstand minimum number of dips and
adhesion test specified as per NS 163-2045. Tolerance on diameter of
wire shall be ± 2.5 percent. The tensile strength shall be between 300
to 550 N/mm2
SWG 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
mm 4.88 4.75 4.06 3.66 3.25 2.95 2.64 2.34 2.03
(3) Construction of Gabion
Before filling any gabion boxes and mattresses, the Contractor shall
submit samples of gabion boxes and/or gabion mattresses assembled,
erected and filled with stones for approval which, when approved,
shall be retained for reference and comparison with the gabions built
as part of the permanent works. The size, type and location of the
samples shall be as directed by the Engineer.
The bed on which the gabion boxes or mattresses are to be laid shall be
even and conform to the levels shown on the Drawing. If necessary
cavities between rock protrusions shall be filled with material similar
to that specified for gabion filling.
(i) Walls
In walls gabion boxes shall be placed such that vertical joints are
not continuous, but staggered. Aprons shall be formed of headers.
If more than one unit is required to obtain the necessary width, unit
of unequal length shall be used and the joints between should be
staggered.
(d) Assembly
The gabion boxes and gabion mattresses shall be laid in such a manner
that the hinges of the lid will be on the lower side on slopes and on the
outer side in walls.
(e) Filling
Except in the case of sack gabions, the crates shall be placed in their
final position before filling commences. They shall be stretched to
their full dimension and securely pegged to the ground or wired to
adjacent gabion before filling. The vertical corners shall be kept
square and to full dimension by inserting a steel bay of at least 20 mm
diameter at each vertical corner, maintaining it in the correct final
position throughout the filling process, and removing it when the crate
is full. Before filling commences, the selvedges of the crate shall be
bound to the selvedges of adjacent crates with binding wire. Where
crates are being assembled in position in a wall the binding of the
edges of each crate n the assembly process and the binding together of
adjacent crates shall be carried out in the same operation.
Before filling with stone, gabion shall be anchored at one end or side
and stretched from the opposite end or side by inserting temporary
bars and levering them forward. The top and bottom shall be kept
stretched by tensioning with tie wires attached to an anchorage or
equivalent approved method until the gabion has been filled. The
gabions shall be inspected at this stage but before filling with stone to
ensure that the tie/wiring has been properly carried out and the gabion
boxes or gabion mattresses are not pulling apart. Gabion boxes or
gabion mattresses may be tensioned either singly or in the case of a
long straight structure by staining a number of units together using an
approved tensioning system.
The filling shall be carried out by placing individual stones into the
gabion by hand in courses in such a manner that the stones are bedded
on each other and bonded as in dry random rubble masonry as per
Clause 2608. No loose stones shall be tipped into the crate and the
practice of coursing and bonding the outer layer and filling the interior
with unlaid stones shall not be permitted.
All 1m deep gabions shall be filled in three equal layers and 0.5 m
deep gabions in two equal layers. Horizontal bracing wires made with
the same bindings wire as used for tying shall be fixed directly above
each layer of the stone in the compartments, the wires being looped
round two adjoining meshes in each side of the compartment and
joined together to form a double tie which shall be tensioned by wind
lassing together to keep the face of the gabions even and free from
bulges. Bracing wires shall be spaced horizontally along and across
the gabions at distances not greater than 0.33 m. Where the upper
faces of gabion boxes are not covered with further gabions vertical
bracing wires shall be fitted between the top and bottom mesh using
two tie wires per square metre of surface.
The ties shall be fixed to the bottom of the units prior to filling and
tied down to the lid on completion. Where a double layer of gabion
boxes is used to form an apron both upper and lower layers shall have
vertical tie wires.
(g) Tolerance
(a) The gabion wire shall be tested for mass, uniformity and adhesion of
zinc coating and tensile strength of the wire itself. Failure of test
results to comply with the specifications shall lead to the rejection of
gabion wires. The test on the samples taken as per Table 24.3 from
each lot of the G.I. wire received at the side of the work shall be
carried out in accordance with NS 169-2045 and NS 163-2045.
(b) The stones shall be tested for specific gravity and water absorption. At
least 3 set of tests shall be made for every source of material. The test
results shall meet the specified criteria.
(c) In each two hundred cu.m. or part thereof one representative sample of
completed gabion box mattress i.e. assembled, filled with stones and
tied up in position shall be dismantled during the process of
construction. The dismantling shall be made in such a manner that the
quality of the surrounding work is least affected. The stones having
least dimension more than or equal to the specified dimension shall be
gathered at one place and the rest at another place. By displacement of
water total volume of these specified stones shall be determined
separately. Ratio of volumes of specified stone and voids including
spalls to the volume of the total volume of the gabion box shall be
worked out. The test result shall meet the requirement of the
Specifications.
(d) The dismantled portion shall be made good by the Contractor at his
own cost after completion of the test.
(5) Measurement
Gabion wire mesh for boxes and mattresses shall be measured in sq. metre.
The boxes and mattresses shall be physically measured and be verified with
their tolerances.
The binding wires, selvedge wire and tension wires shall not be measured
separately. They are deemed included in the measurement of the gabion
boxes and/or mattresses.
(6) Payment
Gabion boxes, gabion mattresses, stone filling shall be paid as per respective
contract unit rate which shall be the full and the final compensation to the
Contractor as per Clause 112 to complete the work in accordance with these
Specifications.
(1) Scope
This Section covers the construction of crib walls at locations shown on the
Drawing or as instructed by the Engineer. Crib walls shall be constructed of
reinforced concrete, timber or steel structural elements as shown on the
Drawing and filled with compacted backfill material.
(2) Materials
(a) Reinforcement concrete for headers and stretchers shall comply with
the requirements of Section 2000.
(b) Timber for headers and stretchers shall comply with the requirements
of IS: 883. they shall be treated or untreated, sawn or log as shown on
the Drawing or described in the contract and comply with the
requirements of Sub-clause 2302 (1).
(c) Drift pins shall be steel bars of a diameter as shown on the Drawing
and shall comply with the requirements of IS: 1786:-1985. The length
of drift pin shall be equivalent to the combined thickness of three times
the depth of one member plus 100 mm.
(d) Steel crib wall components shall be of the thickness, shape and
dimension as shown on the Drawing and shall comply with the
requirements of IS: 2062-1992. All bolts shall also be of mild steel
and shall conform to IS: 2062-1992, but have a minimum tensile
strength of 485 N/sq.mm. and a minimum percentage elongation of 14.
All steel components, bolts, base plates, splice plates shall be
galvanized or painted as shown on the Drawing or described in the
contract. Such protection shall comply with Clause 2209.
(e) Backfill material shall be of such character that it will not sift or flow
through the openings in the wall, shall be free from clay and other
deleterious fines, and shall conform to the requirements set out in
Table 24.4
(3) Construction
The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall be to the true lines,
levels and dimensions as indicated on the Drawing with no bulges or sags.
The lines of stretchers and headers shall have a uniform appearance.
Crib walls shall be measured in running meter for each type of headers and
stretchers placed in their final position and accepted.
(6) Payment
(1) Scope
This Clause covers the works related to the furnishing of materials and
construction of slope stabilizing measure in dry stone pitching, grouted
stone pitching, gabion, masonry walling rock dowels and rock anchors/bolts
and wire netting on slopes as shown on the Drawing or as instructed by the
Engineer.
During slope stabilization work, small areas of fill may be required, such as
to infill gullies. Fill material for such purpose shall consist of suitable
material as defined in Clause 902 and shall be deposited and compacted by
approved plant as defined in Clause 910, in accordance with the lines, levels
and grades shown on the Drawing and as directed by the Engineer.
(a) Materials
Stone used for pitching shall be from a quarry or arising from the excavation
and be angular in shape. If river boulders are used they shall be broken into
angular pieces. The stone shall be sound, hand, free from cracks or other
defects. Not less than 80% of the stones, except those used for chinking
shall have individual volumes of not less than .01 cubic metres. Waste
concrete may be used provided it is sound and meets the size requirements
of the stone. The stones, when immersed in water for 24 hours, shall not
absorb water by more than 5 percent of their dry weight when tested in
accordance with IS: 1134.
(b) Construction
(a) Materials
(b) Construction
After the grout has been placed, the stone shall be thoroughly brushed
so that their top surfaces are exposed. The grouted pitching shall be
cured for a period of not less than four days, after grouting. Curing
shall be done with wet sacking or other approved cover, and shall not
be subjected to loading until adequate strength has developed. Where
required, or instructed by the Engineer, weep holes shall be provided
in the pitching.
The finished surface of the grouted pitching shall present an even, tight
and neat appearance with no stones surface varying by more than 25
mm from the specified surface grades and lines. The average
thickness of the pitching, measured at right angles to the surface, shall
not be less than the specified average thickness.
The materials used shall comply with Clause 2401. The mattress shall be
assembled and filled in the same manner as for gabions specified in Clause
2401. Ties and anchorages shall be provided as shown on theDrawing.
(7) Wire Netting
Walls of the specified type (s) shall be constructed in accordance with the
Drawing and as directed by the Engineer to act as retaining structures, as
revetment structures or as buttresses.
Materials for masonry walling shall comply with Clause 2602, and
construction with Clause 2603. Mortared masonry shall be coursed and
comply with Clause 2607. Dry masonry shall comply with Clause 2608.
Composite masonry shall comply with Clause 2609.
(a) Materials
(b) Construction
The location, direction and length of each hole for rock dowels shall
be approved by the Engineer. After drilling a hole, the Contractor
shall clear the hole of all drill cuttings, sludge and debris and shall seal
the hole to prevent ingress of foreign matter. Before the rock dowels
are installed, the position, inclination, bearing, length and diameter of
the drill holes shall be approved by the Engineer.
The free end of the dowel bar shall be securely bolted with steel
bearing plate and then covered with concrete capping of grade M30/20
to prevent corrosion.
The Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s test certificate for each lot
of dowel bars. The test certificate results shall meet the specified
criteria. The Engineer may ask for testing the bars in independent
laboratories and the test result shall meet the specified requirements.
Six sets of test cubes of grout shall be taken from at least one
representative batch of grout each day the grouting is carried out and
the results shall meet the requirements shown on the Drawing. Unless
otherwise shown on the Drawing, the minimum compressive strength
of test cubes shall be as follows:
7 days - 18 N/mm2
28 days - 30 N/mm2
(a) Materials
Grout shall be cement slurry. Cement and water used shall meet the
requirements specified in Section 2000. The water cement ration shall
be between 0.30 and 0.45 or as instructed by the Engineer.
(b) Construction
The anchor direction both in plan and zenith shall be more or less
perpendicular to the weakened plane as indicate on the Drawing or
directed by the Engineer. However, for the case of gravity grouting,
the zenith inclination of anchor bars shall be kept minimum 15o below
the horizontal. Unless others wise shown on the Drawing or specified
in the Contract, the bore hole shall have 90 mm diameter. Log shall be
prepared for each bore hole. Placing and grouting of anchors shall
commence only after the approval from Engineer.
The bond length of anchor bars shall, in no case, be less than 5 m and
the tendon length shall depend upon the thickness of loose and soft
layer above, as investigated by the Engineer during construction. The
free anchor length (where no grouting is executed) shall be fully
corrosion protected with approved insulating wrapping or polythene or
other materials.
Before grouting, the bore hole shall be flushed clean and free of any
loose and clayey materials. Prior to grouting, the mixture shall be
mixed at least for 3 minutes. The grout shall be used as soon as
possible after mixing the ingredients but in any event within the initial
setting time of the cement.
Depending upon the type of rock soil formation and depth of sound
rock strata, the fixed anchor and tendon lengths are subject to vary, so
that a minimum anchor design load (anchor testing) can be obtained.
The final decision for the change in anchor lengths lies fully on the
rock investigation, and judgment by the during construction and the
result of anchor tests. In severely jointed or fractured rock water
permeability test as directed by the Engineer shall be conducted prior
to grouting.
The free end of the anchors shall be fixed with anchor head. The face
of anchor head shall be inclined with vertical to the same angle as the
anchor bar with the horizontal so that the load transfer to the anchor
strip shall be axial. The anchor bar at the anchor head should be filled
to tolerance of ± 5 mm concentrically with the tendon, which in turn,
should not suffer an angular deviation in excess of ± 3o from the axial
position.
The Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s test certificate for each lot
of anchor bars. The test certificate results shall meet the specified
criteria. The Engineer may ask for testing the bars in independent
laboratories and the test results shall meet the specified requirements.
Six sets of test cubes of grout shall be taken from at least one
representative batch of grout each day the grouting is carried out and
the results shall meet the requirements shown on the Drawing. Unless
otherwise shown on the Drawing. The minimum compressive strength
of test cubes shall be as follow:
7 days - 18 N/mm2
28 days - 30 N/mm2
Ten percent of the anchors shall be tested in the field to the specified
design load. The sequence of testing shall be decided by the Engineer.
The test shall meet the specified criteria.
(a) Materials
Grout shall be cement slurry mix. The grout shall have a water/cement
ratio not exceeding 0.45. The use of admixtures shall be subjected to
the Engineer’s approval. Cement and water shall meet the
requirements specified in Section 2000.
(b) Construction
The holes for the bolts shall be drilled to the line to the required depth
for any particular bolt. The depth of the hole shall be such that the
installed bolt is located 150 mm from the extremity of the hole. The
diameter of the drill hole shall be sufficient to ensure a miniumum 10
mm annulus of grout or resin and also permit free entry of the bolt
together with any required protection. Immediately prior to insertion
of the rockbolt, the hole shall be cleaned and blown free of dust. In
the event of the drilling encountering any material other than solid
rock, this shall be recorded and reported to the Engineer without delay.
A detailed record of the grouting of each drill hole including the date
performed and the identification marks of associated test cubes shall
be maintained.
Six sets of test cubes of grout shall be taken from at least one
representative batch of grout each day the grouting is carried out and
the results shall meet the requirements specified in Sub-clause 2403.
(12) Measurement
(b) Dry Stone Pitching and grouted stone pitching shall be measured in
square meters.
(13) Payment
(1) Scope
This Clause shall cover the works related to the construction of sub-surface
drainage networks in slopes, slides and under road pavement. The drains
shall be either main or tributary or of other types as shown on the Drawing.
(2) Materials
The materials used for construction of sub-surface drains shall comply with
following requirements:
(a) Stone
Stones used for filling and lining of sub-surface drains shall comply
with the specifications for dry stone pitching given in Sub-clause 2403
(4).
(b) Cement
(c) Mortar
(f) Geomembrance
(g) Geotextile
(3) Construction
The work shall start with construction at road side and then go up the slope
by using already constructed drains as buttress for new drains.
Laying of pipe in the trench shall be started at the outlet end and
proceed towards the upper end, true to the lines and grades specified.
Before placing the pipe, filter material shall be laid for the full width
of the trench bed and compacted. Unless otherwise shown on the
Drawing, the thickness of this layer shall be 150 mm.
After the pipe installation has been completed and approved filter
material shall be placed over the pipe to the required level in
horizontal layers not exceeding 150 mm 2405 I and thoroughly
compacted to 93% of the MOD (heavy compaction).
Pitching shall be done as per Clause 2403. The finished slope shall be
reshaped to facilitate proper surface drainage towards drains
After the installation of pipe, the trench shall be backfilled with the
filter material in the same manner as described above in (a)
(4) Tests and Standard of Acceptance
Minimum one set of test for gradation analysis and compaction of filter
material shall be checked for every 50 cu.m. and/or every change in source
of material. The results shall meet specified requirements
(5) Measurement
(6) Payment
(1) Scope
This Clause covers the works related to the construction of drilled sub-
surface drains in slopes and slides. The drilled sub-surface drains shall
consist of HDP drainpipes covered by geotextile and placed into drilled
holes
(2) Material
Drain pipes shall comply with the requirements specified for Series II high
density polythene pipes in accordance with NS 40/2040. Unless otherwise
shown on the Drawing, the pipe shall have a diameter of minimum 40-mm.
The pipes shall be perforated by drilling minimum 50 holes per meter length
on the upper half of the pipe in a staggered pattern uniformly distributed
with a diameter of 3 mm (minimum) to 6mm (maximum).
(3) Construction
The Contractor shall submit a sample of geotextile and HDP pipe along with
factory certificate for the approval of the Engineer. It shall be ensured that
the geotextile and the pipe meet the specified criteria.
(5) Measurement
(6) Payment
(1) Scope
This Section covers the works related to the construction of scour protection
and river training works. These works shall include all operations necessary
for construction of appropriate structures adjacent to culverts, piers and
abutments, at outfalls of drainage, along the road side and elsewhere, where
protection is required for ensuring safety of structures against damage by
flood/flow of water.
(2) Materials
At least two thirds of the total weights of the stone/rock used shall be
heavier than 75 kg.
The size of the stone/rock shall not be larger than 200 mm measured in any
direction.
The size and weight of individual stone shall conform to Clause 5.5.5.1 of
IRC: 89. However in no case weight shall be less than 40 kg except for
spalls. The total volume of spalls as per including voids shall not be more
than twenty percent of the total volume of the pitching.
G.I. wire to be used in gabions shall comply with Clause 2401 and the filter
shall comply with Clause 3110.
(a) Construction
The surface where rip rap to be executed shall be made to the line and
level as indicated in the drawing or directed by the Engineer. To
achieve this necessary excavation, filling with compaction and/or
levelling shall be done as per site condition. On the prepared surface
stone/rocks shall be placed individually to provide minimum space
among the stones. Needle like shapes and protrusions on the surfaces
of stones shall be chipped off by hammer so that stones are beded
properly and voids are reduced. To avoid sliding of stones/rocks
downwards, the placing of stones shall be started from the lower edge
to proceed towards upper edge. By driving small stones or spalls into
interstices, laid stones shall be tightly wedged so that individual stone
shall not be removed easily. The top surface, the lines, levels and
depth of rip rap and grade shall be as indicated on the drawing or
directed by the Engineer.
Stone shall be tested for water absorption and specific gravity. The
test results shall meet the specified criteria. At lease 3 set of tests shall
be made for every source of material. About one sq.m (1 M x 1 M) of
the completed rip rap in every 200 sq.m or in pan thereof, shall be
dismantled. The aggregate weight of all stones obtained from
dismantling shall be computed upto full depth. Then aggregate weight
of individual boulders weighting more than 75 kg shall be obtained.
The result shall meet the specified requirement.
(a) Construction
Stones shall be tested for specific gravity and water absorption test.
The test result shall meet the requirements as specified in these
Specifications.
Concrete shall be tested as specified in section 2000
(5) Ptiching/Revetment on Slopes
(i) Construction
The surface on which the gabions are to be laid shall be
trimmed to true lines level and grade as described above in
Sub-clause 2406 (5) (a). On the prepared surface, gabions shall
be laid as specified in Clause 2401.
(7) Payment
Page No.
2501 SCOPE 25-1
2502 MATERIALS 25-1
2503 SOAKING OF BRICKS 25-2
2504 LAYING OF BRICKS 25-2
2505 JOINTS 25-2
2506 JOINTING WITH EXISTING STRUCTURES 25-2
2507 CURING 25-2
2508 SCAFFOLDING 25-3
2509 CONDITION OF EQUIPMENT 25-3
2510 FINISHING OF SURFACES 25-3
2511 TEST AND STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE 25-4
2512 MEASUREMENT 25-4
2513 PAYMENT 25-5
SECTION 2500 –BRICKWORKS FOR STRUCTURES
2501. SCOPE
This Section covers the furnishing of materials and construction of brick works
for structures in accordance with the detail shown on the Drawing and these
Specifications or as directed by the Engineer.
2502. MATERIALS
(1) Bricks
(2) Mortar
However, if provided in the Contract, cement and sand may also be mixed in
specified proportions. Cement shall be proportioned only by weight, by
taking its unit weight as 1.44 tonne per cubic metre and sand shall be
proportioned by volume after making due allowance for bulking.
Sand shall comply with Clause 613. Cement shall comply with Clause 614.
Only that quantity of mortar shall be mixed at a time which can be used
completely before it becomes unworkable. Any mortar that has become
unworkable due to loss of water before elapsing the initial setting time of
cement, shall be rewet to make it workable and shall be used in the works.
On no account mortar shall be used after elapsing the initial setting time of
cement.
2503. SOAKING OF BRICKS
Bricks shall be soaked in water for a minimum period of one hour before use.
When bricks are soaked they shall be removed from the tank sufficiently in
advance so that at the time of laying they are skin dry. Such soaked bricks shall
be stacked on a clean place where they are not spoilt by dirt, earth, etc.
All bricks work shall be laid in English bond, even and true to line, plumb, level
and all joints accurately kept. Whole bricks used on the face shall be selected
ones of uniform size and true rectangular face.
Bricks shall be laid with frogs up, if any, on a full bed of mortar. When laying,
bricks shall be slightly pressed so that the mortar gets into all the surface pores of
bricks to ensure proper adhesion. All joints shall be properly flushed and packed
with mortar so that no hollow spaces are left.
Before laying bricks in foundation, a layer of not less than 12 mm of mortar shall
be spread to make the surface on which the brick work will be laid even.
Immediately thereafter, the first course of bricks shall be laid.
The brick work shall be built in uniform layers. Corners and other advanced work
shall be raked back. Brick work shall be done true to plumb or in specified batter.
No part of it, during construction, shall rise more than one metre above the
general construction level, to avoid unequal settlement and improper jointing.
Toothing may be done where future extension is contemplated but shall be used
as an alternative to raking back.
2505. JOINTS
2507. CURING
Green work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering. Masonry work in
cement mortar shall be kept constantly moist on all faces for a minimum period of
seven days. The top of the masonry work shall be left flooded with water so as
not to disturb or washout the green mortar.
During hot weather, all finished or partly completed work shall be covered or
wetted in such a manner as to prevent rapid drying of the brick work.
2508. SCAFFOLDING
The scaffolding shall be sound and strong to withstand all loads likely to come
upon it. The holes which provide resting space for horizontal members shall not
be left in masonry under one metre in width or immediately near the skew backs
of arches. The holes left in the masonry work for supporting the scaffolding shall
be filled and made good.
All equipment used for mixing or transporting mortar and bricks shall be clean
and free from set mortar, dirt or other injurious foreign substances.
(1) General
(2) Jointing
In jointing, the face joints of the mortar shall be worked out while still green
to give a finished surface flush with the face of the brick-work. The faces of
brick-work shall be cleaned to remove any splashes of mortar during the
course of raising the brick-work.
(3) Pointing
For pointing, the mortar shall be filled and pressed into the raked out joints,
before giving the required finish. The pointing shall then be finished to
proper type given on the Drawing. If type of pointing is not mentioned on
the Drawing the same shall be ruled pointing. For ruled pointing after the
mortar has been filled and pressed into the joints and finished off level with
the edges of the bricks, it shall while still green be ruled along the centre
with a half round tool of such width as work shall may be specified by the
Engineer. The superfluous mortar shall then be cut off from the edges of the
lines and the surface of the masonry shall also be cleaned of all mortar
(4) Plastering
Plastering shall be started from top and worked down. All putlog holes shall
be properly filled in advance of the plastering as the scaffolding is being
taken down. Wooden screeds 75 mm wide and of the thickness of the
plaster shall be fixed vertically 2.5 to 4 metres apart to act as gauges and
guides in applying the plaster. The mortar shall be laid on the wall between
the screeds using the plaster's float and pressing the mortar so that the raked
joints are properly filled. The plaster shall then be finished off with a
wooden straight edge reaching across the screeds. The straight edge shall be
worked on the screeds with a small upward and sideways motion 50 mm or
75 mm at a time. Finally, the surface shall be finished off with a plaster's
wooden float. Metal floats shall not be used.
When recommencing the plastering beyond the work suspended earlier the
edges of the old plaster shall be scraped, cleaned and wetted before plaster is
applied to the adjacent areas.
The plaster shall be finished to a true and plumb surface and to the proper
degree of smoothness as required by the Engineer.
The average thickness of plaster shall not be less than the specified
thickness. The minimum thickness over any portion of the surface shall not
be less than the specified thickness minus 3 mm.
Any cracks which appear in the surface and all portions, which sound
hollow when tapped, or are found to be soft or otherwise defective, shall be
cut out in rectangular shape and re-done as directed by the Engineer.
Curing shall be started as soon as the mortar used for finishing has hardened
sufficiently not to be damaged when watered. It shall be kept wet for a
period of at least 7 days. During this period, it shall be suitable protected
from all damages.
Before laying any mortar, the Contractor shall make three sets of mortar test
cubes from each sourced of sand to demonstrate the compliance of the
mortar to the specified strength. Each set shall comprise two cubes, one to
be tested at 7 days and the other to be tested at 28 days. Testing shall be in
accordance with IS 2250. During construction the Contractor shall make
and test mortar cubes at the rate of three for every 10m3 or part of it of brick
work to assess the strength of the mortar subject to a minimum of 3 sample
cubes for a days work. The brick shall be tested for compressive strength
and water absorption as per NS-1/2035 and shall meet the requirement of
this Specification.
2512. MEASUREMENT
The work of plastering and pointing shall be measured in square metres separately.
2513. PAYMENT
The brick works, plastering and pointing shall be paid at their respective contract
unit rate which shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor as
per Clause 112 to complete the work as per these Specifications.
Brick work not meeting the requirements of the relevant Specifications (termed as
substandard brick work) shall be paid as substandard work provided it is accepted
by the Engineer as substandard work. For the acceptance of such work the
Engineer may require further investigation and/or tests which the Contractor shall
conduct at his own cost. Acceptance or rejection of such work is the sole
responsibility of the Engineer and his decision in this respect shall be the final and
binding upon the Contractor.
If accepted as substandard work the payment for such work shall be made at the
contract unit rate reduced by the formula given below
The reduced contract unit rates of substandard brick work and other items
contained shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor
SECTION 2600 – MASONRY FOR STRUCTURES
Page No.
2601 SCOPE 26-1
2602 MATERIALS 26-1
2603 CONSTRUCTION 26-1
2604 ASHLAR 26-3
2605 BLOCK-IN-COURSE 26-3
2606 SQUARE RUBBLE-COURSED OR BROKEN COURSE 26-3
2607 RANDOM RUBBLE-COURSED OR UNCOURSED 26-3
2608 DRY RANDOM RUBBLE 26-3
2609 COMPOSITE RANDOM RUBBLE 26-3
2610 TEST AND STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE 26-4
2611 MEASUREMENT 26-4
2612 PAYMENT 26-4
SECTION 2600 –BRICKWORKS FOR STRUCTURES
2601. SCOPE
This Section covers the furnishing of materials and construction of different types
of stone masonry works in accordance with the Drawing and this Specifications or
as directed by the Engineer.
2602. MATERIALS
(1) Stone
The stones to be used shall be durable and angular in shape. If boulders are
used they shall be broken into angular pieces. The stones shall be sound,
hard, free from iron bands, spots, sand holes, flaws, shakes, cracks or other
defects. The stone shall not absorb water more than 5 per cent. The specific
gravity of the stone shall not be less than 2.50. Except otherwise described
in the contract, the length of any stone shall not exceed three times its height.
The breadth of the stone on the bed shall not be less than 150 mm nor
greater than 3/4 the thickness of the wall. At least 85% of the stones used in
masonry, except those used for chinking as chips or spalls of stones shall
have individual volumes of more that 0.01 m3. The chips or spalls used
including voids in the dry stone masonry shall not be more than 20% of the
stone masonry by volume. In case of mortared masonry the total volume of
mortar and spalls taken together shall not be more than 30% of the mortared
masonry. Representative samples of the stones intended for use in the
works shall be submitted to the Engineer for prior approval. Further
representative samples shall be submitted for approval whenever there is a
change in the type or strength of the rock that the Contractor intends to use
in masonry work.
(2) Mortar
Mortar for masonry shall conform to Sub-clause 2502 (2). Sand shall
comply with IS 2116 and cement shall comply with Clause 614.
2603. CONSTRUCTION
The method of construction described herein shall hold in all Clauses of this
Section, wherever applicable.
(1) General
Except for dry rubble walling, all joints (gaps) shall be sufficiently thick to
prevent stone to stone contact and the gaps shall be completely filled with
mortar. Stones shall be clean and sufficiently wetted before laying to
prevent absorption of water from mortar.
Placing loose mortar on the course and pouring water upon it to fill the gaps
in stones shall not be allowed. Mortar shall be fluid, mixed thoroughly and
then poured in the joints. No dry or hollow space shall be left anywhere in
the masonry and each stone shall have all its faces completely covered with
mortar of the thickness as specified for joints.
The bed which is to receive the stone shall be cleaned, wetted and covered
with a layer of fresh mortar. All stones shall be laid full in mortar both in
bed and vertical joints and settled carefully in place with a wooden mallet
immediately after placement and solidly embedded in mortar before it has
set. Clean and wet chips and spalls shall be wedged into the mortar joints
and bed whenever necessary to avoid thick joints or bed of mortar. When
the foundation masonry is laid directly on rock, the bedding face of the
stones of the first course shall be dressed to fit into rock snugly when
pressed down in the mortar bedding over the rock. For masonry works over
rock, a levelling course of M15/40 or M15/20 concrete 100mm thickness
shall be laid over rock and then stone masonry work shall be laid without
foundation concrete block.
In case, any stone already set in mortar is disturbed or the joints broken, it
shall be taken out without disturbing the adjoining stones and joints. Dry
mortar and stones thoroughly cleaned from the joints and the stones shall be
reset in fresh mortar. Sliding one stone on top of another which is freshly
laid, shall not be allowed.
Shaping and dressing of stone shall be done before it is laid in the work.
Dressing and hammering of the laid stones which will loosen the masonry,
shall not be allowed.
Building up face wall tied with occasional through stones and filling up the
middle with stones spalls and chips or dry packing shall not be allowed.
Vertical joints shall be staggered. Distance between the nearer vertical
joints of upper layer and lower layer in coursed rubble masonry shall not be
less than half the height of the course.
Masonry in a structure between two expansion joints shall be carried up
nearly at one uniform level throughout but when breaks are unavoidable the
masonry shall be raked in sufficiently long steps to facilitate jointing of old
and new work. The stepping of raking shall not be more than 45 degrees
with the horizontal.
Masonry shall not be laid when the air temperature in the shade is less than
3°C. Newly laid masonry shall be protected from the harmful effects of
weather.
(3) Pointing
Where mortared masonry faces will remain exposed, the mortar joints shall
be pointed to a consistent style as shown on the Drawing. Pointing shall be
carried out using mortar 1:3 by volume of cement and sand or as shown on
the Drawing. The mortar shall be filled and pressed into the raked out joints
before giving the required finish. The pointing, if not otherwise mentioned
shall be ruled type for which it shall, while masonry work is still green, be
ruled along the centre with half round tools of such width as may be
specified by the engineer. The excess mortar shall then, be taken off from
the edges of the lines and shall not be unnecessarily plastered over the
exposed stone works. The thickness of the joints shall not be less than 3mm
for Ashlar masonry.
Random Rubble : 20 mm
Coursed Rubble : 15 mm
Ashlar masonry : 5 mm
2604. ASHLAR
All stones shall be dressed to accurate planes on the beds and joints and they shall
be fair and neatly or fine tooled on the face unless otherwise described in the
contract.
2605. BLOCK-IN-COURSE
Beds and joints shall be squared and dressed for a distance of at least 220 mm
from the exposed face. Bond stones shall form at least one sixth of the area of the
exposed face and shall extend at least 900 mm into the wall or for the full
thickness of the wall if the latter is less than 900 mm. Unless described in the
contract as tooled or drafted, the exposed face of all stones shall be blocked and
left rough. Arises shall be dressed square at all beds and joints
All stones shall be truly squared and dressed for a distance at least 120 mm from
the face of the wall. Bond stones shall be provided at the rate of at least one to
every 0.8 m2 of exposed face and shall measure not less than 150 mm x 150 mm
on the face and not less than 450 mm in length or the full thickness of the wall,
whichever is the less. Vertical joints in any layer shall be broken in the next layer
and the horizontal lapping of the stones shall not be less than 100 mm
All stones shall be carefully set with a bond stone provided at the rate of at least
one to every 0.9 m2 of exposed face. Bond stones shall measure not less than 150
mm x 150 mm on the exposed face and not less than 450 mm in length or the full
thickness of the wall, whichever is the less.
Materials for composite random rubble shall comply with Clause 2602 and
construction with Clause 2603. Mortar masonry shall be coursed and comply
with Clause 2607 and the dry stone insets with Clause 2608. The dry stone insets
shall be constructed when the level of the surrounding mortared masonry
surround has reached the top of the dry stone inset.
Before laying any mortar, the Contractor shall make three sets of mortar test
cubes from each source of sand to demonstrate the compliance of the mix to the
specified strength. Each set shall comprise two cubes, one to be tested at 7 days
and the other to be tested at 28 days. During construction, the Contractor shall
make and test mortar cubes at the rate of three cubes for every 10m3 of masonry
to assess the strength subject to a minimum of 3 cubes samples for a days work.
Testing of cubes shall be in accordance with IS 2250. The stones shall be tested
for the water absorption as per IS: 1124 and it shall not be more than 5 percent.
The stones shall also be tested for Specification gravity and it shall not be less
than 2.65. Sand shall be tested as per Clause 613 or as directed by the Engineer.
At least 3 set of tests for stone and sand shall be conducted for every source.
About one square meter (1m x 1m) measured in front face of the completed stone
masonry in every 200 sq.m or part of it shall be dismantled during the process of
construction upto complete depth and the aggregate volume of the stones having
volume more than 0.01m3 shall be obtained by the method of displacement of
water to find the volume of spalls and mortars in the case of mortared masonry
and the volume of spalls and voids in the case of dry masonry. The dismantling
shall be made in such a manner that the quality of the surrounding work is least
affected. While dismantling, the tightness of the joints shall also be compared
with the thickness of joints as specified for assessment of the quality of work. If
the volume of spalls and mortars is more than the specified volume and/or the
joints are not filled completely with mortar, then the entire work which the sample
and test represent, shall be rejected.
The dismantled portion shall be made good by the Contractor at his own cost after
completion of the test
2611. MEASUREMENT
The stone masonry and the pointing shall be paid at the respective contract unit
prices which shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor as per
Clause 112.
Stone masonry in cement sand mortar not meeting the requirements of the
relevant Specifications. (termed as substandard stone masonry in cement sand
mortar) shall be paid as substandard work provided it is accepted by the Engineer
as substandard work. For the acceptance of such work Engineer may require
further investigation and/or tests which the Contractor shall conduct at his own
cost. Acceptance or rejection of such work is the sole responsibility of the
Engineer and his decision in this respect shall be the final and binding upon the
Contractor
If accepted as substandard work the payment for such work shall be made at the
contract unit rate reduced by the formula given below
The reduced contract unit rates of substandard stone masonry in cement sand
mortar and other items contained shall be the full and the final compensation to
the Contractor
SECTION 2700 – REPAIR OF STRUCTURES
Page No.
2701 SCOPE 27-1
2702 GENERAL 27-1
2703 REPAIR OF MINOR DEFECT IN REINFORCED CONCRETE 27-1
2704 PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE FOR BRIDGE DECKS 27-3
2705 REPLACEMENT, CONCRETE FOR THE SIDES AND SOFFITS
OF DIAPHRAGMS, AND SOFFITS OF DECKS 27-4
2706 SEALING OF CRACKS BY INJECTION OF EPOXY RESIN 27-7
2707 EPOXY MORTAR FOR REPLACEMENT OF SPALLED
CONCRETE 27-13
2708 EPOXY BONDING OF NEW CONCRETE TO OLD CONCRETE 27-15
2709 CEMENT GROUTING 27-16
2710 GUNTTING/SHORTCRETE 27-17
2711 REPLACEMENT/RECTIFICATION OF BEARING 27-19
2712 DISMANTLING OF CONCRETE WEARING COAT 27-20
2713 PAINTING OF STEEL BRIDGES 27-21
2714 PROTECTION OF STEEL STRUCTURES AGAINST
CORROSION 27-27
2715 REPAIR OF STEEL BEARINGS 27-29
2716 MEASUREMENT 27-33
2717 PAYMENT 27-34
SECTION 2700 –REPAIR OF STRUCTURES
2701. SCOPE
This Section covers the works in connection with the repair of RCC structures
such as sealing of cracks, repair and replacement of concrete, cement grouting,
gunting/shortcrete. Repair of structures shall be carried out in accordance with
the repair plans and these Specifications or as directed by the Engineer.
2702. GENERAL
Care shall be taken to ensure suitable mitigation measures against noise and
dust, pollution and damages to the environs whether temporary or
permanent and shall be taken as incidentals to work.
(2) Phasing
Adequate precautions shall be taken for safety of personnel, road users and
existing services, which, during execution, shall be considered as incidentals
to work. Persons working shall wear safety helmets and rubber gloves and
shall be provided with other safety measures as needed.
(2) Materials
(c) The cement content shall not be less than 400 kg/m3 of compacted
concrete.
(a) Mixing, placing and curing shall be carried out strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer instructions with compliance of the followings:
(b) The patch shall be finished off neatly by wooden float to match with
the existing profile.
(c) When the repair is set, it shall be stoned down with carborundum stone
and dressed over with sand: cement (2: 1). Finally it shall be
smoothened with a cement float« very fine carborundum stone until a
smooth even face is obtained.
(d) The repaired areas shall be kept damp for 14 days after casting.
Propriety membranes shall not be used.
(4) Supervision
(1) General
(2) Concrete
The concrete shall comply with Section 2000 depending upon the nature of
the work or as directed by the Engineer.
(3) Admixtures
The Contractor shall demonstrate by means of trial mixes the action of the
admixture he proposes to use for the Engineer's approval.
The cement content shall not be less than 400 kg/m3 of compacted concrete
and the water cement ratio shall not be greater than 0.40.
The total chloride ion content of the materials shall not be exceed 0.1
percent of the mass of cement. Calcium chloride or admixture containing
chloride salts shall not be used.
(a) The joint surface shall be saturated of two hours before concrete is
placed against it.
(b) Immediately after placing the concrete and for 14 days thereafter, it
shall be protected against harmful effects of weather including rain,
rapid temperatures changes, frost and from drying out. In all cases the
methods of protection used shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer. Proprietary curing membranes shall not be used.
(7) Concrete Strength
(1) General
(b) Cement shall comply with Section 2000 depending upon the nature of
work or as directed by the Engineer.
(c) Cement content shall be not less than 400kg/m3 of compacted concrete.
(d) The content of equivalent sodium oxide in the mix shall be restricted
or non-reactive aggregates shall be used.
(e) The total chloride ion content of the materials shall not exceed 0.1 per
cent of the mass of the cement. Calcium chloride or admixtures
containing chloride salts shall not be used.
(f) The aggregate shall be well graded with the maximum size not
exceeding 10mm.
(a) The Contractor shall supply following information with each batch or
part of a batch of the material delivered to the site.
(d) The material shall be stored in a dry place with moderate temperature.
(e) Material shall not be older than 3 months or the period specified by the
manufacturer, when incorporated in the works.
(f) The materials shall not be removed from the store for use in the works
unless it is immediately required for mixing.
(a) Mixing and placing shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions together with the followings:
(i) The water cement ratio shall not exceed 0.4. The water content
shall be determined during Approval Tests, approved by the
Engineer.
(b) Replacement concrete shall not be placed against other concrete which
has been in position for more than 30 minutes unless a construction
joint is formed. In addition, the joint surface shall be saturated for a
minimum 2 hours before concrete is placed against it. When
replacement concrete has been in place for 4 hours, no further concrete
shall be placed against it for a further 20 hours.
(d) Immediately after placing, the concrete shall be protected for 14 days
against harmful effects of weather including rain, rapid change of
temperature, frost and from drying out. The methods of protection
used shall in all cases be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Proprietary curing membranes shall not be used.
(e) When the mix proportions have been approved by the Engineer no
variations shall be made in the manufacture, supply, mix proportions
or method of the material without the consent of the Engineer.
(a) Before work commences on the site all properties of the proposed
replacement concrete shall be demonstrated by the Contractor and the
manufacturer's representative by carrying out the tests specified below.
Where required in the contract, procedure trial shall be carried out on
the model specified in the contract or modified to suit actual
reinforcement details or working condition.
(i) The tests shall be carried out in the presence of and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer who shall receive certified copies
of the results of all tests.
(ii) The mixer and method of mixing shall be the same as that to be
used in the works.
(iv) The funnel shall be fitted with a rubber bung and charged with
6 litres of concrete. On the release of the bung the concrete
shall flow along the trough and the length of the flow shall be
measured. The minimum length of flow along the trough for
each test shall be 450mm, without signs of segregation or
bleeding.
After 24 hours the top plate shall be removed and the exposed surface
shall be lightly brushed with a stiff bristle brush to remove any surface
cement skin which may be covering voids. The exposed surface of the
concrete shall be examined for air-pockets, cracks and other defects.
The temperature of the mixer and material for each test shall be as
in Sub-clause 2705 (4) (b).
(a) The material shall be taken at random from one or more containers
from the same batch. Each batch of material delivered to the site shall
be tested as specified below.
(b) Flow trough test shall be carried out as specified in these
Specifications.
(c) Flow tests for horizontal surfaces shall be carried out as specified.
Three cubes from each batch mixed for placing in the Works shall be tested
for compressive strength.
(1) General
The work of epoxy adhesive for the Structural Concrete Bonding Process
shall conform to these Specifications.
(2) Personnel
(3) Materials
(i) The mixing ratio of resin and hardener shall generally be between 1 to
1 and 2 to 1 by volume subject to manufacturer’s recommendation.
(ii) Neither the mixed epoxy adhesives nor their individual components
shall contain solvents and thinners.
(iii) The components shall be free of foreign material. The viscosity of the
individual components shall not change more than ±15 percent when
kept in closed containers at 25 degrees Celsius after two weeks.
* In the case of two component injection system where resin and hardener
get mixed at point of injection pot life at 25 degrees Celsius shall be not
greater than 15 min ± 10 minutes.
(5) Preparation
Surface seal material shall be applied to the face of the crack between the
entry ports. For through cracks, surface seal shall be applied to both faces.
Before proceeding with the injection, the surface seal material must gain
adequate strength with respect to concrete strength of the member and
injection pressure
Injection of epoxy adhesive shall begin at lowest entry port and continue
until there is an appearance of epoxy adhesive at the next entry port adjacent
to the entry port being pumped.
If port to port travel or epoxy adhesive is not indicated the work shall be
immediately stopped. In case the volume of the injected exceeds 2 litres for
a particular entry port, the work shall be stopped and the Specifications shall
be reviewed.
(f) The use of solvents and thinners shall not be permitted except for
cleaning of equipment
(8) Testing
(i) Viscosity test for resin and hardener and the mix - three
specimens each.
(iv) Shear test - six specimens each, 3 after 24 hours and the other
three after 72 hours of curing.
Where the resin and hardener get mixed at point of injection, the pot
life is not important and no tests may be required
Bond Test
Shear Tests
The Contractor shall obtain 5cm diameter initial core samples in the
first 50 linear metres. Thereafter, frequency of core sampling shall be
as specified or as agreed by the Engineer.
If the cores taken in first 5am length pass tests as specified above,
epoxy adhesive injection work at area represented by cores shall be
accepted.
At all times during the course of the work the Contractor shall keep
complete and accurate records and make available to the Engineer of
the pressure and ratio tests specified above so that the efficacy and
accuracy of the injection equipment is verified.
The pressure test shall be run for each injection unit at the beginning
and after break of every shift
(ii) Ratio Test
(1) Material
(a) Formulation
The epoxy resins for use in the mortar shall be obtained from a reputed
manufacturer and the mortar shall be prepared in conformity with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
The Contractor shall carry out tests on the samples made out or
requirements indicated above. The sand content in the mortar shall be
in accordance with the desired consistency.
The resin and hardener shall be mixed before adding the dry filler. The
mixed ready to use mortar shall not contain lumps of unwetted filler and
should be uniform in colour. For a total weight of 1 kg or less, hand mixing
shall be sufficient. For quantities in excess of 1 kg, the component shall be
mixed for 3 minutes with a slow speed 400-600 rpm electric drill with a
Jiffy mixer. The stirrer shall be moved up and down and along the sides
until an even steak free colour is obtained. Whipping In an excessive
amount of air shall be avoided. If no power is available, a flat putty knife
may be used to reach into the corners of the can and hand mixing done for at
least 5 minutes.
Surface upon which epoxy is to be placed shall be free of rust, grease, oil,
paint, asphalt, loose or material, unsound concrete, dust or any other
deleterious material.
Since cured epoxy does not provide adequate bond with any material, all
overlay, whether epoxy or cement based, shall be done within pot life of the
base epoxy layer.
(a) Mechanical that includes grinding, grit blasting, water blasting and
scarification.
(4) Application
Epoxy primer coat shall be applied with the help of stiff nylon bristle
brushes or hard rubber rollers or spray gun depending upon the nature of
surface and extent of work area. As far as possible, the coating shall be
uniformly thick.
Before the primer coat is fully cured, epoxy mortar shall be applied by
means of trowels and floats. The interval between the application of primer
coat and epoxy mortar shall be approximately 15/30 minutes depending
upon the ambient temperature.
Seal coat shall be applied after 24 hours curing, after mild roughening of the
surface of the mortar.
(5) Coverage
The coverage of resin mix will depend on the system of resin used.
However, as a general guideline the coverage area shall be as under:
Tools and equipment are best cleaned immediately after use since the
removal of cured resin is difficult and time consuming. The bulk of resin
shall be removed using a scraper and remainder washed away completely
using solvents such as toluene, xylene or acetone. Equipments used for
epoxy shall always be cleaned before it hardens. Solvents used for this
purpose may be Acetone (flammable), Methy/Ethy/Kethone (flammable),
Methyle Chloride (non-flammable). Cured epoxies may be removed using
Methylene Chloride.
(7) Testing
Epoxy used for making mortar shall conform to all requirements and testing
procedures as laid down in Sub-clause 2706 (8).
Any skin contact with epoxy materials, solvents and epoxy strippers shall be
avoided. Epoxy resins and particularly epoxy hardeners (B component)
may cause a rash on the skin. The official toxicity classification on the
container labels should be looked for before starting work.
Rubber gloves with a cloth liner and protective clothing shall be worn.
Barrier creams are recommended but are not substitutes for protective
clothing. Eyes shall be protected where splashing could occur while
spraying or mixing. Good ventilation shall be ensured and inhalation of
vapours shall be avoided. If materials are sprayed, a respirator shall be used.
If skin contact occurs, it shall be immediately washed with a cleaner,
followed by soap and water. Should eye contact occur, it shall be flushed
immediately with plenty of water for 15 minutes and a doctor called for.
All emptied, used buckets, rags and containers shall be removed from site.
These shall be stored in waste disposal bags and suitably disposed.
(1) Epoxy resin used bonding shall be obtained from a reputed manufactures.
The pot life of such bonding epoxy shall be more than 60 minutes at normal
temperature.
(2) The entire surface of the existing concrete member shall be thoroughly
cleaned by wire brush and then with compressed air to remove dust and
loose particles from the surface. Any crack or spalling of concrete shall be
seated by epoxy injection/epoxy mortar/grouting as decided by the Engineer.
A coating of suitable epoxy resin at the rate of 0.8 kg/sq.m (minimum) shall
then be applied on the surface of the existing concrete members. Fresh
concrete shall then be placed within the pot life of the resin system.
(3) Testing
Epoxy used for bonding work shall satisfy the criteria mentioned in Clause
2706 (8).
Two concrete cubes of 150 mm size as per approved design mix shall be
placed, at a distance of 150 mm from each other. Epoxy resin system
suggested for bonding new to old concrete shall be applied on the opposite
faces of the cubes.
Fresh cement concrete cube of grade as per approved design mix shall be
water cement ratio of 0.4 or less in between two concrete cubes already
casted and epoxy resin applied bor bonding on a 12 mm thick steel spacer.
The assembly shall be cured in water for 28 days and steel spacer removed
thereafter.
(1) Material
(2) Preparation
The surface shall be cleaned with wire brush and compressed air 15 mm dia
and 150 to 200 mm deep holes along the length of the cracks at a spacing of
500 mm shall be drilled by wet drilling using rotary percussion drills.
Nipples shall be inserted in these holes.
Where the mixer and pump are combined in one unit, the dry material shall
be screened before mixing. If the mixer and pump are in separate units, the
grout shall pass through a screen before it enters the pump.
(4) Application
Highest practical pressure within the limits 0,10 - 0.40 N/mm2 should be
used in order to force the surplus water from the grout. As the pressure may
be distributed hydraulically over considered areas, vigilance must be
exercised to prevent damage or the needless waste of grout. Grouting is to
be done by attaching a packer (consisting of expansible tube or rubber) to
the end of the grout supply pump through the holes and nipples.
(6) Testing
Percolation test done at the end of grouting operation shall give a value of
less than 2 lugions.
2710. GUNITING/SHOTCRETE
(1) Material
The gunite is a mixture of cement, sand and water. It shall comprise of 100
parts by weight of cement, 300 parts by weight of quartz sand, 35-50 parts
by weight of water and 2 parts by weight of approved quick setting
compound. In general, dry mix shortcrete shall be used.
Sand for guniting shall comply with the requirements stipulated in IS:383.
In general, sand shall neither be too coarse to increase the rebound nor too
fine to increase the slump. Sand shall have a moisture content between 3 to
6 per cent.
The grading of sand shall lie within the limits given in Table 27.1.
4.75 mm 95 – 100
2.36 mm 65 – 90
1.18 mm 45 – 75
0.600 mm 30 – 50
0.300 mm 10 – 22
0.150 mm 2–8
Water/cement ratio for guniting shall fall within the range 0.35 to 0.50 by
mass, wet enough to reduce the rebound. Drying shrinkage may be between
0.06 percent to 0.10 percent. The quick setting compound shall be added at
the nozzle with water just before guniting.
(2) Workmanship
The cement and sand shall be batched and mixed and conveyed through a
hosepipe with the help of compressed air. A separate line shall bring the
water under pressure. The cement, sand water mix shall be passed through
and intimately mixed in a special manifold and then projected at high
velocity to the surface being repaired. The density of gunite shall not be less
than 2000 kg/cu.m. The strength of gunite shall not be less than 25 N/mm2.
For effective guniting, the nozzle shall be kept 60 to 150 cm away from the
surface, preferably normal to that surface. While enclosing reinforcement
bars during repairs, the nozzle shall be held closer at a slight angle and the
mix shall be wetter than the normal.
The defective concrete shall be cut out to the full depth till sound concrete
surface is reached. Under no circumstances the thickness of concrete to be
removed shall be less than clear cover to the main reinforcement. No square
shoulders shall be left at the perimeter of the cut-off portion and all edges
shall be tapered. Thereafter, all loose and foreign materials shall be
removed and the surface be sand-blasted to make it rough to receive
shotcrete after applying a coat of bonding epoxy as per recommendation of
the manufacturer at the rate of 1.0 kg per 1.5 sq.m. of surface area.
Water shall be sprayed to reduce the dust while removing concrete wearing
course with jack hammer. No other work shall be taken up under the span
when dismantling work is in progress.
(1) General
The Contractor shall use the Paint System as described in Sub-clause 2713
(2) for the repainting of the existing bridge structure, to complete the work
in at least 4 separate coats as specified below.
The painting of the structure shall include the removal of existing paint
coats and preparation of the metal surfaces, the application, protection and
drying of the paint coats; the protection of pedestrian, vehicular or other
traffic on or underneath the structure; the supply of all tools, equipment,
scaffolding, labour and materials (including paint as specified) necessary for
completion of the work involved in painting the surfaces of the structure.
The system shall provide a total minimum dry film thickness of 200 microns,
and shall include for all approved thinners and cleaning agents necessary for
the completion of the work in accordance with these Specifications.
The Contractor shall be responsible for apprising himself of the specified
paint system and the manufacturers recommendations in respect of its
storage, preparation, application, and protection and shall take all necessary
measures and precautions to ensure compliance with the manufacturers
recommendations.
Where the Contractor requires to store paint, the paint shall be stored in a
secure paint store and ventilation provided as necessary to maintain the
temperature of the paint store at a temperature between 5 and 25 degrees
Celsius. If at any time whilst within the Contractors possession paint is
allowed to exceed these limits, the paint shall be removed from the Works at
the Contractors expense and the cost of the paint, as determined by the
Engineer, shall be debited to the Contractor.
Paint, which has not been used within 12 months of the date of manufacture
or the shelf life recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is the lesser,
shall not be used in the works.
At the end of each working period, paints which shall have exceeded their
"pot life" by the commencement of the next working period shall be mixed
with fresh paint but shall be removed from the works at the Contractor's
expense.
Other types of paints shall be returned to store and kept in sealed containers
with not more than 10% usage.
The Engineer shall have access to the Contractors secure paint store at all
times.
The surface shall be free from dust and grit and dry and ready for
painting.
Mill scale, rust and foreign matter shall be removed to the extent that
only slight traces are remaining as stains in the form of spots and strips.
The surface shall be cleaned with a vacuum cleaner, dry clean
compressed air or a clean brush.
In all cases where paint coats only are to be restored, the edges of paint
coatings shall be bevelled back into sound paint
The Contractor shall provide 500 ml samples for laboratory testing purposes
of each type of paint to be used in the works. The samples shall be taken
from the first batch of each type of paint delivered to the site.
When instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall also provide a sample
of any replacement batch of paint.
Unless permitted by the Engineer, painting, except for procedure trials, shall
not start until the Engineer confirms that the samples are satisfactory.
In addition the Contractor shall provide 500 ml samples for application
control purposes when instructed by the Engineer and only under his
supervision.
The Contractor shall provide 500 ml tins with lids for the samples at the
start of painting or before any procedure trials. The quantity of containers
supplied shall be sufficient to avoid any delay in taking samples throughout
that work.
The Contractor shall also supply details of the overall wet film thickness of
each coat to be applied and of the coverage rates, in m2,/litre, for each coat
of paint to be used in the works.
The calculations shall be based on the volume solids plus an allowance for
surface roughness, uneven application and wastage.
The Contractor shall demonstrate his ability to apply the paint in accordance
with the Specification and manufacturers recommendations and shall obtain
the Engineer's approval to commence the application of a particular coat
before starting.
All paints shall be prepared and applied in strict accordance with the
manufacturers instructions and no thinners or cleaners shall be employed
other than those recommended by the manufacturer.
The Contractor shall execute the works only when the conditions at the site,
including temperature and humidity, are suitable for applying the paint to be
used and ensure that the structure to be painted is fully accessible to the
Contractor and to the Engineer for inspection prior to, during and after
painting operations.
(vii) When wind borne dust may have a harmful effect on the paint.
Paint shall be applied to surfaces, which have been prepared and cleaned in
accordance with the Specification and approved for painting in advance by
the Engineer.
Wet film thickness gauges shall be used where practicable to check that the
wet film thickness for each coat is not less than:
During the application of a paint system, the Contractor shall ensure that the
progressive total thickness of the applied coats shall allow the specified
minimum total DFT to be attained without exceeding overall the proposed
wet film thickness by more than 20%. The local dry film thickness for the
primer shall not exceed the specified minimum dry film thickness by ore
than 30% and for other paints by more than 75%.
Surfaces to be painted shall be free from moisture, dust, grease or any other
deleterious materials that would prevent the bond of the succeeding
application.
Each coat of the specified paint system shall be generally free from surface
defects, including cratering, pin-holing, blistering, rivalling, sagging,
bittiness, dry spray and cissing, as defined in BS 2015 "Glossary of Paint
Terms". Any deficiencies in the applied coat shall be rectified to the
satisfaction of the Engineer before the application of a subsequent coat. The
finished system shall have an even and uniform appearance.
Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer, 1 no. Stripe Coat shall be
applied over all welds and fasteners including washers and to all external
corners excepting those of RHS members. The stripe coat shall be applied
over the primer.
Exposure Time for prepared steel surfaces and over-coating times for paints
shall be as follows:
(ii) Primed surfaces shall have the following coat applied within 7 days or
as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
(iii) Subsequent coats shall be applied within 14 days or such lesser time as
recommended by the paint manufacturer.
(9) Inspection
(1) General
Protective systems include grease and felt systems, grease packing and oil
systems.
The Contractor shall use the protective system as described in this Clause
for the existing suspension cables and hangers.
The protective system to the suspension cables and hangers shall include the
removal of existing protective system, either in whole or in part as indicated
in the contract, the preparation of the surfaces of the steel ropes, and the
application of the new protection system.
(b) A tar-felt sheet cover. The cover shall be fixed to prevent the entry of
water and shall be continuous spirally lapped in a method approved by
the Engineer.
The surfaces of the wire ropes shall be prepared by removing existing cover
in whole or in part as indicated in the contract, then cleaning the exposed
surface of the wire ropes to remove dirt, hardened grease and surface rust.
Broken or rusted wires and other damages shall be brought to the attention
of the Engineer before any further work is carried out on the affected area.
(4) Protective System for Bearings, Inside Cable Saddles, Hanger Saddles
and Hanger Sockets
Oil of an approved make shall be applied to all pins of top and bottom
hangers and bridge bearings. Cracks around any pins or bearing or plates
shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer before any further work is
carried out on the affected area.
The Contractor shall make good any damage to the original protective
system arising from his execution of the works.
(a) General
The work on the steel bearings comprises the repositioning of the free
roller bearings and the re-setting of the fixed bearings in the Bridges.
In the course of these operations jacking up of the bridge shall be
required to the method as provided or as directed by the Engineer. To
re-set the fixed bearings at their correct vertical load, additional
jacking operations shall be necessary at the free bearing location to
determine the magnitude of the vertical load.
The Contractor shall make available to the Engineer the necessary
access and equipment for him to check, monitor and take
measurements throughout the jacking operations.
Any oil or grease on the plinth where bearings are to be re-set shall
be removed with an approved de-greasing compound which shall
then be rinsed off with clean water. All loose particles of concrete,
rust, any dust on the plinths shall be removed by suction or by
using a properly filtered oil-free airline.
(a) General
(ii) For cementitious bedding mortars, the sub-strate shall be flushed clean
with water two hours before placing and maintained wet until placing
commences.
Any free standing water on the surface of the sub-strate shall be removed
before placing the mortar. The underside of the base plate shall be clean and
free from loose rust and loose mill scale at the time of bedding.
(iii) For resinous bedding mortars the sub-strate shall be dry, free from
loose dirt and dust and shall meet the conditions specified by the
manufacturer. The underside of the base plate shall be clean and free
from loose rust and loose mill scale at the time of bedding.
The mortar shall be placed in its final position within one hour
from its time of discharge from the mixer or lesser period as
specified by the manufacturer.
Only full packs of mortar or sub-packs as presented by the
supplier shall be mixed On-site proportioning shall not be
permitted.
(i) Mortar shall not be used in the Works until it has been approved by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with copies of
the manufacturer's Specification.
The mortar for each flow test shall be batched in one load
strictly according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Flow tests shall be conducted between concrete and a rusty
steel plate at ambient temperature of 5°C. The flow
characteristics shall be assessed with the rusty steel plate on top,
and with the pre-cast concrete slab on the bottom. The surface
of the concrete slab shall be washed thoroughly with water and
all traces of surface water removed.
The size of the test apparatus is to represent the actual site
condition. The mortar shall be poured in one corner of the
apparatus until the level of the mortar has reached at least 10
mm above the underside of the top plate. After 24 hours the
top plate shall be removed and the exposed surface lightly
brushed with a stiff bristle brush to remove any surface skin
which may be covering voids. The bedding mortar formed
shall be free from significant voids, cracks and other defects, at
both 5°C and 20°C.
If difficulty is experienced in achieving a satisfactory flow for
cementitious mortars the water content of the mix shall be
adjusted and the test described above repeated. The mortar
shall be rejected if further adjustments of the water content do
not produce an acceptable result
(iii) Compressive strength tests for cem1entitious bedding mortars shall be
carried out on the 100 mm cubes prepared, cast and cured at
temperatures given in Table 27.3. The mortar used for strength tests
and all subsequent testing shall have the same water content, as
determined from the flow tests and approved by the Engineer. There
shall be no compaction.
(iv) Compressive strength tests for resinous bedding mortars shall comply
with BS 6319: Part 2 and shall be carried out on six 40 mm cubes as
shown in Table 27.4.
2716. MEASUREMENT
The Measurement for minor repairs of defective concrete shall be made in cubic
meters. Measurement for replacement concrete shall be made in cubic meters.
Measurement for sealing cracks and injection shall be made by weight (in kg) of
epoxy consumed for grouting. Provision of nipples required for grouting shall be
measured in numbers.
2717. PAYMENT
Page No.
2801 SCOPE 28-1
2802 PROVISION OF SEEDS 28-1
2803 PROVISION OF PLANT CUTTINGS 28-3
2804 NURSERY CONSTRUCTION 28-8
2805 NURSERY OPERATION AND MANAGEMENT 28-12
2806 FINAL SLOPE PREPARATION FOR BIO-ENGINEERING 28-16
2807 SITE PLANTING AND SOWING 28-18
2808 JUTE NETTING WORKS 28-30
2809 GABION WIRE BOLSTERS, SUB-SOIL DRAINS AND WIRE
NETTING 28-33
2810 SITE PROTECTION 28-37
2811 SITE AFTERCARE AND MAINTENANCE 28-39
SECTION 2800 –ENGINEERING WORKS
2801. SCOPE
The Contractor shall provide or collect seeds of the required species and
quantities in accordance with the requirements described hereafter, as and when
required. He shall supply all necessary expertise, resources and facilities to
ensure that these requirements are met in full. It shall be ensured that the seed is
of a high quality.
The Engineer shall give indications as to the expected amounts of seeds required
and the time of availability. But it shall be the Contractor responsibility to ensure
that adequate quantities of seeds are obtained in a timely manner.
The weight to be specified shall be for sun-dried seeds separated completely from
fruiting bodies and other unwanted parts, and ready for storage and subsequent
sowing. There is usually large discrepancy between this weight and that of the
freshly collected, untreated fruits.
Should the Contractor be unable to supply the specified seeds, the advice of the
Engineer should be sought. The Engineer may approve other substitute species, if
found appropriate. Seed shall not be obtained commercially without the
Engineer’s written authority.
(b) If the Engineer does not specify the species, then the current approved
list of bio-engineering plants, as determined by the Geo-
Environmental Unit of the Department of Roads shall be referred to.
(e) Seeds shall only be collected when fully ripe. Seeds collected early
shall not be accepted. The Contractor shall be held liable if the
germination rate of seeds is lower than 70%.
(g) Seeds shall be stored in a cool, dry, ventilated building with adequate
precautions taken against pests. Containers shall be raised above the
floor. They shall not be kept in the same building in which materials
like cement, or any chemicals, fuels or lubricants are stored. Grass
shall be stored in bags made of cotton. Seeds shall be carefully
inspected on a weekly basis to ensure that there is no deterioration or
mould formation, or pest attack. Seeds shall only be stored after they
have been properly dried in the sun beforehand.
(b) If the Engineer does not specify the species, then the current approved
list of bio-engineering plant, as determined by the Geo-Environmental
Unit of Department of Roads shall be referred to.
(f) Seeds shall only be collected when fully ripe. Seeds collected early
shall not be accepted. The Contractor shall be held liable if the
germination rate of seeds is lower than 80%.
(g) Immediately after collection, seeds shall be separated from fruit by the
method normally used by farmers and foresters for this purpose; this
shall depend on the individual species. Once separated, the seeds shall
be sun-dried before storage.
(h) Seeds shall be stored in a cool, dry, ventilated building with adequate
precautions taken against pests. Containers shall be raised above the
floor. They shall not be kept in the same building in which materials
like cement, or any chemicals, fuels or lubricants are stored. If kept in
sealed containers, the seeds shall be carefully inspected on a weekly
basis to ensure that there is no deterioration or mould formation or pest
attack. Seeds shall only be stored after they have been properly dried
in the sun beforehand.
If the Engineer does not specify the species, then the current approved list to bio-
engineering plants, as determined by the Geo-Environmental Unit of the
Department of Roads shall be referred to.
(1) Provision of Grass Cutting
(a) Cuttings of various types shall be taken from grass species, which are
known to propagate.
(c) Apart from the clumps, which are dugs up to make cutting, the
contractor shall under no circumstances damage other plants. The
Contractor shall be responsible for making all necessary arrangements
with landowners, farmers and the local District Forest Office, as
applicable before the making of hardwood cuttings.
(d) The type of cuttings to be made shall depend on the species and shall
be as shown in Table 28.1. If the species used is not listed here, then
the latest technical information provided by the Geo-Environmental
Unit shall be consulted. If the species is still not covered, then stem
and root slip cuttings shall be used.
(e) Where roots are required for the cuttings, grass clumps shall be
carefully dug up. They shall not be pulled hard so as to damage the
material. They shall be separated carefully by hand, using a sharp
khukuri or knife where necessary. There shall be no tearing of the
plant fabric.
(f) Stem cutting shall be made using sharp secateurs or khukuri. The tip
cut shall be made at right angles to the stem and the bottom cut shall
be made at 45o C to the stem.
(g) Once cuttings have been made, they shall be wrapped in wet hessian
jute immediately. At all times, cuttings shall be kept moist and as cool
as possible, and shall be wrapped in wet hessian between all operations
such as digging out of the ground, splitting out, trimming and planting.
If the hessian jute is not easily available, the cuttings shall be covered
with the thick blanket of off-cut part of vegetation such as Titepati and
Banmara. For this prior approval of the Engineer shall be required.
Under any circumstances, all cuttings shall be planted the same day
that they are made.
(2) Provision
(a) Hardwood cuttings shall be taken from shrubs and trees species which
are known to propagate easily by vegetative means.
(d) Hardwood cuttings shall be made from stems which are between 6 and
18 months old. Materials outside this range shall not be used. The
Contractor shall be held liable if the success rate of cuttings is lower
than 70%.
(e) Hardwood cutting shall be made using sharp secateurs or a sharp saw.
The top cut shall be made at right angles to the stem and the bottom
cut shall be made at 45° to the stem. Under no circumstances shall
there be any damage to the bark of the cutting.
(f) Hardwood cuttings, which are to be planted in the nursery for later
multiplication, shall be normally 150 to 200 mm in length and 20 to 30
mm in diameter. This size shall not be exceeded for the majority of
species unless specified or approved by the Engineer.
(j) All trunchen cuttings shall be covered with long mulch during
transportation and storage. Under any circumstances, all cuttings shall
be planted within two days that they are made.
(c) The Contractor shall be responsible for taking safety precautions and
for making all necessary arrangements with landowners, farmers and
the local District Forest Office, as applicable, before making of
cuttings. The traditional method which will require to take the whole
culm and mother rhizome may eradicate the further development of
clump. In this case, the contractor shall be responsible to make aware
of such probability to the owner before taking the rhizomes from such
clump. However, if the sourcing clumps are growing on steep slopes,
the contractor shall not take more than 10% culm from the sourcing
clump.
(d) The type of cuttings to be made which depend on the species shall be
as shown in Table 28.2. Single node culm cuttings or traditional
rhizome cuttings shall be made from the culm which are between 2-3
years old. Materials outside this range shall not be used without the
prior approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall be held liable if
the success rate of single node culm cuttings is lower than 60% and in
the case of or rhizome cuttings not surviving 100%.
(e) Single node cuttings shall be made using sharp log saw. The top and
bottom cut shall be made at right angles to the stem. Under no
circumstances shall there be any damage to the bud and internode
section of culm.
(f) The rhizome cuttings shall be made using sharp log saw, axe and
secateurs.
(g) Once cuttings have been made, they shall be wrapped in wet hessian
jute immediately. At all times, cuttings shall be kept moist and as cool
as possible, and shall be wrapped in wet hessian between all operations
such as taking from the parent plant, transporting and planting. Under
any circumstances, all cuttings must be planted within two days of that
they are made.
(h) Measurement and Payment: Measurement of bamboo cuttings shall be
made on the basis of actual numbers of cuttings prepared, counted on
site and accepted. The quantities thus measured shall be paid at the
unit rate shown in the Bill of Quantities. Such payment shall be the
full and the final compensation to the Contractor for all arrangements
for purchasing of bamboo and preparation of cuttings and providing
the cuttings as per the Specifications.
The Contractor shall provide nurseries to contribute stocks of grasses, shrubs and
trees for planting operations as required by the Engineer. This shall be done
according to the specifications described hereunder, as and when required by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall supply all necessary expertise, resources and
facilities to ensure that these requirements are met.
The Contractor shall note that the establishment and effective operation of plant
nurseries is a skilled business requiring experienced and trained staff. These
specifications alone do not provide all the information needed to set up and run
nurseries. The Contractor shall seek the advice of specialist agencies and shall
refer to the large number of reference books available on the subject.
The purpose of a nursery shall be to supply good quality, healthy plants of the
correct type and species at the precise time they are required.
(a) The Contractor shall provide nursery facilities adequat9 to supply all
of the stock required for planting operations. Alternatively, he may
procure planting stock from elsewhere at the time of site planting,
provided it is of a standard acceptable to the Engineer and as described
hereunder.
(b) In selecting a site for a nursery, if not instructed by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall fulfil the following requirements.
(vi) Nurseries shall have a weather- and pest-proof office cum seed
store and proper storage facilities for seed. Seed shall be kept
cool, dry and in sealed containers, as-specified in Sub-clauses
2802 (1) and 2802 (2).
(x) There shall be adequate space in each nursery location for all
operations to be performed in the cycle of work. In particular,
all plants shall be spaced out periodically as they grow and
there shall be adequate bed area to accommodate them.
(2) Construction of Nursery Beds
(b) There shall be paths around all beds to ensure the best possible access
for operations such as weeding and watering.
(c) Table 28.3 summarises the construction details of the five main bed
types, which are described in full in paragraphs (d) to (h).
(e) Bare root beds shall be constructed to hold seedlings transplanted from
the seed beds. These can be of any practical length but shall be flat
and of 1200 mm base width and 1000 mm of top width on compacted
and a cambered ground. They shall rise to a height of 200 mm above
the surrounding ground. They shall be made up as follows: 50 mm of
washed gravel is placed above the ground; then 50 mm of 1:1 mix of
soil and compost; and the bed is topped with 150 mm of 3:1 mix of
fertile, loamy forest topsoil and washed sand. All sieving shall be
done with a mesh size of 2 mm or smaller.
(f) Seed beds shall be made very carefully for germinating small seeds of
shrubs and trees. These can be of any practical length but shall be flat
and of one metre in width on compacted and a cambered ground.
They shall rise to a height of 170 mm above the surrounding ground
and provided with shadings as per the details given in the following
paragraph (i). They shall be made up as follows: 50 mm of washed
gravel placed on the ground; then 50 mm of unsieved forest soil; 50
mm of 1:3 mix of forest soil and washed sand; and the bed is topped
with 20 mm of washed, and sterilised sand. All sieving shall be done
with a mesh size of 2 mm.
(h) Beds for the propagation of bamboo culm cuttings and stool cuttings
of trees and shrubs, shall be made specially. These can be of any
practical length but shall be flat and of 1000 mm width at top and 1200
mm width at bottom. They shall rise to a height of 300 mm above the
surrounding ground. They shall be made up as follows: the ground
below the bed is dug to a depth of 300 mm; the bed itself is then made
with 100 mm of unsieved soil on the original surface, and 200 mm of
soil above this. All soil sieving shall be done with a mesh size of 2
mm or smaller. Finally, a bund of 100 mm high shall be formed
around the edge.
(i) Shades shall be constructed over the beds and kept in position over
delicate seedlings during hours of intense sunlight, according to need.
Shades shall be 900 to 1200 mm above the ground, and angled so as to
be effective for as much of the day as possible (ie with the lower side
to the south). Bamboo strips laced together with nylon string are
particularly suitable in most cases; but over tree and shrub seed beds,
thatched shades with a polythene lining shall be used.
(3) Measurement and Payment: Work to be measured shall be the actual top
area in sq.m of beds constructed on site and accepted. Only the finished
area of the beds shall be considered after the completion of its shades.
However, despite the fact that shades will be covering larger area than the
beds, the final measurement shall be governed by the area of the top of the
bed for payment. The payment shall be the full and the final compensation
to the Contractor for providing all materials to be incorporated, ail labour,
tools, equipment and incidentals to complete the works of Nursery
establishment and construction of Nursery beds as per these Specifications.
(a) The contractor shall operate the nursery according to a high standard. The
nursery shall be staffed well tended at all times. It shall be maintained in
clean, tidy and efficient manner at all times. Plants shall always be healthy
and vigorous.
(d) Watering, as required for good plant growth, shall be carried out regularly in
the cool of the evening between sunset and dusk. The Contractor shall
ensure that the soil in all beds is kept moist but not saturated at all times.
Beds shall be kept moist even when empty, so that the soil is kept in good
condition.
(f) Measurement and Payment: The basis of measurement shall be the actual
numbers of plants counted, certified and accepted by the Engineer.
Quantities measured as above shall be paid at the unit rates entered in the
Bill of Quantities. Such payment shall be the full and the final
compensation to the Contractor for executing all the works as specified in
these Specifications.
(b) Where grass seeding is required in the nursery, finely sieved fertile soil
mixed with clean sand to a texture of sandy loam shall be placed in
beds before the seeds are sown. Seeds shall be covered with a sheet of
hessian jute until they have germinated, then it shall be carefully
removed. Watering of fresh seedlings shall be done by a fine spray
and not by the rose of a watering can.
(e) Every two to three months, all grasses shall be lifted from the beds,
split carefully and replanted. It is normal that, once split out, three
times the previous bed area is required. This is a standard practice to
bulk up the supply of planting stock without having to degrade the
natural vegetation cover in the region of the nursery.
(f) Measurement and payment: The basis of measurement shall be the
actual area of live grasses covered surfaces in sq.m. Quantities
measured as above shall be paid at the unit rates entered in the Bill of
Quantities. Such payment shall be considered the full and the final
compensation to the Contractor for executing all the works as specified
in these Specifications.
(a) Trees and shrubs shall be seeded either in seed beds or directly in
polythene pots ("polypots"). Finely sieved fertile soil mixed with
clean sand to a texture of sandy loam shall be placed in well shaded
beds for seeding. Watering of fresh seedlings shall be by a fine spray,
and not by the rose of a watering can.
(c) Roots protruding from the bottom of pots shall be pruned with a razor
blade on regular basis which shall not exceed weekly and may need to
be more frequent. Protruding roots shall never be allowed to become
more than 25 mm in length.
(d) When polypot seedlings begin to compete with each other for light,
they shall be re- spaced as required. This would typically mean
doubling the bed space occupied by the plants.
(e) To be acceptable for planting on site, trees and shrubs shall be healthy,
vigorous and showing no signs of damage, wilt, irregular growth,
fungal or pest attack, or nutrient disorders. They shall be at least 300
mm in height above soil surface level and of good form. The roots
shall be in good condition and there should be no signs of disturbance
to the soil in the polythene pot, even after transport to site.
(c) Cuttings shall be planted 300 mm apart in holes slightly larger than
their diameter. They shall be placed at such a depth that only one bud
remains above the soil surface (ie about 30 mm of the cutting).
(d) When plants compete with each other for light, they shall be cut back
as necessary.
(e) To be acceptable for planting on site, trees and shrubs produced in this
way must be healthy, vigorous and showing no signs of damage, wilt,
irregular growth, fungal or pest attack, or nutrient disorders. They
shall be at least 500 mm in height above soil surface level and of good
form.
(a) The Contractor shall be responsible for extracting plants from nursery
beds and preparing them ready for transport. They shall be extracted
from the beds only on the morning that they are required for planting
on site.
(b) Plants shall be hardened off, starting at least two weeks before they are
to be taken out of the nursery. This process shall require a gradual
reduction in the amount of watering and shading. The aim is to
prepare them for transfer to a much more hostile location.
(c) The night before the plants are to be lifted, they shall be thoroughly
watered. This is to make the soil softer and ease the business of
extracting the roots.
(d) Plants growing in soil beds shall be carefully lifted from the soil.
There shall be no pulling of stems or roots, but they shall be dug out
and extracted with no strain on any part of the plant.
(e) Plants from soil beds shall be wrapped in wet hessian jute. Hardwood
plants shall have a ball of soil around the roots. Grass clumps can
have most of the soil shaken or washed off.
(f) Polypot seedlings shall be lifted and stacked neatly in metal or wooden
trays. They shall always be lifted by the pot and never by the stem or
leaves.
(g) All plants shall to be kept moist, in a cool, shady place, until they are
loaded for transport to site. In the vehicle, they shall not be stacked
high. For transport on rough roads, they shall be packed in carefully
so that they do not fall over or roll around. The vehicle shall be
shaded.
(a) The Contractor shall produce compost and mulch for nursery or site
operations. It shall be produced in a timely manner, in the quantities
required. Compost is normally required to sustain the long term
fertility of nursery beds. Mulch may also be used in the nursery, but
normally produced to enhance site planting works, particularly the
direct seeding of grass.
(b) Compost and mulch shall be made from annual and perennial weeds of
poor rooting characteristics, such as ban mara (Eupatorium
adenopherum) and tite pate (Artemesia vulgans). The greenery shall
be collected when there is most material available but before it forms
seeds. This is most often in Shrawan and Bhadra.
(d) Both compost and mulch shall be kept moist but not waterlogged and
in an aerated condition. They shall be completely turned once a month
on a regular schedule. Compost can have cow manure mixed in to
assist the process of decomposition.
(e) Neither compost nor mulch shall be applied until they are fully rotted.
By this time they shall be black and the parts of individual plants shall
be indistinguishable. Early application shall not be allowed as this can
lead to a nutrient loss in the soil if microbes extract nitrogen to
decompose the added organic material.
(a) The Contractor shall prepare slopes for planting operations as required by
the engineer. This shall be done according to the specifications described
hereunder, as and when required. The Contractor shall supply all necessary
expertise, resources and facilities to ensure that these requirements are met.
(b) In the course of all slope preparation works, it shall be essential that no
damage is done to existing vegetation unless the Engineer's instruction
specifically requires certain plants to be removed.
(d) As slope trimming business can be dangerous and risky to personnel, the
Contractor shall be responsible to ensure the safety of his/her and Client's
personnel while putting in the dangerous situation. It shall be essential to
have the minimum of safety measures as listed below for a working gang of
10 people. The proportion of the safety harness shall be increased according
to the requirements and labours employed on site.
The Contractor shall provide all safety measures as listed in Table 28.4 for his/her
workers who will be on site and Employer's personnel who will be supervising the
work within the Contractor's working premises.
(b) All the construction work shall be checked prior to slope trimming.
The site shall be clear of people and equipment.
(d) The Contractor shall ensure that the slope under instruction is trimmed
to a straight angle, according to the Engineer's instructions. Cut slopes
to be planted with grass shall normally be 3 vertical: 2 horizontal,
unless otherwise shown on the Drawing or instructed by the Engineer.
In any event, a straight profile shall be obtained. Concavities shall
filled with well compacted material or dry stone dentition as instructed
by the Engineer. Convexities shall be removed and it shall be ensured
that the general profile does not have a shape giving over-steep
segments
(e) All loose material shall be removed from the slope and tipped
elsewhere in an approved location.
(a) The objective of the final preparation of fill slopes shall be to produce
a surface adequately prepared for shrub or tree planting or grass
sowing, or a combination of these. Vegetation shall be used to provide
a strong surface cover. Vegetation shall be planted over a well
prepared surface. The slope shall not be subject to any undue stress
from erosion and mass movement in its initial stages.
(b) The Contractor shall ensure that the slope under instruction is trimmed
to a straight angle, according to the Drawing or instruction of the
Engineer. In any event, a straight profile shall be obtained. All
masses of loose debris, especially where it has previously been tipped
at the head of the slope, shall be removed. Concavities shall be filled
with well compacted material or dry stone dentition as shown on the
Drawing or instructed by the Engineer. Convexities shall also be
removed and it shall be ensured that the general profile does not have a
shape giving over-steep segments.
(c) All loose material shall be removed from the slope and tipped
elsewhere in an approved location.
(a) The Contractor shall plant or sow grasses, shrubs and trees as shown on the
Drawing or required by the Engineer. This shall be done according to the
specifications described hereunder, as and when required. The Contractor
shall supply all necessary expertise, resources and facilities to ensure that
these requirements are met.
(b) Due to the nature of bio-engineering works, they may also be undertaken by
small local contractors with a range of agricultural skills, if so provided in
the Contract. If provided in the Contract, any bio-engineering site activity
may also be managed by direct employees of the Division Road Office.
(c) It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all planting stock,
whether provided from a nursery under a separate contract or through a
separate instruction, is of high quality and is vigorous enough to grow on the
site to be planted.
(d) All seeds and other planting stock shall be of species indigenous to Nepal
unless otherwise specified. All species shall be covered in the current
approved lists of species produced from time to time by the Geo-
Environmental Unit of the Department of Roads. They shall be appropriate
for the precise site conditions in which they are to be planted and the
Contractor shall ensure that they apply to the specific altitude and other
environmental characteristics of the site in question.
(e) Activities such as planting and seed sowing shall be carried out within the
critical few weeks when they will yield the desired results. All other
operations shall be carried out in a timely manner to permit this to happen.
The Contractor shall be responsible to keep works to the strict schedule
required and under no circumstances to permit delays.
(a) The Contractor shall be required to carry out the sowing of grass seeds
according to the Engineer's specific instructions.
(b) If the site for sowing is to be prepared under a separate contract, then it
shall be assumed that the site will already have been prepared for seed
sowing. Nevertheless, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
ensure that the condition of the site is good enough for the successful
establishment of grasses.
(c) The Contractor shall be required to supervise all field operations very
closely. The sowing of grass seeds is a delicate business and shall be
approached in the same way as for agricultural crops. The Contractor
shall employ experienced agricultural labourers for this work.
(d) If seeds have to be provided under a separate contract, then they shall
be properly stored. However, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility
to check that it has been carefully stored and remains fully viable.
(f) A cover of 25 grammes of grass seed per square metre of surface shall
be achieved unless otherwise specified.
(g) After sowing, a mulch of prepared and dried cut herbs shall be laid
over the whole seeded area in a thin layer. If the mulch is too thick it
will prevent light from getting to the seed and will inhibit germination.
Herbs suitable for this and locally available in large quantities are:
(h) If specified, the mulch should be secured with jute netting of mesh size
300x 500 mm and the netting fixed in place using suitable live pegs or
hardwood cuttings (eg Simali, Vitex negundo) at one metre centres.
(a) The Contractor shall be required to carry out the sowing of shrub and
tree seeds according to the Engineer's specific instructions.
(b) It is assumed that the site will already have been prepared for seed
sowing, if this item has to be executed under a separate contract.
Nevertheless, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure
that the condition of the site is good enough for the successful
establishment of shrubs and trees.
(c) The Contractor shall be required to supervise all field operations very
closely. As the sowing of any seeds is a delicate business and,
therefore, shall be approached in the same way as for agricultural
crops. The Contractor shall employ experienced agricultural labourers
for this work.
(d) Seed shall have been collected and stored well before the time of
sowing, if they have to be supplied under a separate contract.
However, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to check that it has
been carefully stored and remains fully viable.
(e) Sowing shall start at the top of the slope and the labourers shall work
downwards. Care shall be taken not to disturb areas already seeded.
(f) To sow the seeds, a small hole shall be made in the slope. The tool
used to do this shall depend on the size of the seed. For some seeds, a
piece of gabion wire will be adequate; for others, a piece of mild steel
with a flattened end is required. The hole shall be in the best soil
available but if there is little real soil, then a crevice between two
stones is acceptable. Two seeds should be placed in each hole and a
covering of soil or whatever fines are available shall be placed over
them. This covering shall never exceed 10 mm and shall preferably be
about 5 mm; it shall never be less than and this. Seeds shall be placed
at 200 to 250 mm centres, as ground conditions dictate.
(g) In some cases the seed can be broadcast starting at the top of the site
and working down slope as evenly as possible so that the whole site is
lightly covered. This shall be used where the site is still active and
only warrants minimum expenditure, or where the site is naturally
rough, providing plenty of niches in which the seed can catch.
Quantities of seed shall depend on the type of seed involved but are
generally half that of the quantities used in the nursery unless
otherwise instructed by the Engineer. With utis (Alnus nepalensis)
seed it shall be at a rate of 1 gramme of seed per square metre.
(a) The Contractor shall be required to carry out the planting of grass
seedlings or rooted the cuttings, according to the Engineer's specific
instructions. The configuration of planting shall be determined
according to individual site conditions. It shall be either random,
contoured or downslope, as instructed by the Engineer.
(b) It is assumed that the site shall already have been prepared for planting,
if this is to be prepared under a separate contract. Nevertheless, it shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the condition of
the site is good enough for the successful establishment of grasses, and
accords with the specifications given in Clause 2806.
(c) Using appropriate tools (such as tape measures and spirit levels),
planting lines shall be marked out with string as required. Unless
specified differently, the row spacing to be marked out shall be as
shown in Table 28.5.
(d) The Contractor shall be required to supervise all field operations very
closely. Since the planting of grass slips is a delicate business and
therefore shall be approached in the same way as the transplanting of
millet seedlings. The Contractor shall employ this experienced
agricultural labourers for this work.
(e) The plants supplied to the Contractor from nursery (if so provided in
the Contract) shall be prepared for planting by the Contractor as given
below. The Contractor shall transport them from the nursery wrapped
in hessian jute. At all times, plants shall be kept moist and as cool as
possible, and should be wrapped in wet hessian between all operations
such as extraction from the bed, pruning and planting. Under any
circumstances, all plants supplied shall be planted within two days of
that they are lifted from the nursery.
(f) Grass slips or cutting shall be carefully separated from the clumps to
give the maximum viable planting material. Preparation of slips,
cuttings or rhizomes shall be strictly followed as mentioned in Sub-
clause 2803 (1).
(g) Planting shall be started at the top of the slope and under no
circumstances shall new plants be walked on or otherwise disturbed.
Using a small bar (usually made of mild steel and with a flattened end),
a hole shall be made that is just big enough for the roots. The slip or
cutting is inserted; care shall be taken that the roots are not tangled or
bent back to the surface. Soil shall then be replaced around the roots
and firmed with the fingers. The spacing of plants within rows shall
be 100 mm unless otherwise specified. Two grass slips shall be
planted in each drill.
(h) If the soil is dry and there is no rain within 16 to 24 hours of planting,
the site shall be watered carefully with a fine spray. The Contractor
shall be required to water for the first two weeks after planting in the
event of inadequate rainfall.
(i) If it provided in the Contract that the plants are to be collected from
locations other than nurseries then utmost care shall be taken to
minimise disruption to neighbouring land, in the event that species are
collected from areas surrounding the road. It shall be the Contractor's
responsibility to collect the stock required from a wide area and not to
give rise to any soil erosion through the excessive removal of plants in
one locality.
(j) Measurement and Payment: The measurement shall be the actual area
of grass planted and covered surface in square meters for the random
planting and any other patterns of planting up to the 300 mm between
the lines. The contour line planting in 500-1000 mm in any slopes
shall be measured in linear meter. The payment shall be the full and
final compensation to the Contractor for making arrangements for
traffic control, providing grass slips or rhizome, collection of mulch,
all labour, tools, equipment, safety harness and incidentals to complete
the work as per these Specifications. If the grass slips and mulch are
supplied through a separate contract, costs for the supply of the same
shall not be included herein. However, if the Contractor is responsible
for the supply slips and mulch, no separate payment shall be made for
these items.
(b) It is assumed that the site will already have been prepared for planting
if it has to be prepared under a separate contract. Nevertheless, it shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the condition of
the site is good enough for the successful establishment of delicate
young plants.
(d) The Contractor shall be required to supervise all field operations very
closely. As the planting of trees and shrubs is a delicate business and
should be approached in the same way as the planting of horticultural
seedlings. The Contractor shall employ experienced agricultural or
forestry labourers for this work.
(e) If the plants are to be supplied to the Contractor from a nursery under a
separate contract, they will be ready for planting. They shall be at
least 300 mm in height above the soil surface and hardened off in the
normal way. The Contractor shall collect the plants from the nursery
and transport them to site with all due care. The plants will normally
be supplied in polythene pots, which shall not be removed until the
moment of planting. Plants shall be lifted by the pots, never by the
stem or leaves. At all times they are to be kept as cool as possible.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the soil around
the roots does not dry out. Under any circumstances, all plants
supplied must be planted within three days of removal from the
nursery.
(f) Planting shall be started at the top of the slope and under no
circumstances shall new plants be walked on or otherwise disturbed.
(g) A planting pit wide and deep enough for the main root to be buried in
without bending it and wide enough for all the roots and surrounding
soil ball shall be made at the time of planting. Some compost if
available shall be mixed with the soil from the slit prior to backfilling
around the roots. The polythene pot must be removed from the
seedling by cutting it away with a razor blade. The plant should then
be carefully placed into the hole, the compost and soil packed in, and
all surrounding soil firmed up, taking care not to cause any damage to
the plant or its roots. The surface over and around the pit shall then be
mulched using any appropriate, locally available material, such as
manure, compost, dead leaves or cut herbage. The use of freshly cut
ban mara (Eupatorium adenophorum) shall be avoided, since it can
resprout from the buds after being cut.
(h) The Engineer may specify bigger seedlings for specific areas, such as
those to be used intensively for amenity purposes. These will
normally have been growing in a nursery for at least a year and should
have well developed roots as well as aerial parts. They will be
provided either as bare root stock with a substantial root ball, or in pots
of a minimum of 100 x 180 mm laid flat dimensions. When these
larger seedlings are planted, the pits shall be of 300 mm diameter and
300 mm depth. In addition, well-rotted compost shall be mixed with
the soil backfill in a ratio of at least one part compost to ten parts soil.
(a) Certain trees and shrubs can be planted on site by means of hard wood
cuttings. Where these are specified, the Contractor shall be required to
carry out the planting of cuttings as required in the Engineer's
instructions.
(b) It is assumed that the site will already have been prepared for planting,
if it is to be prepared under a separate contract. Nevertheless, it shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the condition of
the site is good enough for the successful establishment of delicate
young plants.
(d) The Contractor shall be required to supervise all field operations very
closely. The planting of tree and shrub cuttings is a delicate business
and shall be approached in the same way as the planting of
horticultural cuttings (e.g. those of tea). The Contractor shall employ
experienced agricultural or forestry labourers for this work.
(f) Planting shall be started at the top of the slope and under no
circumstances shall new plants be walked on or otherwise disturbed.
Using a small bar (usually made of mild steel and with a pointed end),
a hole shall be made that is just big enough for the cutting. The cutting
shall be inserted and the soil shall be replaced around it and firmed
with the fingers. The cutting shall be inserted to depth such that two-
thirds to three-quarters of it is buried.
(g) If the soil is dry and there is no rain within 16 to 24 hours of planting,
the site shall be watered carefully with a fine spray. The Contractor
shall be required to water for the first two weeks after planting in the
event of inadequate rainfall.
(i) The Engineer may specify bigger cuttings for specific areas, using
large truncheon cuttings. In this category fall chuletro (Brassaiopsis
hainla), dabdabe (Garuga pinnata), kavro (Ficus lacory, phaledo
(Erythrina species), ghurbis (Leucosceptrum canum) and Gliricidia
sepium. Cuttings of these species should planted at 1000 mm centres
burring upto 500 mm. A large crowbar shall be used to make the
planting hole, but otherwise the technique shall be as described above
for smaller cuttings. Under no circumstances shall these cuttings be
hammered into the ground.
(b) It is assumed that the site will already have been prepared for planting,
if it has to be prepared under a separate contract. Nevertheless, it shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the condition of
the site is good enough for the successful establishment of delicate
young plants.
(f) The Contractor shall be required to supervise all field operations very
closely. The planting of tree and shrub cuttings is a delicate business
and shall be approached in the same way as the planting of
horticultural cuttings (e.g. those of tea). The Contractor shall employ
experienced agricultural or forestry labourers for this work.
(g) Planting shall always be started at the top of the slope and under no
circumstances shall new plants be walked on or otherwise disturbed.
(i) Brush layering on the landslide debris shall be planted as given below,
unless specified differently.
(iii) Cuttings shall then be placed into the terrace at 100 mm centres,
the correct way up and angled so that they are at rightangles to
the maximum slope angle. All cuttings shall be inserted to a
depth such that two-thirds of their length is buried.
(ii) Starting at one end and using a small bar (usually made of mild
steel and with a pointed end), a hole shall be made that is just
big enough for the first cutting. The cutting shall be inserted
and the soil shall be replaced around it and firmed with the
fingers. The cutting shall be the correct way up and angled so
that it is vertical. The cutting shall be inserted to a depth such
that two-thirds of it is buried.
(iii) This process shall be repeated along the entire line, with a
series of cuttings placed at 50 mm centres,
(v) The soil around the single or double line shall then be
completely backfilled into any remaining gaps and gently
compacted. Any loose or excess material shall be cleared
down the slope before the next line is planted.
(iv) Cuttings shall then be laid along each trench, so that they lie
horizontally along the trench. There shall be a minimum of six
cuttings together. They shall be overlapped so that no two ends
coincide. All the small branches growing from the main
branch shall be protruding on slope. Under no circumstances,
the branches and buds shall be damaged. The cuttings shall
then be tied using jute or coir (coconut fibre) string at 500 mm
intervals to form a bundle. As the fascine is created, it thereby
forms a continuous bundle right across the slope.
(v) The trench shall then be backfilled and gently compacted. The
top of the fascine shall be 50 to 100 mm below the surface.
Any loose or excess material shall be cleared down the slope
before the next line is planted.
(vi) The Engineer may specify that orientations other than along the
contour of the slope are used. In this event, the Contractor
shall alter the laying out of lines accordingly and meet the
precise angle required.
(b) Levels of fertiliser application shall vary according to soil type and
nutritional content. However, if nutritional data are not available, the
following figures shall be used as a rough guide:
Table 28.6 below lists the chemical composition and percentage of the
major plant nutrient elements in the chemical fertilisers commonly available
in Nepal.
(a) The Contractor shall provide and install jute netting as shown on the
Drawing or as required by the Engineer. This shall be done according to the
specifications described hereunder, as and when required. The Contractor
shall supply all necessary expertise, resources and facilities to ensure that
these requirements are met.
(b) The Engineer may instruct that jute jetting applications be used in
conjunction with other or the techniques, particularly the sowing or planting
of grasses. In this event, the netting shall be applied before the plants are
introduced. When planting, the labourers shall take care only to hold or
stand on the pegs and not to disturb the netting except when carefully
placing grass seed underneath on the soil surface.
(i) Material: High quality, 100% natural jute fibre from the latest
harvest, properly treated and dried.
(c) The detailed specifications for wide mesh jute netting shall be as
follows. "Wide mesh" jute netting is used for holding much on to
slopes which have been sown with grass seed, (Note: warp ends are
the length-ways threads and weft strands are the cross-ways threads)
(i) Material: High quality, 100% natural jute fibre from the latest
harvest, properly treated and dried.
(a) The Engineer shall normally instruct the placement of standard jute
netting on slopes in excess of 45°. It is therefore very essential to place
the netting in an effective manner which fulfils the Engineer's purpose.
(b) It is assumed that the site will already have been prepared for the
application of jute netting, if it is to be prepared under a separate
contract. Nevertheless, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
to ensure that the condition of the site is good enough for the optimum
effect to be attained. In any event, a smooth profile must be obtained.
All loose debris shall be removed. Concavities shall be filled with
well compacted material or dry stone dentition as shown on the
Drawing or as instructed by the Engineer. Convexities shall also be
removed and it is essential that the general profile does not have a
shape giving over-steep segments.
(c) Starting at one end of top of the site to be treated, a roll of netting shall
be pegged 300 mm above the slope to be covered.
(d) The netting shall be rolled slowly down the slope. Hardwood cuttings,
ideally of simali (Vitex negundo) or pegs (usually made from split
bamboo culms) shall be hammered through the netting at 1000 mm
centres at 100 mm inside of each edges. They shall protrude about 80
mm on the slope. Labourers shall stand on these cuttings or pegs and
not hang on to the netting. As the full length of the jute netting is
unrolled down the slope, a second round of the pegs shall be added in
between. This will make total allowable spacing of not more than 500
mm interval. Another strip shall then be started to unroll from the top.
This shall overlap by 100 mm and under no circumstances the pegging
is done through the both layer of jute net instead it shall be pegged
separately. Each strip of jute netting shall be pegged down on the
slope individually.
(e) The tension of the netting shall now be reduced so that it hugs the
slope surface precisely. This is done by pulling up about 200 mm at
the bottom of the netting and hooking it on to the pegs a little higher
up. This process shall be repeated up and across the slope until the
netting rests snugly against the surface and is nowhere tight or pulled
away from the surface in minor concavities. Additional pegs shall be
used to hold netting closely against the face of concave slope segments
if necessary.
(f) This process shall be repeated until the entire slope surface is covered.
There shall be no lacing of any jute netting whatsoever.
(g) Finally, the bottom of the netting shall be trimmed to give a tidy finish.
(h) Measurement and Payment: As the actual quantity of jute net and area
covered on slope differ from each other due to the overlapping,
payment shall be made on the basis of final area covered on slope and
measured in square metre (not the quantity of jute net). The payment
shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor for
making arrangements for safety to traffics, purchasing of jute,
arrangement for looms and shades, fabrication of jute netting and
transportation to the site, all labour, tools, equipment, safety harnesses
and incidentals to complete the work as per these Specifications.
(a) In the case of wide mesh jute netting, it shall only be specified for use
on slopes which have already been treated with grass and mulch.
These shall usually be less than 45°. However, the process of placing
the netting shall be similar to that for standard netting.
(b) Unlike the standard mesh jute net, wide mesh jute net is available on
shorter length of 5.5 metres and smaller roll in nature. It shall be
opened by two people by two end laid flat (same as bed sheet is laid)
on seeded and mulched slope.
(c) The netting shall be pegged with hardwood cuttings, ideally of simali
(Vitex negundo) or pegs (usually made from split bmboo culms) at
every 500 mm intervals. The Contractor shall ensure that his/her
labourers do not damages the area of seeding and mulching while
placing the jute net.
(d) This process shall be repeated until the entire slope surface is covered.
The strips shall then laced together with lengths of the same jute yarn,
to form a continuous net. The lacing shall form joins every 500 mm or
less.
(e) The tension of the netting shall now be reduced so that it hugs the
slope precisely and hold the mulch firmly against the surface
throughout the area covered. Additional pegs shall be used to hold
netting closely against the face of concave slope segments.
(f) Finally, the bottom of the netting shall be trimmed to give a tidy finish.
(g) Measurement and Payment: The payment shall be made on the basis of
final area covered on slope and measured in square metre (not the
quantity of jute net). The payment shall be the full and the final
compensation to the Contractor for making arrangements for safety to
traffics, purchasing and transporting of jute net to the site, all labour,
tools, equipment, safety harnesses and incidentals to complete the
work as per these Specifications.
2809. GABION WIRE BOLSTERS, SUB-SOIL DRAINS AND WIRE NETTING
The contractor shall provide and install wire bolsters as shown on the Drawing or
instructed by the Engineer. This shall be done according to the specifications
described hereunder, as when required.
The Contractor shall supply all necessary expertise, resources and facilities to
ensure that these requirements are met.
(b) Weaving shall start from one of the long sides. A total of 83 coils of
wire shall be spaced evenly along the 5 metre length. This gives a
mesh width of about 60 mm. Each weave shall have three twists, as
for normal hexagonal mesh. This shall give a length of about 80 mm
to each mesh link. In any event, the mesh length shall not exceed 90
mm. The mesh shall be turned on to the larger frame wire at least one
and a half turns and made fully secure.
(c) Starting at the base of the area to be treated, and using appropriate
measuring equipment, exact lines shall be marked out. From 2 metres
above the base of the slope, a precise contour line shall be marked out
every 2 metres up the slope.
(d) Starting at the bottom, trenches with circular base shall be dug along
the lines, adequate to take the final 300 mm diameter tubes.
(e) Bolster panels shall then be laid along the trenches and shaped to fit
neatly into the base of the trenches, as well as into any curves formed
as a result of the slope contours; each panel shall be securely joined to
the next panel, to form a continuous bolster tube.
(f) The panels shall be packed with stones, closed over and the edges
wired together. All stones must be bigger than the mesh size. The
same care shall be taken as when filling a conventional gabion basket,
and stones must be carefully placed to give good structural integrity.
(g) The ends of the bolsters shall be closed over and wired together. The
trenches around all the bolsters shall then be filled and compacted with
material left from the excavations.
(h) Once all of the lines are in place, all surplus debris shall be cleaned off
the slope. Mild steel bars of at least 16 mm diameter shall then be
driven into the slope through lower sides of the contour bolsters.
These shall be at least every 2 metres along the lines. Bars shall be 1-2
metres in length on slopes composed of soft materials, but at the
Engineer's discretion, on slopes comprising hard rocky materials, bars
of 1 metre length shall also be adequate. All bars shall be driven home
until the tops protrude no more than 25 mm above the slope surface.
(d) Starting at the bottom, trenches with circular base shall be dug along
the lines, adequate to take the final 300 mm diameter tubes, or 600 mm
diameter tubes if large (5 x 2 metre) panels are specified.
(e) Bolster panels shall then be laid along the trenches and shaped to fit
neatly into the base of the trenches, as well as into any curves formed
as a result of the slope contours; the panels of the herringbones shall
be securely joined to the panels of the main bolster.
(f) The panels shall be gradually closed together and secured, working up
from the bottom of the slope, while stones are passed in from above to
fill them. The stones shall be randomly packed so as to allow free
drainage, and all stones shall be bigger than 100 mm. The same care
shall be taken when filling a conventional gabion basket, and stones
shall be carefully placed to give good structural integrity.
(g) The upper ends of the herringbones shall be closed over and wired
together; they should touch the ends of the next herringbones but shall
not be secured (hooked) to each other. The trenches around all the
bolsters shall then be filled and compacted with material left from the
excavations.
(h) Once all of the lines are in place, all surplus debris shall be cleaned off
the slope. Mild steel bars of at least 16 mm diameter shall then be
driven into the slope through the sides of the main spine bolsters and
the lower sides of the herringbone bolsters. These shall be at least
every 2 metres along the lines. Bars shall be 1-2 metres in length on
slopes composed of soft materials, but at the Engineer's discretion, on
slopes comprising hard rocky materials, bars of 1 metre length may be
adequate. All bars shall be driven home until the tops protrude no
more than 25 mm above the slope surface.
(i) Measurement and Payment: Bolster that are accepted by the Engineer
shall be measured in linear metre. The payment shall be the full and
the final compensation to the Contractor for making arrangements for
traffic control, fabrication of bolster panel including cost of wires,
collection and transportation of boulder/stone to the site, excavations
and fillings, boulder/stone packing, all wiring, supply and driving of
steel bars, all labour, tools, equipment, safety harnesses and incidentals
to complete the work as specified in these Specifications.
(4) Wire Netting
(a) Wire netting shall be a complete cover on the steep rocky slope where
heavily shattered rock face is eroding away by surface water. The site
shall be prepared as outlined in Clause 2806. A wire mesh panel,
normally larger than bolster, of 5 m x 5m shall be placed over the
slope and later plant will be grown to replace the wire netting.
(c) Starting at the top of the slope to be treated, wire netting shall be
placed securing well on to the slope. The wire net shall then be
stapled down with an "U" shaped hook.
(d) The hook shall be made of 16 mm diameter M/S rod and a minimum
of 1000 mm in length. The hook shall be driven hammering down
with the mason's hammer at 500 mm interval. This will be effective if
driven into the cracked joint. A shorter length may also be used if the
rocky face does not permit the bar, but the Engineer's approved and
instruction shall be obtained prior to taking a decision.
(e) The wire netting shall be well secured. If there are any minor
concavity and convexity, the wire shall be secured by hammering
down by mason's hammer. Additional staples could be used as
necessary. If some of the staples become weak and loose, they shall
be jammed with 1:4 cement sand mortar in slurry form.
(a) The Contractor shall protect a planted site for the period specified in the
Contract. Protection shall be shall include the prevention of damage to all
manner of site works and plants by people and domestic or wild animals. It
shall also include an active role in tending the plants and improving their
growth, as specified below.
(b) The period of maintenance/site protection shall be twelve months unless
otherwise specified in the Contract.
(b) Warden shall be mature and reliable characters who need little
supervision for the adequate fulfillment of their duties. They shall be
active and physically fit. Old people who are losing their strength
shall not be employed. They shall be experienced agricultural workers
familiar with caring for plants. They shall. remain on site through all
hours of daylight and through all adverse weather conditions. They
shall eat their meals on site and at no time leave the site untended for
any reason whatsoever.
(c) The role of the Warden shall be primarily to tend the plants. He/she
shall take the initiative in weeding, mulching, replanting failed plants,
pruning and protecting plants against all pests. This shall be an active
role requiring individuals with considerable energy and initiative. The
Warden shall work constantly to maintain and improve the site and its
bio-engineering plants.
(d) The Warden shall also be required to protect plants on the site from
damage by local people, domestic and wild animals. In doing this
he/she shall use a friendly approach to the people as far as possible.
The Contractor shall educate the Warden fully in the reasons for
his/her job, so that he/she can communicate with others. He/she also
shall have to fulfill an inevitable function as the ambassador between
the Department of Roads and local road neighbours.
(e) Measurement and Payment: Site Warden employed under the Contract
shall not be paid for separately. All costs associated with the
employment of warden as well as execution of works specified shall
be considered to be included in the item rate of "Site Aftercare and
Maintenance".
(a) The Contractor shall provide bamboo tree guards as shown on the
Drawing or specified in the Contract. This shall be done according to
the specification described hereunder, as and when required. The
Contractor shall supply all necessary supervision, resources and
facilities to ensure that these requirements are met.
(b) The bamboo strips used to make bamboo tree guards shall be made
from mal bans (Bambusa nutans subsp cupulata) whilst the uprights
are to be made from tharu or dhanu bans (Bambusa nutans subsp
nutans or Bambusa balcooa). Bamboo tree guards shall be a minimum
of 450 mm in diameter by 1300 mm in height so that they are able to
provide sufficient protection from grazing and from the elements for
the first 18 months after planting the seedling.
(c) The guard shall be made by cutting 5 bamboo posts which are a
minimum of 50 mm wide by 10 mm thick and at least 1600 mm long.
The posts shall be cut so that they have a strong spear-like point at the
bottom that can be driven into the ground when placing out on site.
The bamboo poles used to make the uprights shall be a minimum of 3
years old.
(a) Tree guards shall be installed on site at the time of planting, no later
than the second week of July, and shall be placed carefully around the
planted seedlings.
(b) The tree guards shall be placed over the seedling immediately after
planting. The upright posts shall be firmly driven at least 300 mm into
the ground so that the guard is able to resist bashing and rubbing from
cows, buffalo, goats and people. The woven slats shall be pushed
down firmly from the bottom upwards so that they touch one another
and are free from large gaps.
(c) Tree guards alone are not adequate protection for small plants. The
Contractor shall provide a site Warden in addition, for the time
specified, to maintain the tree guards and ensure that local people
respect them, and generally fulfil all the requirements of Sub-clause
2810 (1).
(d) Measurement and Payment: No separate payment shall be made for the
placement of the bamboo tree guards. All the associated costs shall be
deemed to be included in the relevant item rate for "Site Aftercare and
Maintenance".
(4) Fencing
(2) The Contractor shall carry out weeding as required throughout the site. All
annual weeds and other unwanted plants shall be cut just above the ground
and the aerial parts will be used to make compost or mulch. Weeds shall not
be pulled out by the roots since this disturbs the ground surface.
(3) Weeding shall be carried out throughout the growing season. It shall be
undertaken with particular diligence at the end of the monsoon, so that there
is the minimum amount of competition during the subsequent dry season.
(4) The Contractor shall carry out mulching as required throughout the site. All
plants required under the bio-engineering specifications will be mulched
using material prepared as specified in Sub-clause 2805 (5), or the aerial
parts of weeds cut on the site or brought from elsewhere for the purpose.
The desired plants shall be kept mulched at all times but especial care shall
be taken in the spring, when the soil moisture deficit is at its greatest.
(5) The Contractor shall replace failed, damaged, diseased and very weak plants,
using fresh, healthy plants of the same species, at the correct time of year for
planting. This replanting operation shall normally be carried out during the
monsoon in the year following the first planting works. Vegetation
structures shall be enriched by the planting of additional cuttings or
seedlings, as instructed by the Engineer. Failed seeding areas shall be
reseeded at the appropriate time of year.
(6) In replanting and enrichment works, the Engineer may specify the use of
different species. This shall be done where failures or poor performance of
plants may be attributed to poor stock or an incorrect initial choice of
species.
(7) All bio-engineering sites shall be maintained so that there are at least the
following two storeys of vegetation. In certain locations, however, there
may be a number of additional vegetation storeys.
(8) In general it shall be necessary to keep the upper canopy thinned in order to
maintain the lower ground cover. Most grasses require high light intensities
and become degraded if subjected to excessive shade from the overstorey. It
shall therefore be the Contractor's responsibility to thin the canopy as
necessary to permit adequate levels of light to penetrate for the optimum
growth of the grass understorey.
(9) All thinning and pruning operations shall be undertaken in accordance with
the guidelines issued by the Geo-Environmental Unit. Since these are
skilled silvicultural operation, the Contractor shall take appropriate
professional advice and employ suitably skilled personnel.
(10) All products from thinning and pruning operations shall be disposed off in
accordance with the regulation of His Majesty's Government. The
Contractor shall follow the instructions of the Engineer in this regard.
(12) Measurement and Payment: The works shall be measured in a lump sum
basis. The item rate shown in the Bill of Quantities shall be the full and the
final compensation to the Contractor for carrying out all works specified
herein including provision of site protection specified in Clause 2810.
Should at any time the Engineer give any instruction for the proper Site
Protection/Aftercare and Maintenance and the Contractor does not respond within
24 hours, the Engineer shall be empowered to instruct others to carry out the
works. Any costs involved by such actions shall be borne by the Contractor.
SECTION 2900 – MAINTENANCE WORKS
Page No.
2901 SCOPE 29-1
2902 RESTORATION OF RAIN CUTS 29-1
2903 MAINTENANCE OF EARTHEN SHOULDERS 29-1
2904 MAINTENANCE OF GRAVEL SHOULDERS AND GRAVEL
CARRIAGEWAY 29-2
2905 BITUMINOUS PATCH WORKS 29-3
2906 MAINTENANCE WITH SLURRY SEAL 29-6
2907 MAINTENANCE WITH SURFACE DRESSING 29-9
2908 MAINTENANCE WITH SAND SEAL 29-9
2909 MAINTENANCE WITH FOG SEAL 29-9
2910 REPAIR OF BRICK SHOULDERS/FOOTPATHS 29-10
SECTION 2900 –MAINTENANCE WORKS
2901. SCOPE
The works mentioned in this Section shall apply to maintenance of road and shall
be carried out manually or by machinery in such a way that the quality of end
product meets the specified requirements. Whenever the Specification is not clear,
good engineering practice shall be applied to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
This Section does not apply to the works as specified in Clause 107 (Maintenance
of Road during Construction and Defects Liability Period).
The work shall consist of restoration of rain cuts in embankment slopes. The
material to be used in the restoration shall be the suitable material conforming to
Clause 902.
The affected area shall be cleared of all loose materials and benched to a width of
about 300 mm. The height of the bench shall vary according to the slope of the
embankment. Suitable material shall be deposited in layers not exceeding 150 mm
and shall be watered/dried as required and compacted using suitable tools or hand
compactor. The final slope and top surface after completion of the filling shall
match with the adjacent slope and surface of the embankment
Measurement
Payment
Quantity measured as provided above shall be paid at the contract unit rate which
shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor as per Clause 112.
Measurement
Payment
Maintenance of earthen shoulder shall be paid as per contract unit rate which shall
be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor as per Clause 112.
The works shall involve repairing of pot holes and making up of irregularities/loss
of materials by adding fresh gravel and/or stripping excess gravel from the surface.
Gravel shall comply with the requirements of Clause 1204 for shoulders and
Clause 1205 for gravel wearing course.
Pothole Repair
Each pothole shall be inspected and all loose material shall be removed. The area
shall be cut down to the subgrade level in a rectangular shape. The edges shall be
cut vertically. The subgrade shall be cleared of all loose materials and hand
compacted. Fresh gravel shall be placed in the pit in layers not exceeding 150
mm and the gravel shall be brought to optimum moisture content and well
compacted with small rollers or other equipment as directed by the Engineer. The
resulting surface shall match with adjacent surface.
Shoulder/Carriageway Repair
(b) Stripping extra gravel from the surface to achieve the required grade and
level.
Wherever extra gravel is required to be added, the existing surface shall be
loosened upto 100mm depth to receive fresh gravel. The deficiency of thickness
shall be corrected by adding suitable gravel in layer of 100 mm. The gravel shall
be brought to optimum moisture content and thoroughly compacted using
roller/compactor to achieve the density as specified in Clause 1205.
The finished surface shall have the specified line, level and cross slope. Straight
edges shall be used to check the profiles.
Measurement
Payment
The maintenance of gravel shoulder and gravel carriageway shall be paid at their
respective contract unit rates which shall be the full and the final compensation to
the Contractor as per Clause 112.
This Clause covers the repair of the potholes and the damaged bituminous surface.
(1) Excavation
The surface of the excavated area shall be swept clean of dust and
other loose materials and shall be primed with MC 30 cutback bitumen.
The sides shall also be tacked/primed with cut back bitumen using
brush. The excavated area shall, then, be filled with hot or cold
premix material. The premix shall have a net bitumen content of 5%
to 6% by weight as directed by the Engineer or as per design mix. The
premix shall then be compacted using equipment approved by the
Engineer.
After compaction, the surface of the patched area shall be true to the
lines and levels of the surrounding existing surface.
The excavated area in base and subbase shall be filled with approved
materials complying with the requirements of base or subbase, as
applicable, conforming to Section 1200 and shall be compacted in
layers not exceeding 100 mm thickness or as directed by the Engineer.
After compaction, the surface of the patched area shall be true to the
lines and levels of the surrounding existing surface.
Where damage of the edge extends into the base/subbase, the edge
repair shall generally be carried out as specified for deep patching.
Excavation shall be to a minimum width of 750 mm covering not less
than 200 mm of the carriageway and not loose less than 500 mm of the
shoulder. The depth of excavation shall be as directed by the Engineer.
The excavated area shall be filled with base and/or subbase material to
a level 40 mm of below the existing level of the road and compacted as
mentioned in deep patching. The surface of compacted base and sides
of the excavated area shall be primed/tacked with MC 30 cut back to a
line 100 mm beyond that of the deep excavation and excavated area
shall be filled with hot or cold premix material and compacted as
specified for the shallow patching.
The final surface shall match with the adjacent surface in line and
levels.
(3) Tolerances
(4) Measurement
(5) Payment
The shallow/deep patching and carriageway edge repair shall be paid at their
respective contract unit rates which shall be the full and the final
compensation to the Contractor as per Clause 112.
This Clause covers the materials, methods of construction and requirements for
the maintenance works with slurry seal.
Slurry seal shall generally be required in the pretreatment of the pavement surface
distress such as cracks, ravelling etc.
(1) Materials
According to nature and severity of the distress, three types of slurry seal
will be applicable.
General slurry seal shall be applicable in porous and cracked road surfaces,
whereas fine slurry seal shall be used in case of narrowly cracked road
surface. For widely cracked and ravelled surface, coarse slurry seal with
max. aggregate size of 10mm shall be used as per Clause 1306.
Maximum batch sizes for each slurry seal mixes will be in the order of
20 kg.
Daily records of consumption of materials and of areas covered shall
be kept and agreed with the Engineer.
(a) Sufficient equipment for handling and hauling aggregate and binder
shall be used in order to ensure prompt and continuous covering of
bituminous slurry seals as specified. All the necessary ancillary
equipment and hand tools to carry out the work efficiently shall be
available.
The road surface shall be broomed and cleaned of all loose or deleterious
material by means of rotary broom and hand broom.
The slurry seal mix will be applied manually. The mix shall be spread
uniformly over the road surface with the help of brooms, spades and other
suitable tools so as to ensure that all cracks on road surface are properly
filled and sealed and resulting surface becomes impervious to ingress of
water. The application of slurry seal mix shall not be done in adverse
weather condition as mentioned in Clause 1102.
(7) Payment
Slurry seal shall be paid at the contract unit rate which shall be the full and
the final compensation to the Contractor as per Clause 112.
The work shall be done in conformity to Clause 1303, except that the use of small
and portable equipment shall be permitted.
The works shall be carried out in conformity with Clause 1305, except that the
use of small and portable equipment as well as labour based technique shall be
permitted.
(1) Material
(2) Application
The area to be applied with fog seal shall be thoroughly cleaned with
compressed air, scrubbers etc. The cracks shall be cleaned with pressure air
jet to remove all dirt, dust etc. The fog seal shall be applied at the rate of
0.5-0.9 litre/sq.m using equipment like a pressure tank, that with flexible
hose and spraying bar. Traffic shall be allowed on the surface after the seal
has set to a non tacky and firm condition so that it is not picked up by the
traffic.
(3) Measurement
The fog seal work shall be paid at the contract unit rate which shall be the
full and the final compensation to the Contractor as per Clause 112.
(1) Materials
(2) Construction
The damaged area shall be marked out in rectangular shape and shall be
excavated with all sides vertical.
The surface of the excavated surface shall be swept clean of dust and loose
materials and shall be filled with base/subase and compacted. On the
prepared base brick shall be laid in the same pattern as the adjoining
surfaces and properly tamped.
The repaired surface shall be to the true profile to facilitate free drainage.
(3) Measurement
(4) Payment
The quantity measured as above shall be paid at the contract unit rate which
shall be the full and the final compensation to the Contractor as per Clause
112.
SECTION 3000 – SUB-SURFACE GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS
Page No.
3001 SCOPE 30-1
3002 FIELD INVESTIGATION 30-1
3003 METHOD OF EXPLORATIONS 30-2
3004 LABORATORY TESTING 30-11
3005 WATER SAMPLES 30-12
3006 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS 30-12
3007 MEASUREMENT 30-12
3008 PAYMENT 30-12
APPENDIX 30.1
SECTION 3000 – MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
3001. SCOPE
(1) Reconnaissance
The scope of the detailed exploration shall include boring programme based
on data obtained after preliminary investigations. The bridge site, types of
structure with span arrangement and the location & type of foundation shall
be tentatively decided based on data obtained after preliminary
investigations. Extent of explorations, number of boreholes, type of
soundings, types and number of tests, open trial pits, etc., shall be decided
for the execution of the exploration so as to collect adequate data considered
necessary for the detailed design and execution of the related structure.
Test/trial pits shall be used for direct visual examination of the soil and its
stratification including water table. This will also allow for the execution of
in-situ tests like plate bearing tests, shear tests, etc. A test/trial pit shall be at
least 1 m square at the bottom of the pit. The depth of the pit shall be 3 m,
unless otherwise specified. Below a depth of about 1.5 m, the sides of the
pit shall be supported or shall be excavated at safe angle. Pits shall be left
open for some time so 1I1at seepage lines on the sides of the pit can be
examined and the existing ground water level can be indicated.
(3) Borings
Boring a hole shall be started by driving casing to prevent it from caving in.
Casing shall be cleaned by means of chopping bit, etc., with the water
pumped through drill rod and water overflows at the top carrying soil
particles. The hole shall be advanced by raising, rotating and dropping the
bit into the soil at the bottom of the hole. In rotary boring, drill bit shall be
rotated with the simultaneously application of pressure to advance the hole.
In case where sample disturbance is not critical, hand or powered auger
boring can also be carried out with the prior approval of the Engineer.
The depth of boring shall depend upon the type of proposed structure,
its total weight, and type of subsoil encountered. Normally tests shall
be taken down below the foundation level depending upon the type of
foundation e.g.
(b) for rock foundation: until sound bed rock is reached and
confirmed by at least 3 m coring by
rotary drilling. In sound bed rock
more than 6m drilling may not be
required. In residual profile it may
be necessary to drill further 3 m to
differentiate rock from drill bit the
boulder.
The spacing of borings shall be such as to reveal any major changes in
the thickness, or properties of the strata over the base area of the
structure and in its immediate vicinity.
For all test/trial pits and borings, general information as detailed below
shall be given. A site plan showing the position of the bore holes/trial
pits shall also be attached.
The final bore hole tog shall be based on the visual examination,
description of the samples, laboratory test results, driller's daily report
forms and geology of the site. All the relevant data collected by the
driller, once checked and amended where necessary, shall be recorded.
The bore hole log shall be maintained in the format shown in
Appendix 30.1
The bore log shall contain the elevation at which the water table and
the upper boundary of each of the successive soil strata were
encountered, the investigator's classification of the layer on the basis
of general information obtained from field examination and the value
of the resistance obtained by means of Standard Penetration Test
(hammer wt.65 kg & falling height 75 cm for rotary drilling attached
with standard split barrel sampler at the bottom connected with drill
rod) or Static Cone Penetration as specified. The type of tools used for
boring shall be recorded. If the tools were changed, the depth at which
the change was made and the reason thereof shall also be noted.
Incomplete and abandoned borings shall be described with no less care
than successfully completed drill holes. The notes shall contain
everything of significance observed on the job, such as the elevation at
which wash water was lost from the hole, etc. All field and final logs
shall be signed by the supervising Engineer.
Only samples that are unaltered and not damaged by drilling process
shall be considered as core. Core drill shall be so designed that in
sound rock, continuous recovery is achieved. Run shall be short in
order to achieve maximum core recovery. Where there is core loss, it
shall be noted on field borelog. It shall be shown by placing wooden
stick in the core box so that Engineer can judge how much core has
been achieved.
The core box shall be made of good and durable material. The boxes
shall bear lids and hinges. The files inside the core boxes shall have a
length of 1.05 m.
The cores shall be carefully extracted out of the core barrel and placed
in core boxes. Core shall correspond each time to the fixed depth with
accuracy of 1 cm.
(I) Sampling
There shall be two types of samples, (a) Disturbed sample and (b)
Undisturbed sample. The usual methods for sampling shall be as
stated below.
(a) Soil
Hand Samples
Auger Samples
Sludge Samples
SPT Sample
Sample Extracted from Barrel
(b) Rock
(a) Soil
E. Sand Sampler: for silts and sands below the water table
(like Bishop sand sampler)
(b) Rock
Where undisturbed soil sampling, in-situ vane shear test and SPT are
to be carried out in one layer, the sequence shall be undisturbed soil
sampling followed by in situ vane shear test and SPT.
The disturbed material in the upper end of the tube shall be completely
removed before applying wax for sealing. The length and type of
sample so removed shall be recorded.
The soil at the lower end of the tube shall be reamed to a distance of
about 20 mm. After cleaning, both ends shall be sealed with wax
applied in a way that shall prevent wax from entering the sample.
Wax used for sealing shall not be heated to more than a few degrees
above its melting temperature. The empty space in the samplers, if
any, shall be filled with moist soil, saw dust etc., and the ends shall be
covered with tight fitting caps.
This test shall be carried out for deep foundation of bridges for cohesive soil
according to the stipulations of IS: 4968 (Part 3) or equivalent standard.
(5) Dynamic Cone Penetration Test
This test shall be carried out as per IS: 2131. Wherever applicable, this test
shall also be carried out as per IS: 4968 (Parts 1 &2).
For cohesion less soil in deep foundation, plate load test shall be carried out
as per IS: 1888.
Vane shear test shall be conducted as per IS: 4434 on cohesive soil for deep
foundation.
(i) Depth of Rock strata and its variation over the site
(ii) Whether isolated boulder or massive rock formation,
(iii) Extent & character of weathered zone
(iv) Structure of rock- including bedding planes, faults, fissures, solution
cavities etc.
(v) Properties of rock material strength, geological formation etc.
(vi) Erodibility of rock to the extent possible.
(vii) Colour of water/sludge
The investigation shall be generally to that required for rock. The samples
collected shall be subjected to suitable tests depending upon the material.
Care shall be taken to ascertain erodibility of the matrix . For shallow
foundation, Plate Load Test shall be conducted.
The supervision of the work shall be the carried out by a qualified and
experienced Engineer.
3004. LABORATORY TESTING
The driller shall be experienced and also responsible for recording the information
obtained from the bore hole.
The above test shall be carried out as per Section 600 of these Standard
Specifications.
If a trial pit has been excavated or a well exists near the site of exploration, water
samples shall collected. In the case if boring, it shall be collected from the
borehole with the help of a common suction pump having a hose pipe, rubber
tubing etc. which can be conveniently lowered down into the borehole connected
at the suction end. Minimum 5 lit. of water sample shall be collected into a clean
vessel and sent to the laboratory for chemical tests. Tests shall be carried out in
accordance with IS: 3025 or equivalent stanpard as per direction of the Engineer.
The investigation shall conclude with the recommendation for the proper type of
foundation for the related structure. The recommendation shall be supported by
all details of investigations and their results
3007. MEASUREMENT
Boring in rock and/or soil shall be measured separately in linear metre with
reference to the ground level in the following multiples:
3008. PAYMENT
Page No.
3101 SCOPE 31-1
3102 PRECAST MEMBERS 31-1
3103 OPEN JOINT, FILLED JOINTS, BOARD FILLERS AND SHEET
PACKING 31-1
3104 WEARING COAT 31-2
3105 RAILINGS 31-3
3106 APPROACH SLAB 31-5
3107 DRAINAGE SPOUTS 31-6
3108 UTILITY FACILITIES 31-7
3109 WEEP HOLES 31-8
3110 FILTER MATERIALS 31-8
SECTION 3100 – MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
3101. SCOPE
This Section cover the works related to the construction of miscellaneous works
such as precast members, joints, wearing coat on drainage structure, railings,
approach slab, drainage spouts and weep holes. These miscellaneous works are to
be constructed in connection with the structures.
(1) Materials
Concrete and reinforcement for precast members shall comply with Section
2000.
(3) Measurement
Depending upon the nature of works, pre-cast members shall be measured in
numbers, cubic meters or metric tonnes as specified in the Contract.
Reinforcement shall not be measured for payment.
(4) Payment
The quantities measured as provided above shall be paid at the contract unit
rate applicable for the particular type of work. The contract unit rate shall
be the full and the final payment to the Contractor as per Clause 112 to
complete the work as per these Specifications.
Open joints shall be constructed at the locations shown in the Drawing using
suitable stops, which are to be subsequently removed. When removing the
material, care shall be exercised to avoid chipping or breaking the corners of
the concrete. The edges of the concrete, at the joints, shall be properly
finished. Reinforcement shall not extend across an open joint, unless
otherwise shown on the Drawing.
Hardboard joint filler shall be minimum of 3mm thick and approved by the
Engineer. Expanded polystyrene board shall have a minimum flexural
strength of 0.25 N/sq.mm. and a compressive yjeld strength of 0.11
N/sq.mm. minimum and 0.28 N/sq.mm maximum at 5% compression.
Vertical faces of polystyrene against which concrete is to be placed shall be
faced with hardboard of 3mm minimum thickness or other equivalent
material. Other board fillers may be used with the approval of the Engineer.
All board fillers shall be held in place with nails, a waterproof adhesive or
other means approved by the Engineer.
Asbestos sheet packing shall have the approval of the Engineer. It shall be
approximately 1.6 mm thick unless otherwise shown on the Drawing or
specified in the contract and shall be composed essentially of asbestos
firbres bound together with a cementing medium rendering it tough and
pliable. One side shall be coated with graphite. The deformation of the
packing under a load of 70 N/sq.mm shall not be more than 16% and the
loss on ignition shall not be more than 25%. When tested between planed
bronze plates under a load of 5 N/sq.mm the 3' packing shall show a static
coefficient of friction of less than 0.4 after 100 lateral movements at 6.5mm.
(5) Measurement
Open joints, filled joints, board fillers and sheet packing shall not be
measured separately.
(6) Payment
No separate payment for open joints, filled joints, board fillers and sheet
packing shall be made. The cost of such joints is deemed to be included in
the unit rate of the structures, where those joints are required to be formed.
3104. WEARING COAT
The wearing coat shall be the asphalt concrete/surface dressing and shall
comply with Section 1300.
The cross slope in the deck shall be kept as 2.5 percent. For providing cross
camber no variation in thickness of wearing coat shall be permitted.
(3) Measurement
(4) Payment
3105. RAILINGS
(1) General
(a) Railing includes the portion of the structure erected on and above the
kerb or slab for the protection of pedestrians and traffic as shown on
the Drawing.
(b) Railings shall not be constructed until the false work for the span has
been released. For concrete with steel reinforcement, specifications of
the items of concrete and reinforcement mentioned under relevant
Sections of these Specifications shall be applicable.
(c) Railing shall be carefully erected true to line and grade. Posts shall be
vertical with a tolerance not exceeding 0.2%. The pockets left for
posts shall be filled up with the concrete of the same grade as the post.
(d) The type of railing to be constructed shall be as shown on the Drawing.
(e) Expansion joint in the railings shall be maintained to ensure proper
functioning of the joint.
(f) Railing materials, particularly metal railings, shall be handled and
stored with care, so that the material and parts are kept clean and free
from damage. Railing materials shall be stored above the ground on
platforms, skids or other supports and kept free from grease, dirt and
other contaminants.
(a) GI Pipe
All GI pipes shall be free from abrasions, rough or sharp edges, and
shall not be kinked, twisted or bent. Any pipe which does not meet the
requirements of the field Specifications shall be replaced at the
Contractor's expense.
The concrete grade and type of reinforcements for concrete posts shall
be as indicated in the Drawing. The specifications for concrete and
reinforcements shall be as provided under Section 2000.
(6) Measurement
(7) Payment
Railing, measured as provided above, shall be paid at the contract unit rate. The
contract unit rate shall be the full and the final payment to the Contractor as per
Clause 112 to complete the work as per these Specifications.
3106. APPROACH SLAB
(1) General
The gap between the approach slab and superstructures shall be watertight
by filling the gap with approved joint filler. The type and thickness of the
base of approach slab shall be as shown on the Drawing and shall be
constructed as per the requirements of Section 1200. The concrete and
reinforcements shall conform to Section 2000.
(2) Measurement
Approach slab and its base shall be measured separately in cubic meters.
(3) Payment
(2) Fabrication
The whole assembly shall be placed in true position, lines and levels as
shown on the Drawings with necessary cut-out in the shuttering for deck
slab and held in place firmly. Where the reinforcements of the deck are
required to be cut, equivalent reinforcements shall be placed at the corners
of the assembly.
(4) Finishing
After setting of the deck slab concrete, the shrinkage cracks around the
assembly shall be totally sealed with polysulphide sealant or bituminous
sealant as per 18:1834 and the excess sealant trimmed to receive the wearing
coat. After the wearing coat is completed, similar sealant shall be finished
to cover at least 50 mm on the wearing coat surface all round the drainage
assembly.
(5) Measurement
(6) Payment
Drainage spouts shall not be paid separately. The contract unit rate for
concrete shall be deemed to include costs for forming such spouts.
(1) General
Hangers, anchor bolt inserts, manhole frames and covers, sleeves and other
accessories required for such facilities, which must be cast in the concrete
shall be furnished by the respective authorities or the Contractor as
described in the contract and shall be installed by the Contractor in
accordance with the details shown on the Drawing or as directed by the
Engineer. Utility facilities which require installation after the concrete has
been cast and before other construction is in place which would interfere
with it's installation, will be installed, either by the authorities concerned or
by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer at such times as the work is
ready for their installation. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in
writing at least 30 days in advance of the proposed dates, that the work will
be ready for installation of ere accessories of utilities in the structure. The
Engineer, in turn, shall make necessary arrangements with the utility
authorities.
(3) Measurement
(4) Payment
Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, utility facility shall not be paid
separately. The cost of utility facility shall be deemed to be included in the
unit rates of different items of work of structure.
(2) Measurement
(3) Payment
Weep holes shall not be paid separately. The contract unit rate for
respective items shall be deemed to include costs for providing such holes.
3110. FILTER MATERIALS
(1) Materials
Geotextile shall comply with Section 600. Geomembrane shall comply with
Sub-clause 2404 (2).
d15% filter b)
d50% filter
a) <5 <2
d85% subsoil d50% subsoil
5
b)
d15% filter
>5
d15% subsoil
Where, d15% designates the 15% size of the material (i.e. the size of the
sieve that allows 15% by weight of the material to pass through it).
Similarly, d50% and d85% designate the sizes of sieve that allow 50% and
85% respectively by weight of the material to pass through it.
(2) Construction
Minimum one set of test for gradation and compaction of filter material
shall be executed for every 50 cu.m. and every change in source of material.
The results shall meet the specified requirements.
(4) Measurement
(5) Payment